Tekla - Concrete Components Reference - 1

Tekla Structures 2017i
Concrete components reference
September 2017
©2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation

Contents
1 Concrete Detailing ...................................................................... 13

1.1 Seating connections ....................................................................................... 13
Seating with dowel (75) ....................................................................................................... 14
Defining bolt hole dimensions ......................................................................................16
Fitting the beam or column (75) ................................................................................... 16
Defining grout (75, 76) ................................................................................................... 17
Chamfering corbels ........................................................................................................ 17
Creating a recess (75, 76) ...............................................................................................18
Defining recess dimensions .......................................................................................... 18
Bearing plate position (75, 76) ...................................................................................... 18
Two-sided seating with dowel (76) .....................................................................................19
Fitting beam or column (76) .......................................................................................... 21
Shaping beam ends (76, 78) .......................................................................................... 21
Seating with dowel to flange (77) .......................................................................................21
Creating a recess (77, 78) ...............................................................................................23
Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78) .................................................................... 23
1.2 Beam and column connections..................................................................... 25
Battering connection (13) ................................................................................................... 26
Corbel connection (14) ......................................................................................................... 27
Corbel connection (14): Picture tab................................................................................29
Corbel connection (14): Parts tab................................................................................... 33
Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab................................................................. 34
Column - beam (14)............................................................................................................... 38
Column - beam (14): Picture tab..................................................................................... 39
Column - beam (14): Column tab................................................................................... 43
Corbels and recesses (82)..................................................................................................... 45
Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab....................................45
Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab............................................................... 51
Concrete console (110) ........................................................................................................51
Concrete console (110): Picture tab ............................................................................. 52
Concrete console (110): Parts tab .................................................................................56
Concrete console (110): Connection tab ......................................................................58
Concrete console (110): Parameters tab ..................................................................... 59
Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab .................................................................... 60
Concrete console (110): Socket tab .............................................................................. 63
Concrete console (111) ........................................................................................................63
Concrete console (111): Picture tab ............................................................................. 65
Concrete console (111): Parts tab .................................................................................65
Concrete console (111): Anchor tab ............................................................................. 68
Concrete console (111): Anchor rods ........................................................................... 69
Concrete console (111): Socket tab ............................................................................... 71
Concrete beam-beam (112).................................................................................................. 72
Picture tab......................................................................................................................... 73
Parts tab............................................................................................................................ 82
Anchors tab....................................................................................................................... 84
Parameters tab................................................................................................................. 85
2
Anchor rods tab................................................................................................................ 86
Socket tab.......................................................................................................................... 98
Rebars in primary tab / Rebars in secondary tab.........................................................99
General tab / Analysis tab............................................................................................. 101
1.3 Panels and walls............................................................................................ 101
Wall to wall connection....................................................................................................... 101
Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab..................................................................... 102
Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab...................................................................... 103
Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab..................................................................... 104
Wall groove seam detail......................................................................................................107
Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab....................................................................108
Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab.....................................................................109
Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab....................................................................110
Anchor (10)........................................................................................................................... 113
Anchor (10): Picture tab................................................................................................. 115
Anchor (10): Anchors tab...............................................................................................117
Anchor (10): Conn profile tab.......................................................................................120
Anchor (10): Bolts tab .................................................................................................. 123
Anchor (10): Cuts tab ................................................................................................... 124
Wall wall teeth (12) ............................................................................................................ 128
Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab .................................................................................. 129
Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab ..................................................................................... 131
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab...................................................................................133
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab................................................................................ 134
Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab ................................................................................... 135
Electric box in wall (84)........................................................................................................136
Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab............................................................................. 139
Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab.................................................................................142
Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab......................................................................143
Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab................................................147
Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab.................................................................................. 149
Sandwich And Double Wall.................................................................................................152
Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab..........................................................................154
Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab........................................................ 161
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab...................................................164
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab................................................................. 170
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab........................................................... 172
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab...........................................................................175
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam........................................................................................ 176
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab.............................................................. 178
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab............................................................ 181
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab......................................................... 181
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam..............................................................................................183
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab................................................................... 185
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab................................................................. 187
Sandwich wall window........................................................................................................ 190
Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 192
Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab.................................................. 194
Top detail tab.................................................................................................................. 198
Extra foils tab.................................................................................................................. 202
Additional parts tab....................................................................................................... 203
Connections tab............................................................................................................. 206
Door side detail tab / Door bottom detail tab............................................................ 207
Wall layout tools.................................................................................................................. 211
Wall layout.......................................................................................................................212
3
Modify the wall layout................................................................................................... 219
Wall layout opening....................................................................................................... 223
Wall layout seam............................................................................................................ 226
Wall layout connector.................................................................................................... 229
Wall layout elementation.............................................................................................. 230
Wall layout layer swapper............................................................................................. 232
Customize the wall layout............................................................................................. 233
1.4 Formwork components................................................................................ 233
Beam Formwork ................................................................................................................. 234
Beam Formwork: Beam tab.......................................................................................... 235
Beam Formwork: Parameters tab................................................................................ 237
Column Formwork ..............................................................................................................238
Column Formwork: Column tab................................................................................... 240
Wall Formwork..................................................................................................................... 242
Wall Formwork: Panel tab............................................................................................. 244
Wall Formwork: Parameters tab...................................................................................245
General Beam Form............................................................................................................ 246
Beam Form: Parameters tab.........................................................................................248
General Wall Form .............................................................................................................. 249
Wall Form: Parameters tab........................................................................................... 251
General Clamp .................................................................................................................... 252
General Clamp: Parameters tab................................................................................... 253
General Clip.......................................................................................................................... 254
General Clip: Parameters tab........................................................................................255
General Tie........................................................................................................................... 256
General Tie: Parameters tab......................................................................................... 257
General Tie and Clips.......................................................................................................... 258
General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab........................................................................ 260
1.5 Openings........................................................................................................ 260
Hole Generation (32) .......................................................................................................... 261
Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab.........................................................................261
Polygon Hole Generation (33)............................................................................................ 263
Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab..........................................................263
1.6 Flooring...........................................................................................................264
Automatic seam recognition (30)......................................................................................265
Seam Applicator...................................................................................................................266
Seam Applicator: Parameters tab................................................................................ 268
Modeling of floor bay (66) ................................................................................................ 268
Examples ....................................................................................................................... 270
Defining slab position .................................................................................................. 273
Defining projection type .............................................................................................. 274
Defining slab profile properties ..................................................................................275
Index list ........................................................................................................................ 275
Adjustment type ........................................................................................................... 276
Profile/Seam width .......................................................................................................277
Sloping slab drainage.......................................................................................................... 277
Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab........................................................................278
Hollow Core Opening Tool..................................................................................................280
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab................................................................281
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab......................................................284
Hollow Core Lifting Loops...................................................................................................284
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab............................................................. 285
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab............................................... 287
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab...................................................... 287
4
Floor Tool.............................................................................................................................. 288
Floor Tool: Slab properties tab..................................................................................... 289
Floor Tool: Insulation tab...............................................................................................290
Floor Tool: Bay contour tab...........................................................................................291
Floor Tool: Slab list tab...................................................................................................291
Floor layout.......................................................................................................................... 292
Layer tab..........................................................................................................................294
General tab..................................................................................................................... 295
Advanced tab.................................................................................................................. 297
Default offsets................................................................................................................ 298
Detailing tab....................................................................................................................299
User defined tab.............................................................................................................301
Modifying a floor............................................................................................................ 302
Floor Layout CIP Filler......................................................................................................... 317
1.7 Concrete stairs...............................................................................................318
Concrete stairs (65) .............................................................................................................319
Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab......................................................................................321
Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab.......................................................................... 324
Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab................................................................................326
Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab.................................................................................... 327
Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab................................................................................ 330
Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab.............................................................. 332
Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab.............................................................................. 333
Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab........................................................................................334
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90)....................................................................................334
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining stairwell properties........................... 337
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining number of floors and height........... 337
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining position ...............................................337
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining length and width............................... 338
Reinforced concrete stair (95)............................................................................................ 338
Parameters tab............................................................................................................... 340
Parts tab.......................................................................................................................... 341
Stairs and landings tab.................................................................................................. 342
Ridges tab........................................................................................................................344
Stringers tab....................................................................................................................346
Anti-skid tab.................................................................................................................... 347
Bar A tab..........................................................................................................................348
Bar B tab..........................................................................................................................348
Bar C tab..........................................................................................................................350
Bar D tab......................................................................................................................... 351
Bar E tab.......................................................................................................................... 353
Bar F tab.......................................................................................................................... 354
Bar G tab......................................................................................................................... 355
Bar H tab......................................................................................................................... 356
Bar I tab........................................................................................................................... 357
Bar J tab........................................................................................................................... 358
Bar K tab.......................................................................................................................... 359
Bar L tab.......................................................................................................................... 360
Mesh picture tab............................................................................................................ 361
Mesh attributes tab........................................................................................................362
Mesh bars tab................................................................................................................. 363
Bottom anchor bars tab................................................................................................ 363
Top anchor bars tab....................................................................................................... 364
Z anchor bars tab........................................................................................................... 365
Landing end bars tab..................................................................................................... 366
5
UDA tab........................................................................................................................... 367
Configuration tab........................................................................................................... 367
1.8 Foundations................................................................................................... 368
Precast foundation block (1028) ...................................................................................... 368
Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab ............................................................369
Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab ............................................................... 372
Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab ..........................................................372
Concrete foundation (1030)............................................................................................... 373
Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab..................................................................... 376
Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab........................................................................ 381
Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab................................................................... 383
Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab......................................................................... 385
Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab................................................. 386
Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab....................................................................389
Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab....................................................................390
2 Reinforcement........................................................................... 393
2.1 Reinforcement for foundations ..................................................................393
Strip footing (75) ................................................................................................................ 394
Strip footing reinforcement properties ..................................................................... 395
Pile cap reinforcement (76) .............................................................................................. 396
Pad footing and pile cap shapes ................................................................................ 398
Bar distribution .............................................................................................................398
Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps ................................................................. 399
Pad footing (77) ..................................................................................................................401
Starter bars .........................................................................................................................402
Starter bar stirrups .......................................................................................................404
Starter bar location ...................................................................................................... 405
2.2 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement .................................................... 405
Detailing manager ............................................................................................................. 406
Mesh Bars.............................................................................................................................408
Mesh Bars: Picture tab...................................................................................................409
Mesh Bars: Detailing tab............................................................................................... 410
Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab..............................................................................412
Mesh Bars: Splicing tab ............................................................................................... 413
Mesh Bars: Attributes tab............................................................................................. 414
Mesh Bars by Area...............................................................................................................414
Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab.....................................................................................415
Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab................................................................................. 418
Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab................................................................420
Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab ................................................................................. 420
Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab............................................................................... 422
Rebar coupler.......................................................................................................................422
Rebar coupler: Parameters tab.................................................................................... 424
Rebar coupler: Attributes tab....................................................................................... 425
Rebar end anchor................................................................................................................ 426
Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab..............................................................................427
Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab.................................................................................428
Split rebar and add coupler................................................................................................429
Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab............................................................. 431
Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab................................................................ 433
Rebar end trimming............................................................................................................ 434
Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends................................................ 435
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes........................................... 435
6
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping
and user-defined attributes (UDAs).................................................................................. 436
Slab bars (18)........................................................................................................................438
Slab reinforcement properties ................................................................................... 440
Slab Reinforcement Tool.....................................................................................................441
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab.................................................................. 441
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab......................................................................443
Beam reinforcement (63) ..................................................................................................444
Beam reinforcement (63): Beam reinforcement properties ................................... 447
Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab........................................................... 447
Double tee reinforcement (64) .........................................................................................448
Double tee reinforcement properties ........................................................................449
Beam end reinforcement (79)........................................................................................... 451
Beam end reinforcing bars ..........................................................................................452
Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 ........................................................................................... 453
Vertical U bars 3A and 3B ............................................................................................ 453
Stirrups 5A and 5B ....................................................................................................... 454
Corbel reinforcement (81).................................................................................................. 454
Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab...................................................................456
Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs.. 457
Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab..........................................................458
Round column reinforcement (82).................................................................................... 459
Main bars tab..................................................................................................................462
Stirrups tab..................................................................................................................... 462
Stirrup attributes tab..................................................................................................... 464
Top tab............................................................................................................................. 465
Bottom tab...................................................................................................................... 466
Advanced (main bars) tab............................................................................................. 467
Rectangular column reinforcement (83)...........................................................................467
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab........................................... 470
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab............................................. 471
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab.............................................472
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab............................................... 473
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab............................. 475
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab...................................... 477
Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) .................................................................. 479
Hole creation and reinforcement (85) .............................................................................482
Reinforcement around holes ...................................................................................... 483
Stirrups at holes ........................................................................................................... 484
Braced girder (88)................................................................................................................ 485
Braced girder (88): Picture tab...................................................................................... 487
Braced girder (88): Parts tab......................................................................................... 490
Braced girder (88): Geometry tab.................................................................................501
Braced girder (88): Double wall tab..............................................................................503
Braced girder (89) ............................................................................................................... 505
Braced girder (89): Picture tab...................................................................................... 508
Braced girder (89): Parts tab......................................................................................... 510
Braced girder (89): Geometry tab.................................................................................520
Braced girder (89): Double wall tab..............................................................................522
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91)................... 524
Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 525
Overlapping tab..............................................................................................................528
Attributes tab.................................................................................................................. 528
Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening reinforcement.................529
Picture tab....................................................................................................................... 530
7
Reinforcement tab......................................................................................................... 531
Opening tab.................................................................................................................... 533
Diagonals tab.................................................................................................................. 534
Column tab......................................................................................................................534
Beam tab......................................................................................................................... 535
Additional tab................................................................................................................. 536
Attributes tab.................................................................................................................. 536
Multiple Wire Size Mesh......................................................................................................536
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab.........................................................537
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab.......................................538
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab...................................................................... 539
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns............... 540
Embedded anchors (8) ....................................................................................................... 540
Embedded anchors (8): Input tab.................................................................................544
Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab....................................................................... 548
Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab................................................................ 554
Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab....................................................................... 556
Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab..............................................................................561
Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab........................................................................... 564
Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab.................................................................... 566
Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab.................................................................................567
Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab............................................................... 569
Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab................................................................... 571
Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab.................................................................574
Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab.......................................................................577
Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab.........................................................................579
Embedded anchors (8): Bolts........................................................................................580
Embed (1008)....................................................................................................................... 581
Embed (1008): Picture tab............................................................................................. 582
Embed (1008): Top part tab...........................................................................................584
Embed (1008): Bottom part tab....................................................................................585
Embed (1008): Parts tab................................................................................................ 585
Embed (1008): Placement tab.......................................................................................586
Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab.............................................................................. 588
Embed (1008): Advanced tab........................................................................................ 589
Embed (1008): Bolts....................................................................................................... 589
Continuous Beam Reinforcement..................................................................................... 591
2.3 Lifting..............................................................................................................592
Lifting anchor (80)...............................................................................................................593
Lifting anchor properties .............................................................................................595
Custom components as lifting anchors......................................................................597
Creating recesses for lifting anchors ......................................................................... 598
Anchor properties from file .........................................................................................598
3 Automated Reinforcement Layout .........................................600

3.1 Automated reinforcement layout tools .................................................... 601
3.2 Double-tee beam (51)....................................................................................601
Double-tee beam (51): Strand template tab.................................................................... 602
Double-tee beam (51): Strand pattern tab....................................................................... 605
Double-tee beam (51): Strand profile tab.........................................................................606
Double-tee beam (51): Longitudinal rebar tab................................................................ 607
Double-tee beam (51): Stem mesh tab............................................................................. 608
Double-tee beam (51): Multiple sheets tab...................................................................... 610
Double-tee beam (51): Stem stirrups tab......................................................................... 610
8
Double-tee beam (51): Flange tab..................................................................................... 614
Double-tee beam (51): Notch/Opening tab......................................................................615
Double-tee beam (51): Edge reinforcement tab.............................................................. 618
3.3 Inverted-tee beam (52) ................................................................................ 620
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 623
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................623
Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 624
Longitudinal rebar ............................................................................................................. 625
Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................627
Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................628
Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 630
Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 631
Composite .......................................................................................................................... 632
End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 633
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 634
3.4 Ledge beam (53) ............................................................................................634
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 637
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................638
Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 638
Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................642
Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................643
Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 644
Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 645
Composite .......................................................................................................................... 646
End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 647
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 648
3.5 Rectangular beam (54) .................................................................................649
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 651
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................652
Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 652
Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................655
Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................656
Composite .......................................................................................................................... 658
End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 659
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 660
3.6 Ledge spandrel (55) ...................................................................................... 660
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 663
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................663
Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 664
Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................667
Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................667
Ledge mesh ........................................................................................................................ 669
Ledge rebar ........................................................................................................................ 670
End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 670
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 671
3.7 Rectangular spandrel (56) ........................................................................... 672
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 674
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................674
Strand profile ..................................................................................................................... 675
9
Stem mesh ..........................................................................................................................678
Stem stirrups ......................................................................................................................679
End rebar ............................................................................................................................ 681
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 682
3.8 Columns (57) ................................................................................................. 682
Strand reinforcement ........................................................................................................685
Primary ties ........................................................................................................................ 691
Secondary reinforcement ................................................................................................. 698
Circular column ..................................................................................................................699
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 700
3.9 Topping (58) ................................................................................................... 701
Topping ............................................................................................................................... 702
Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 703
3.10 Wash (59) ....................................................................................................... 704
Wash ....................................................................................................................................706
Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 707
3.11 Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) .....................................................707
Strand template ................................................................................................................. 708
Strand pattern ....................................................................................................................710
Attributes ............................................................................................................................ 711
3.12 Post-tensioning (61) ..................................................................................... 711
Tendon properties ............................................................................................................. 712
Tendon profile ....................................................................................................................713
3.13 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62).......................................................... 714
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab...........................................................715
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab............................................ 717
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U bars tab.......................... 718
3.14 U Bar of concrete slab (63) .......................................................................... 721
U bars .................................................................................................................................. 722
3.15 Wall panel (64) .............................................................................................. 723
Strand template................................................................................................................... 725
Strand pattern......................................................................................................................725
Longitudinal rebar............................................................................................................... 727
Transverse mesh..................................................................................................................727
Transverse straight bars..................................................................................................... 729
Transverse stirrups..............................................................................................................730
Notch opening..................................................................................................................... 732
3.16 Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) ............................................................. 735
Strand template................................................................................................................... 735
Strand pattern......................................................................................................................736
Strand profile....................................................................................................................... 737
Attributes.............................................................................................................................. 738
4 CS Components ......................................................................... 739

4.1 3D cut (10) ......................................................................................................739
3D cut (10): Picture tab ......................................................................................................740
4.2 Opening in wall (40) ......................................................................................741
Opening in wall (40): Opening tab.................................................................................... 742
Type ................................................................................................................................742
Horizontal position .......................................................................................................743
10
Vertical ........................................................................................................................... 744
Horizontal offset, vertical offset ................................................................................. 746
Rabbet - side ................................................................................................................. 746
Cut - rotation .................................................................................................................747
Shape of the opening ...................................................................................................747
Opening in wall (40): Insulation tab..................................................................................748
Opening in wall (40): Parameters tab...............................................................................748
4.3 Rebar in beam (90) ....................................................................................... 748
Primary bottom bars ......................................................................................................... 751
Grade ............................................................................................................................. 751
Size ................................................................................................................................. 751
End conditions left ....................................................................................................... 751
End conditions right ..................................................................................................... 752
Bend lengths left .......................................................................................................... 752
Bend lengths right ........................................................................................................ 752
Bar not to create ...........................................................................................................753
Creation method .......................................................................................................... 753
Positioning and distances ........................................................................................... 754
Shape and pattern ....................................................................................................... 755
Primary top bars ................................................................................................................ 757
Side left ............................................................................................................................... 757
Side right .............................................................................................................................759
Stirrups ............................................................................................................................... 759
Stirrup spacing ................................................................................................................... 763
Stirrup reference .......................................................................................................... 763
Omit stirrups .................................................................................................................763
Stirrups 2 ............................................................................................................................ 764
Stirrup spacing 2 ................................................................................................................ 765
Stirrups 3 ............................................................................................................................ 765
Stirrup spacing 3 ................................................................................................................ 765
Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 766
Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 766
Bending radius ..............................................................................................................767
Rotation ......................................................................................................................... 767
4.4 Border rebar for single edge (93) ................................................................ 767
Pins ...................................................................................................................................... 769
Pin spacing ..........................................................................................................................769
Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 770
Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 770
Extra rotation ................................................................................................................ 771
Bending radius sec ....................................................................................................... 771
Detect outside geometry .............................................................................................771
Detect negative volume ...............................................................................................774
Draw axis ....................................................................................................................... 775
5 Disclaimer...................................................................................776
11
12
1 Concrete Detailing
This section introduces the concrete detailing tools available in Tekla

Structures.
Click the links below to find out more:
• Seating connections (page 13)
• Beam and column connections (page 25)
• Panels and walls (page 101)
• Formwork components (page 233)
• Openings (page 260)
• Flooring (page 264)
• Concrete stairs (page 318)
• Foundations (page 367)
NOTE Precast components can only be applied to precast cast units. They
cannot be applied to cast-in-place cast units.
1.1 Seating connections

Tekla Structures includes several seating connections that you can use to
connect concrete columns and beams using anchor bolts. The seating
connection tools are:
Component Description
Seating with dowel (75) Connects a column and beam using an
(page 14) anchor bolt.
Two-sided seating with Connects a column and two beams
dowel (76) (page 18) using anchor bolts.
Seating with dowel to Connects the flanges of a beam to a
flange (77) (page 21) column using anchor bolts.
Concrete Detailing 13 Seating connections

Two-sided seating with Connects the flanges of two beams to a
dowel to flange (78) column using anchor bolts.
(page 23)
Seating with dowel (75)

Connects a column and a beam using an anchor bolt.
Parts created
• Anchor bolt
• Nut
• Washer plate
• Bearing plate
• Fittings for beam and column
• Hole for bolt
• Corbel (optional)
• Recess for nut and washer plate (optional)
Where to use
Situation Description
Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt.
Washer plate and nut protrude from the beam.

Connects a beam and a column using an anchor bolt
and a beveled corbel. Washer plate and nut recessed
into the beam.
Before you start

Create the following parts:
• Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel (75) dialog box to define the following
properties:
Tab Contents See also

Picture Position of anchor bolt, bolt hole Defining bolt hole
and bearing plate, bolt hole dimensions (page 16)
dimensions, option to fit beam
Fitting the beam or column
or column, grout type, beam
(75) (page 16)
clearance
Defining grout (75, 76)
(page 16)
Parts Bearing plate, grout, washer Creating a recess (75, 76)
plate, nut, recess, and anchor (page 18)
bolt properties
Corbel Option to create corbel, corbel Chamfering corbels
properties (page 17)
General General tab
Analysis Information used in structural Analysis tab
analysis
Picking order
1. Column
2. Beam

Defining bolt hole dimensions
Enter the following bolt hole dimensions:
Field Description
1 Hole dimension in the direction of the beam
2 The distance from beam center line to hole center
and bolt.
3 Hole dimension in the direction perpendicular to
the beam.
Fitting the beam or column (75)

Select one of the following options to have Tekla Structures fit the column or
the beam:
Option Description
Fits the column.
(Default)
Fits the beam.

The beam must be sloped.

Defining grout (75, 76)
Select one of the following options to include and define grout:
Option Description
No grout.
(Default)
Bolt hole grouted. No nut or washer plate.
Bolt hole grouted. Bolt, washer plate, and

anchor bolt protruding.
Chamfering corbels
The options for chamfering corbels are:
Option Description
Beveled
(Default)
Straight
Rounded

Creating a recess (75, 76)
Select one of the following options to define if the nut and washer plate are
recessed into the beam:
Option Description
Nut and washer plate on the surface of
the beam.
(Default)
Nut and bolt plate recessed into the

beam.
Defining recess dimensions

If you choose to recess the nut and washer plate into the beam, enter the
following dimensions to define the recess:
Bearing plate position (75, 76)

Select one of the following options to define the position of the bearing plate:
Option Description
Square with beam.
(Default)
Square with column.

Two-sided seating with dowel (76)
Connects a column and two beams using anchor bolts.
Parts created
• Anchor bolts (2)
• Nuts (2)
• Washer plates (2)
• Bearing plates (2)
• Fittings for beam and column (2)
• Holes for bolts (2)
• Corbels (optional) (2)
• Recesses for washer plate and nut (optional) (2)
Where to use
Option Description
Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts
and creates corbels. Nuts and washer plates on the
surface of the beams.
Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts.

Nuts and washer plates recessed into the beams.
Second beam is sloped, and is cut to create a gap
between the beam and the column.
Before you start

• Concrete column (round or rectangular profile)
• Two concrete beams (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (76) dialog box to define
the following properties:
Tab Contents More information

Picture Dimensions defining the To use the same dimensions for
position of the anchor bolts both beams, set Use the same
relative to the beams and parameters for left and right
bearing plates. beams to Yes and enter the
dimensions for the left beam
Options to cut and shape the
only.
ends of the beams and to fit
column or beams. Shaping beam ends (76, 78)
(page 21)
Fitting beam or column (76)
(page 20)
Parts Bearing plate, bolt, nut and
anchor bolt properties
Left beam Left beam is the first beam Defining bolt hole dimensions
picked and right is the (page 16)
Right beam
second.
Anchor bolt, bolt hole and (page 18)
recess properties.
Defining recess dimensions
Clearance between beam (page 18)
and column if beam is
sloped.
Corbel Option to create corbel, Chamfering corbels (page 17)
corbel properties
General General tab
Analysis Information needed for Analysis tab
structural analysis
Picking order
1. Column
2. Beam 1
3. Beam 2
Click the middle mouse button to finish picking and create the connection.

Fitting beam or column (76)
Select one of the following options to fit the beams or the column:
Option Description
Fits column.
(Default)
Fits beam.
Shaping beam ends (76, 78)

Select one of the following options to define how the end of the beams are cut
and shaped:
Key Options
1 = column
2 = first beam picked
3 = second beam
picked
Seating with dowel to flange (77)

Connects the flanges of a beam to a column using anchor bolts and an
optional corbel.
Parts created

• Nuts (2)
• Bearing plate (1)
• Corbel (optional)
• Recess for nut and washer plates
Where to use
Situation More information

Connects the flanges of a beam to
a column using anchor bolts and
a beveled corbel. Nuts and
washer plates recessed.
Before you start

• Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Seating with dowel to flange (77) dialog box to define the
following properties:

Picture Dimensions defining the Defining bolt hole
position of the anchor dimensions (page 16)
bolt relative to the beam
and bearing plate, length
of anchor bolt in beam

and column, bolt hole
dimensions and position
Parts Bearing plate, washer Creating a recess (77,
plate, nut and anchor 78) (page 23)
bolt properties, option to
create recess, recess
properties
Corbel Options to create corbel, Chamfering corbels
corbel properties (page 17)
General General tab
structural analysis

To cut a recess in the beam web, select the Yes option in the Create recess
dropdown list. Enter the following dimensions to define the recess:
Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78)

Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using anchor bolts and
optional corbels.
Parts created
• Nuts (4)
• Bearing plate (2)

• Corbels (2) optional
• Recesses for nut and washer plate (4)
Where to use
Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using
anchor bolts.
Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using

anchor bolts and beveled corbels.
Before you start

• Concrete column (Round or rectangular profile)
• Concrete beam with flange (rectangular, HI, I, L, or inverted T profile)
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Two-sided seating with dowel (78) dialog box to define

Picture Dimensions defining the Defining bolt hole dimensions
position of the anchor (page 16)
bolts relative to the beam
Shaping beam ends (76, 78)
and bearing plate, length
(page 21)
of anchor bolts in beam
and column, beam ends

Parts Bearing plate, washer
plate, nut and dowel
properties
Left beam Left beam is the first Defining bolt hole dimensions
beam picked and right is (page 16)
Right beam
the second.
Bolt hole, nut and washer (page 23)
plate properties. Option
to create recess, recess
properties.
Left corbel Option to create corbel, Chamfering corbels (page 17)
corbel properties
Right corbel
General General tab
structural analysis
1.2 Beam and column connections

This section introduces components that can be used in concrete connections.
• Battering connection (13) (page 25)
• Corbel connection (14) (page 27)
• Column - beam (14) (page 38)
• Corbels and recesses (82) (page 45)
• Concrete console (110) (page 51)
• Concrete console (111) (page 63)
• Concrete beam-beam (112) (page 72)
Concrete Detailing 25 Beam and column connections

Battering connection (13)
Use to fit the secondary part, for example, in a custom component, either
square to the main part, or at an angle.
Use for
Secondary is fit square to the
main part.
Secondary is fit to the main

part at an angle.
Before you start

Create two parts.

Defining properties
To enter the angle and the distance between the parts, go to the Picture tab.
If the part angle makes the gap larger than the value A, then the part is cut at
the end.
Selection order
1. Select the main part
2. Select the secondary part.
Corbel connection (14)

Corbel connection (14) connects a beam to a column using a straight,
beveled, or rounded corbel and reinforcing bars or fastening plates.
Objects created
• Corbel
• Bearing plate
• Drainage holes in bearing plate (1 or 2) (optional)
• Reinforcing bars (1 or 2) (optional)
• Bolt plates for reinforcing bars
• Nuts for reinforcing bars
• Recesses for bolt plates and nuts
• Fastening plates (2) (optional)
• Recesses for fastening plates
Use for
Connects a beam to a column using a reinforcing bar
and a beveled corbel.

Connects a beam to a column using fastening plates
and a rounded corbel.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (column).
2. Select the secondary part (beam).
The connection is created automatically when the secondary part is
selected.
Part identification key
Part
1 Bolt plate
2 Nut
3 Bearing plate
4 Corbel
5 Reinforcing bar

See also
Corbel connection (14): Picture tab (page 29)
Corbel connection (14): Parts tab (page 33)
Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab (page 34)
Corbel connection (14): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the corbel shape and dimensions, beam end
shape and dimensions, and corbel side chamfers in Corbel connection (14).
When beam sloped, adjust

If the beam in the connection is sloped, define whether the beam or the corbel
is cut.
When the beam end is cut, the corbel top stays horizontal. When the corbel is
cut, the corbel top has the same slope as the beam.
Corbel dimensions and shape
Description
1 Gap between the column and the beam.
2 Gap between the corbel and the beam.
3 Vertical corbel dimension.
4 Beveled corbel dimension.
5 Corbel width.

Option Description
Default
Beveled corbel
AutoDefaults can change this option.
Beveled corbel
Square corbel
Rounded corbel

Corbel position
Description
1 Horizontal corbel offset.
2 Height of the beam cut.
3 Gap between the corbel and extended beam.
Beam end shape

You can fit the beam end to the column, or you can create a straight beam
end.
Option Description Example

Default
Straight beam end
AutoDefaults can change
this option.
Straight beam end

Beam end is fit to the
column based on the
dimensions you define.
Beam can extend
symmetrically on both
sides of the column, or
with different
dimensions.
Corbel thickness
Define the distances from column edges to set the corbel thickness.
Corbel side chamfers

Define whether the corbel sides are chamfered. By default, no chamfers are
created.

Corbel connection (14): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the corbel part properties and dimensions in
Corbel connection (14).
Corbel parts
Part Description
Bearing plate Bearing plate thickness.
Cast unit Select whether cast unit is formed.
Drainage hole Select whether drainage holes for
each reinforcing bar are created in
the bearing plate.
Bolt plate Bolt plate thickness.

Nut Nut thickness.
Option Description Default

Pos_No Prefix and start number The default part start
for the part position number is defined on
number. the Components tab in
File menu --> Settings --
Some components have
> Options.
a second row of fields
where you can enter the
assembly position
number.
Material Material grade. The default material is
defined in the Part
material box on the
Components tab in File

menu --> Settings -->
Options.
Name Name that is shown in
drawings and reports.
Bearing plate dimensions
Description
1 Bearing plate distance from the column edge.
2 Bearing plate distance from the corbel edges.
Nut and bolt plate dimensions
Description
1 Nut width.
2 Bolt plate width.
Corbel connection (14): Reinforcing bar tab

Use the Reinforcing bar tab to control the reinforcing bar and fastening plate
properties, and the bolt plate and fastening plate recesses in Corbel
connection (14).

Reinforcing bar properties
Option Description
Grade Strength of the steel used in the
reinforcing bars.
Size Diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Bending radius Internal radius of the bends in the
bar.
Name Tekla Structures uses the name in
Class Use Class to group reinforcements.
For example, you can display different
reinforcement classes in different
colors.
Number of bars Select 1 Dowel to create one
reinforcing bar.
Select 2 Dowels to create two
reinforcing bars. Then define the
distance between the bars in the Bar
distance field.
Reinforcing bar length
Description
1 Distance between reinforcing bar center line and the column edge.
2 Vertical length of the reinforcing bar inside the corbel.
3 Length of the reinforcing bar inside the column.

Recess for bolt plate and nut
Description
1 Size of the bolt plate recess in the x direction.
5 Size of the bolt plate recess in the y direction.
2 Size of the nut recess in the y direction.
4 Size of the nut recess in the x direction.
3 Reinforcing bar offset.
Reinforcing bar extra length
Description
1 Extra length of the reinforcing bar.
2 Length of the reinforcing bar inside the recess.
Connecting devices
Define the connecting devices that connect the beam and the column.
Option Description
Default
One or two reinforcing bars bent to
the same angle as the corbel bevel
Available for bevel corbels.
One or two reinforcing bars bent to
the same angle as the corbel bevel
Available for bevel corbels.

Option Description
One or two reinforcing bars
Default for straight and rounded
corbels.
Two fastening plates
Use custom components as fastening
plates.
Recess for fastening plate
Description
1 Depth of column recess.
2 Depth of beam recess.
3 Offset of column recess.
4 Offset of beam recess.
Column recess Height and width of column and beam recess.
Beam recess
Using custom components as fastening plates

You can use custom components as fastening plates. Use the Column
component and Beam component sections to define the fastening plates in
the column and beam.
1. Select the following option in theConnecting devices list:

2. In the Custom list, select Yes.
3. Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select
component dialog box.
4. Browse for the custom component you want to use as fastening plate.
The component you select must be a custom part and have two or more
input points.
5. Select the component and click OK.
6. To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved
properties file in the Custom settings field.
7. If the direction or rotation of the fastening plate is not correct, select
another option in the Up direction or Rotation list.
Column - beam (14)

Column - beam (14) creates a connection between a concrete column and a
concrete beam or wall/panel. The orientation of the beam can be horizontal or
sloped. Note that the connection works only with precast parts.
Objects created
• Cuts
• Fittings

Use for
Option Description
Beam end rests on the column.
Beam end rests on the column.
Selection order
2. Select the secondary part (beam/wall/panel).
See also
Column - beam (14): Picture tab (page 39)
Column - beam (14): Column tab (page 43)
Column - beam (14): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define cut-out shapes and cut-out dimensions of the
column and the beam in Column - beam (14).

Cut-out dimensions
Option Description
Cut-outs of the main part and the
secondary part in the horizontal
direction.
The space between the column
and the beam can be defined at
both sides. For tapered openings
you can define how much the
opening is reduced.
Example:
Cut-outs of the main part and the

secondary part in the vertical
direction.
The space between the column
and the beam can be defined at
both sides. For tapered openings
you can define how much the
opening is reduced.
Example:

Option Description
Select the how the opening is

reduced.
The options are:
• From beam centerline
• From beam edges
Cut-out shape
Option Description
Cut around the secondary part

Option Description
Cut-out to the top of the column
Cut-out to the bottom of the column

Option Description
Full vertical cut-out
No cut-out
Column - beam (14): Column tab

Use the Column tab to define the how the top of the column is modified in
Column - beam (14).
Column extension
You can use the three fields to define the column extension. If all fields are left
empty, the column is extended to its original top level.

Option Description
1 Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam top.
This field has the highest priority among the three fields (1, 3, 4) for
defining the column extension.
2 Select wether the top of the column is perpendicular or parallel to
the beam.
Perpendicular:
Parallel with top of beam:
3 Column extension in the vertical direction.

Option Description
4 Column extension in the vertical direction from the beam bottom.
Corbels and recesses (82)

Corbels and recesses (82) adds concrete parts or cuts to a concrete part. You
can define the position, offsets and rotation of the added parts or cuts in
several ways.
Objects created
The component can add a maximum of four parts or cuts to a concrete part.
The added parts can be welded to the main part, added as parts and cast
units, or as sub-assemblies.
Use for
• Cut-out seams from concrete walls
• Adding concrete support blocks to concrete columns or walls
Selection order
1. Select the main part.
The part or cut is created automatically.
See also
Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab (page 45)
Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab (page 50)
Corbels and recesses (82): Part 1 / Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab

Use the Part 1, Part 2, Part 3 or Part 4 tab to create one additional part or cut
to the concrete part in Corbels and recesses (82).
Profile
Select the profile to be added to the concrete part or used for the cut.
Select how the added part is connected to the main part.

Option Example
No part created
Part is created
Part is created and added to the main part

Option Example
Part is created and the main part is cut
Main part is cut
Part is created and cast unit is created

Option Example
Part is created and welded to the main part
Part is created and welded to the main part, and

the main part is cut
Part is created and added as sub-assembly
Part is created and added as sub-assembly, and the

main part is cut
Offset
Define the offset of the added part from the main part. You can set the offset
also for openings.
By default, the added parts or cuts are created between the end points of the
concrete part.

Create diamond corbel around column
Select whether a diamond corbel is created around the column.
If you create the corbel, you cannot enter any values on the Part 2, Part 3 or
Part 4 tabs.
Chamfers
You can chamfer the added parts. You can define the chamfers either as
angles or as dimensions.
Positioning of the parts
Option Description
Select the side where the added parts or cuts
are created.
Select the alignment of the added parts or cuts.

Option Description
You can swap the end points of the added parts
or cuts.
Select whether the existing cuts should be

taken into account when the added parts are
created.
UDAs
Use the Fabricator name, Name, Type, Nomination, Article number and
Comment user-defined attributes (UDAs) to add information for the added
parts or cuts.
Part 2 / Part 3 / Part 4 tab

You can add or cut more than one part at the same time. To do this, use the
tabs Part 2, Part 3 and Part 4.

Corbels and recesses (82): Configuration tab
Use the Configuration tab to define the distance in material and whether
information needs to be printed in Corbels and recesses (82).
Use the Print info option to define whether additional colored dummy
profiles are placed in the main part for more clearness. The additional colored
profiles can help in the component orientation.
NOTE The additional profiles have an effect on numbering. The profiles get
part numbers and assembly numbers.
Concrete console (110)

Concrete console (110) creates a connection between a concrete column and
a concrete beam. The beam rests on a console which is attached to the
column.
Objects created
• Console
• Neoprene strip
• Steel plate between console and beam
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets

Use for
Console connection between a
concrete column and a concrete
beam.
Selection order
selected.
See also
Concrete console (110): Picture tab (page 52)
Concrete console (110): Parts tab (page 56)
Concrete console (110): Connection tab (page 58)
Concrete console (110): Parameters tab (page 58)
Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab (page 60)
Concrete console (110): Socket tab (page 63)
Concrete console (110): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console,
and the steel support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console
(110).

Description
1 Shape and dimensions of the concrete console and the steel and
neoprene parts.
2 Select how the shape of the
secondary beam is modified if
the secondary beam is sloping.

Description

Description
3 Console offset. Reference =
column centerline
You can set the reference to be
the main part or the secondary If no offset value is
part. Additionally, the offset applied, the
distance can be defined. console is placed
symmetrically
compared to the
column.
Reference =
column left side
Reference =
column right side
Reference = beam
centerline
Reference = beam
left side
Reference = beam
right side
4 Vertical plate offset. Reference =

column centerline
You can set the reference to be
the main part or the secondary
part. Additionally, the offset
distance can be defined.

Description
Reference =
column left side
Reference =
column right side
Reference = beam
centerline
Reference = beam
left side
Reference = beam
right side
5 Console tapering.
6 Console width.
If no value is entered, the width is the same as the width of the beam
Concrete console (110): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and
the optional steel plates created in Concrete console (110).

Option Description
Concrete console Prefix and start number for the part position
number, material, name, class and comment for the
console.
Console to column Select how the console is attached to the concrete
column.
Default is Part Add.
The No action option means that the console is a
loose part and not attached to any other part in the
component.
Create console like Select how the console is created.
Default is Contour plate.
Contour plate = the console is created using the
Contour plate command.
Beam = the console is created using the Beam
command.
Neoprene Neoprene layer properties.
A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sound-
damping can be created between the beam and the
console.
If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the
defined thickness will be the thickness on the
column side.
Neoprene to Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached,
and how the neoprene is attached.
Default is Beam and Weld.
Holes in neoprene Select how the holes in the neoprene part are
created.
Default is By bolt.
Diameter of holes in Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part.
neoprene
By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is
equal to the holes in the console.
Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size.
Steel plate horizontal Horizontal steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed under the neoprene part.
Steel plate vertical Vertical steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed at the console side.
Add steel plate to the Select how the steel plate is attached to the column.
column by
Default is Weld.

Concrete console (110): Connection tab
Use the Connection tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and
washers and injection tubes and to select how these parts are connected to
the console or the main part in Concrete console (110).
Option Description
Anchor rods Anchor rod profile.
Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor
rods tab.
Type of reinforcing Select the reinforcing bar type.
bars
Anchors to Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and
how the anchors are attached.
Default is Column and Weld.
Anchors all the Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.
same L
Nut Nut profile.
Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.
Washer Washer profile.
You can define the direction and the rotation for each
washer.
Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor
rods tab.
Weld washer and Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the
nut to anchor anchors.
Tube top Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the
anchors.
The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tube bottom Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the
anchors.
The height of the tubular profile can be modified on
the Anchor rods tab.
Tubes around Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached
anchors to beam to the beam.
Default is Weld.
Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.

Concrete console (110): Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to define how the column and the beam are cut
(skew/square) in Concrete console (110).
Option Description
Fitting to column Select how the top of the column is fitted.
Default is Perpendicular.
Column cut-out Default.
A full-width cut-out is
created.
Column left side cut-out.

Clearance between the
column and the beam can be
set.
Column right side cut-out.

Clearance between the
column and the beam can be
set.

Option Description
Both sides cut-out. Clearance
between the column and the
beam can be set on both
sides.
Beam end cut-out Square beam end

Use this option when
the beam and the
column are not
aligned. Skewed beam end (according
to main part)
Beam bottom cut-out Square beam bottom

Use this option when
the beam and the
column are not
aligned. Skewed beam bottom
(according to main part)
Concrete console (110): Anchor rods tab

Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods
in Concrete console (110).

Description
1 Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.
2 Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.
3 Anchor rod distribution options.
Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.
4 Select the type of the hole in the beam.

Default is Circular.
If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on
the left to define the hole diameter.
If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on
the left to define the dimensions of the square cut.
5 Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.

Description
6 Anchor rods and cuts Default.
Anchor rods are
created. Holes for
the anchors are
created.
Anchor rods are

created. No holes
are created.
Only holes are

created. No
anchors are
created.
Only anchor rods

are created. No
holes are created.
Cut-out in the
concrete beam.
Anchor rods are
created. No holes
are created.

Description
Cut-out in the
concrete beam
(parallel to beam).
Anchor rods are
created. No holes
are created.
Concrete console (110): Socket tab

Use the Socket tab to define whether socket anchors are created, how they
are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in
Concrete console (110).
If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the
Connection tab are automatically considered as sockets.
Option Description
Create socket Select whether sockets are created
and which parts are included.
Connect socket to prim by Select how the sockets are connected
to the main part.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method
between the rod and the connecting
profile.
Type of reinforcing bars Select the rod type.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the rod. You
can enter an angle in the box on the
right.
Connector Properties for the connecting profile
and the rod.
Dowel
Partname component If you want to use a custom part to
create the socket, select the Custom
part option in the Create socket list.
Then browse for the component, and
use the list of options to position the
custom part.
Concrete console (111)

Concrete console (111) creates a connection between a concrete column and
two secondary concrete beams. The beams rest on a console which is attached
to the column.

Objects created
• Console
• Neoprene strip
• Steel plates
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets
Use for
concrete column and two concrete
beams.

concrete column and one concrete
beam.
Selection order
2. Select the first secondary part (beam).
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

See also
Concrete console (111): Picture tab (page 65)
Concrete console (111): Parts tab (page 65)
Concrete console (111): Anchor tab (page 68)
Concrete console (111): Anchor rods (page 69)
Concrete console (111): Socket tab (page 71)
Concrete console (111): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the shape and the dimensions of the console,
and the steel support plates and the neoprene layer in Concrete console
(111).
Concrete console (111): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define properties for the console, the neoprene layer and
the optional steel plates created in Concrete console (111).

Option Description
Console width Console thickness, and the prefix and a start
number for the part position number, material,
name, class and comment for the console.
If no value is entered, the width is the same as the
width of the beam.
Console to column Select how the console is attached to the column.
Default is Part Add.
The No action option means that the console is a
loose part and not attached to any other part in the
component.
Create console like Select the profile type of the console.
Default is Contour plate.
Contour plate = the console is created using the
Contour plate command.
Beam = the console is created using the Beam
command.
Neoprene Neoprene layer properties.

A neoprene plate for shock absorbing and sound-
damping can be created between the beam and the
console.
If a trapezium shaped neoprene block is used, the
defined thickness will be the thickness on the
column side.
Neoprene to Select to which part the neoprene layer is attached,
and how the neoprene is attached.
Default is Beam and Weld.

Option Description
Holes in neoprene Select how the holes in the neoprene part are
created.
Default is By bolt.
Diameter of holes in Diameter of the holes in the neoprene part.
neoprene
By default, the hole size in the neoprene part is
equal to the holes in the console.
Enter a value to overwrite this default hole size.
Select if the neoprene layer is split for each beam
separately.
Steel plate horizontal Horizontal steel plate size and properties.

The plate is placed under the neoprene part.
Steel plate vertical Vertical steel plate size and properties.
The plate is placed at the console side.

Option Description
Add steel plate to the Select how the steel plate is attached to the column.
column by
Default is Weld.
Concrete console (111): Anchor tab

Use the Anchor tab to define the properties of the anchor rods, nuts and
washers and injection tubes and select how these parts are connected to the
console or the main part in Concrete console (111).
Option Description
Anchor rods Anchor rod profile.
Define the length and number of rods on the Anchor
rods tab.
Type of reinforcing Select the reinforcing bar type.
bars
Anchors to Select to which part the anchor rods are attached, and
how the anchors are attached.
Default is Column and Weld.
Anchors all the Select whether the anchor rods have the same length.
same L
Washer Washer profile.
Define the thickness of the washer on the Anchor
rods tab.
Nut Nut profile.
Define the height of the nut on the Anchor rods tab.
Weld washer and Select whether washers and nuts are welded to the
nut to anchor anchors.
Tube top Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the
anchors.
The tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tube bottom Tubular embed for creating a round hole for the
anchors.
The height of the tubular profile can be modified on
Tubes around Select how the tubes around the anchors are attached
anchors to beam to the beam.
Default is Weld.
Tubes all the same L Select whether the tubes have the same length.

Concrete console (111): Anchor rods
Use the Anchor rods tab to define dimensions and position of the anchor rods
in Concrete console (111).
Description
1 Anchor rod length, hole diameter and top offset.
2 Number of anchor rods, distances and edge distances.
3 Anchor rod distribution options.
Useful when the beam is not aligned with the column.

Description
4 Select the type of the hole in the beam.
Default is Circular.
If you set the type to Circular, use the two boxes on
the left to define the hole diameter.
If you set the type to Square, use the four boxes on
the left to define the dimensions of the square cut.
5 Height of the tubular profile, nut and washer.
6 Anchor rods and cuts Default.
Anchor rods are
created. Holes for
the anchors are
created.
Anchor rods are

created. No holes
are created.
Only holes are

created. No
anchors are
created.

Description
Only anchor rods
are created. No
holes are created.
Cut-out in the
concrete beam.
Anchor rods are
created. No holes
are created.
Concrete console (111): Socket tab

are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in
Concrete console (111).
If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchor rods on the Anchor
tab are automatically considered as sockets.
Option Description
to the main part.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method
between the rod and the connecting
profile.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the sockets.
You can enter an angle in the box on
the right.
Connecting profile Properties for the connecting profile
and the rod.
Rod
Partname component If you want to use a custom part to
create the socket, select the Custom
part option in the Create socket list.
Then browse for the component, and
use the list of options to position the
custom part.

Concrete beam-beam (112)
Concrete beam - beam (112) creates a connection between a concrete beam
and one or two secondary concrete beams.
Objects created
• Neoprene
• Steel plates
• Anchor rods
• Tubes
• Sockets
Use for
Connection between two concrete
beams.
Connection between three concrete

beams.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (beam).

2. Select one or two secondary parts (beam).
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.
Part
1 Beam
2 Beam
Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to control the part dimensions and the shapes of the
parts, and the recesses.
Dimensions

Description Example
1 Define the gap between the main
part and the secondary part on the
left and the right side.
2 Define the vertical gap between the

main part and the secondary part.
3 Define the length of the neoprene.

Description Example
4 Define the gap between the
neoprene and the secondary part on
the left and the right side.
5 Define the length of the steel plate.
6 Define the gap between the steel

plate and the secondary part on the
left and the right side.

Description Example
1 Define the distance from the
centerline of the secondary parts
to the outer contour of the main
part on the left side.

Description Example
centerline of the secondary parts
to the outer contour of the main
part on the right side.

edge of the first secondary part
to the centerline.

Description Example
edge of the second secondary
part to the centerline.
5 Define the depth of the recess in

the main part.

Description Example
6 Define the depth of the recess in
the secondary part.
7 Define the width of the recess in

the first secondary part.

Description Example
8 Define the width of the recess in
the second secondary part.
9 Define the width of the

neoprene.

edge of the neoprene to the edge
of the main part.

Description Example
of the main part.
12 Define the width of the steel

plate.

edge of the steel plate to the
edge of the main part.

Description Example
of the main part.

edge of the recess in the main
part to the edge of the secondary
part.
Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the neoprene and steel plate properties and how
these parts are connected.
Neoprene and steel plate
Option Description
t, b, h Define the neoprene or the steel plate thickness,
width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part
position number.

Option Description
Material Define the material grade.
Name Define a name for the neoprene or the steel plate.
Class Define the part class number for the neoprene or
the steel plate.
Comment Add a comment for the neoprene or the steel plate.
Neoprene properties
A neoprene plate for absorbing shock and for damping sound can be used
between the main and the secondary parts.
Option Description
Neoprene to Define to which part the neoprene is
connected. The neoprene can also be a loose
part.
In the second list, define how the neoprene is
connected to the part.
Holes in Neoprene Define how the holes in the neoprene are
created.
Diameter of Holes in Define the diameter of the holes in the
Neoprene neoprene.
Define whether the neoprene is created as
one single plate or as two plates and the
edge distance from the neoprene to the
secondary parts.
Steel plate properties

One or two additional steel plates can be used between the main and the
secondary parts.
Option Description
Add steel plate to Define how the steel plate is connected to
the primary by the main part.
Negative volume Define whether there is a negative volume
around steel plate around the steel plate.

Anchors tab
Use the Anchors tab to control the properties of anchor rods, nuts, washers
and the top and bottom tubes.
Anchor rods, Nut, Washer, Plate, Tube top, Tube bottom

Anchor rods can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define
the length and number of rods on the Anchor rods tab.
Nuts and washers can be created. Define the height of nuts and washers on
Tubes can be used between the main and the secondary parts. Define the
height of the tubular profiles on the Anchor rods tab.
Option Description
t, b, h Define the part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position
number.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Class Define the part class number.
Comment Add a comment for the part.
Anchor rods
Anchors to Define to which part the anchor rods

are connected. The anchor rods can
also be loose parts.
In the second list, define how the
anchor rods are connected to the
part.
Anchors all the same L Define whether the anchor rods have
the same length.
Type of reinforcing bars Define the type of reinforcing bars.
Bottom section Define the type of profile in the
bottom section.
Washer
Define the position of the washer handles.

Washer plate
Define the position of the plate handles.
Define whether the washers and nuts are welded to the plates.
Tube top and tube bottom

You can add a tubular embed for creating a round hole for the anchors. The
tube top starts at the bottom level of the nut.
Tubes around anchors to Define how to connect the tubes to

beam the beam.
Tubes all the same L Define whether the tubes have the
same length.
Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the connecting options.
Anchors only in secondary Select whether anchor rods are

included only in the secondary parts.
Fit secondaries perpendicular Select how to fit the secondary parts.
to

Anchor rods tab
Use the Anchor rods tab to control the number, dimensions and position of
the anchor rods and the dimensions of the recesses in the main and
secondary parts.
Dimensions

Description Example
1 Define the size of
the holes in the
beam.
2 Define the size of

the recesses in the
beam in both
directions.

Description Example
3 Define the type of
the holes in the
beam.
4 Define the distance

between the top of
the anchor rod and
the top of the beam.

Description Example
between the bottom
of the recess and the
top of the anchor
rod.

between the bottom
of the recess in the
main part and the
bottom of the recess
in the secondary
part.

Description Example
from the centerline
of the secondary
parts to the outer
contour of the main
part.

Description Example
8 Define the width of
the anchor rod
hook.

Description Example
9 Define the height of
the anchor.
10 Define the angle of

the anchor rod
hook.

Description Example
11 Define the radius of
the anchor rod hook
in the main part in
the vertical
direction.

Description Example
12 Define the anchor
rod edge distances
from the main part.
13 Define the number

of anchor rods.
rod spacing.
Use a space to
separate anchor rod
spacing values. Enter
a value for each
space between
anchor rods. For
example, if there are
3 anchor rod rows,
enter 2 values.

Description Example
rod edge distances
from the secondary
parts.
16 Define the number

of anchors rods.
rod spacing.
Use a space to
separate anchor rod
spacing values. Enter
a value for each
space between
anchor rods. For
example, if there are
3 anchor rod rows,
enter 2 values.

Description Example
between the top side of
the top tube and the top
of the part.
2 Define the height of the

nut.

Description Example
3 Define the height of the
washer.

between the bottom side
of the top tube and the
bottom side of the recess.

between the top side of
the bottom tube and the
bottom side of the recess.

Description Example
between the bottom side
of the bottom tube and
the bottom side of the
part.
Recesses
Define whether anchors and recesses are created.
Option Description
Anchors and recesses
Anchors
Recesses
Socket tab
Use the Socket tab to control the socket properties and how the sockets are
connected. If you create the sockets on the Socket tab, the anchors on the
Anchors rods tab are automatically considered as sockets in the Concrete
beam-beam (112) connection.

Sockets
Option Description
to the main part.
Connection rod-connector Select how to connect the rod
connector.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the sockets.
In the second list, define the angle of
the sockets.
Connecting profile, Rod
Option Description
t, b, h Define the connecting profile and the rod thickness,
width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part position
number.
Material Define the material grade for the connecting profile
and the rod.
Class Define the part class number for the connecting profile
and the rod.
Comment Add a comment for the connecting profile and the rod.
Partname component
Option Description
Partname If you use a custom component to create the socket,
component browse for the component and use the list of options
to position the custom component.
Rebars in primary tab / Rebars in secondary tab

Use the Rebars in primary tab and Rebars in secondary tab to create
reinforcing bars and stirrups at the connection position. On the Rebars in
primary tab you can create longitudinal reinforcing bars and stirrups for the
main part, and on the Rebars in secondary tab you can define stirrups for the
secondary part.

Rebars in primary
Create the rebars for the main part either by defining the number of rebars, or
by setting the spacing or the exact space.
Set the rebar properties, and define the cover thickness and leg length from
the edge of the opening.

Rebars in secondary
General tab / Analysis tab

General tab
Analysis tab
1.3 Panels and walls

This section introduces components that can be used in concrete panels and
walls.
• Wall to wall connection (page 101)
• Wall groove seam detail (page 107)
• Anchor (10) (page 113)
• Wall wall teeth (12) (page 127)
• Electric box in wall (84) (page 136)
• Sandwich And Double Wall (page 152)
• Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam (page 176)
• Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam (page 183)
• Sandwich wall window (page 189)
• Wall layout tools (page 211)
Wall to wall connection

Wall to wall connection creates a connection between two precast walls. The
connection can contain a groove with or without additional shear teeth.
Additionally, the connection can create reinforcing bar loops or embeds that
work as connectors in the walls.
Concrete Detailing 101 Panels and walls

Objects created
• Groove
• Shear teeth or shear cups
• U bars
• Embeds
• Long bar
Use for
Wall to wall connection with groove,
shear teeth, U bars and a loose bar.
Selection order
1. Select the first wall.
2. Select the second wall.
The connection is created automatically when the second wall is selected.
See also
Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab (page 102)
Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab (page 103)
Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab (page 104)
Wall to wall connection: Edge shape tab

Use the Edge shape tab to select the wall framing type in the Wall to wall
connection.

Option Description
Wall framing type selection.
Wall framing type selection affects the wall edge
shape options.
You can use the connection in three different
modeling situations:
• end-to-end
• corner
With this option the first selected wall is fitted to
align with the exterior face of the second
selected wall.
• tee
Wall edge shape.
Select the edge shape of each wall.
Adjust the free space between two walls.
Wall edge dimensions.

To set the edge shape and dimensions
independently for both walls, use the Use given
dimensions option.
To make the edge shape similar in both walls, use
the Same to right side option.
Groove start and end point.
You can define the start point and the end point of
the groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0,
the groove is applied at full height of the wall.
Wall to wall connection: Extra teeth tab

Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in
the Wall to wall connection.

Option Description
Select whether additional shear teeth or shear
cups are created.
Teeth or cups can be created also when there
is no groove.
Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.
Location of the first tooth or cup in the first

wall and in the second wall, and the spacing
between the teeth or cups.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value. When you enter
a single value, the number of teeth or cups is
calculated automatically based on the height of
the connection.
Wall to wall connection: Connectors tab

Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall to
wall connection.
Connector type
The content of the Connectors tab varies depending on the type of the
selected connectors.

Option Description
Connector type.
• No connectors. Only groove with or without shear
teeth is created.
• Connectors are created by using the selected
embed (custom part).
• Connectors are created by adding reinforcing bar
loops. Reinforcing bar loop is formed depending
on the wall framing type.
In addition, the connector can optionally create one
or more long reinforcing bars along the connection.
Embeds and loose rebar
Option Description
Location of the first connector (embed) in
the first wall and in the second wall, and
the spacing between the connectors.
You can enter a list of spaces, for
example 10*400, or just a single value,
for example 300. When you enter a
single value, the number of connectors is
calculated automatically based on the
height of the connection.
You can also define the extended length
of the loose long bar.
Select which embeds (custom parts) are
created in each wall.
If the embed has any saved attributes,
select which attributes are used.
Offset of the embed.
By default, the embed input points are in
the center of the wall.

U bars and loose rebar
Option Description
Location of the first connector
(reinforcing bar loop) in the first wall and
in the second wall, and the spacing
between the connectors.
for example 300. When you enter a single
value the number of connectors is
height of the connection.
Reinforcing bar loop dimensions.
The available dimension options depend
on the wall framing type selected on the
Edge shape tab.
Many of the dimensions have counter
parts in the first wall and in the second
wall. It is enough to enter one dimension
and by default the counter part
dimension gets the same value.
Number of bars Number of long loose bars.

If you do not want to create a loose long
bar, enter 0 as the Number of bars.

Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and
Start Number.

Customization
If needed, you can create your own embed (custom part) and use it as a
connector.
When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that
they are compatible with Wall to wall connection. The image below shows
examples of the input points.
Wall groove seam detail

Wall groove seam detail creates a groove with optional shear teeth to a
precast wall, a slab or a similar part. Additionally the connection can create
reinforcing bar loops or embeds that work as connectors in the walls.
Objects created
• Groove
• Shear teeth or shear cups
• U bars
• Embeds
• Long bar

Use for
Groove with shear teeth and U bars.
Selection order
1. Select the wall or slab.
2. Pick the start point of the groove.
3. Pick the end point of the groove.
See also
Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab (page 108)
Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab (page 109)
Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab (page 110)
Wall groove seam detail: Edge shape tab

Use the Edge shape tab to select the orientation of the groove in the Wall
groove seam detail.
Option Description
Groove orientation selection.
Define the orientation of the groove in relation to
the input points.

Option Description
Groove edge shape.
Groove start and end point in relation to input the

points.
You can define the start point and the end point of
the groove. If you do not enter a value, or enter 0,
the groove is applied at full height of the wall.
Wall groove seam detail: Extra teeth tab

Use the Extra teeth tab to define the properties for additional shear teeth in
the Wall groove seam detail.
Option Description
Select whether additional shear teeth or shear
cups are created.
Teeth or cups can be created also when there
is no groove.
Dimensions of a single tooth or cup.

Option Description
Location of the first tooth or cup in the groove,
and the spacing between the teeth or cups.
You can enter a list of spaces, for example
10*400, or just a single value. When you enter
a single value, the number of teeth or cups is
calculated automatically based on the height of
the detail.
Wall groove seam detail: Connectors tab

Use the Connectors tab to select the type of connectors created in the Wall
groove seam detail.
Connector type
The content of the Connectors tab page varies depending on the type of the
selected connectors.
Option Description
Connector type.
• No connectors. Only groove with or without
shear teeth is created.
• Connectors are created by using the
selected embed (custom part).
• Connectors are created by adding
reinforcing bar loops. Reinforcing bar loop
is formed depending on the framing type.
In addition, the connector can optionally create
one or more long reinforcing bars along the
connection.
Embeds and loose rebar
Option Description
Location of the first connector (embed) in
the groove, and the spacing between the
connectors.
for example 300. When you enter a
single value, the number of connectors is

Option Description
height of the detail.
Select which embeds (custom parts) are
created in each groove.
If the embed has any saved attributes,
select which attributes are used.
Offset of the embed.
By default, the embed input points are in
the center of the groove.
U bars and loose rebar
Option Description
Location of the first connector
(reinforcing bar loop) in the groove,
and the spacing between the
connectors.
example 10*400, or just a single
value, for example 300. When you
enter a single value, the number of
connectors is calculated automatically
based on the height of the detail.
You can also define the extended
length of the loose long bar.
Reinforcing bar loop dimensions.
The available dimension options
depend on the orientation of the
groove selected on the Edge shape
tab.

Option Description
Number of bars Number of long loose bars

If you do not want to create a loose
long bar, enter 0 as the Number of
bars.

Enter the properties for reinforcing bar Grade, Size, Name, Class, Prefix and
Start Number.
Customization
If needed, you can create your own custom part (embed) and use it as a
connector.
When creating the embed, ensure that the input points are defined so that
they are compatible with Wall groove seam detail. The image below shows
examples of the input points.

Anchor (10)
Anchor (10) connects two precast concrete parts, for example, two panels or a
column to a panel. The precast concrete parts are connected with L profiles
and with embedded connection profiles that act as anchors, for example,
custom component bolt anchors or cast-in channels. The bolt anchors and the
cast-in channels can be single-sided or double-sided. Additionally, seams can
be defined between the main part and the secondary parts.
Objects created
• Anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channels)
• L profiles
• Bolts

Use for
Connection with L profiles and bolt
anchors.
Connection with L profile and cast-in

channel.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (precast concrete panel or a column).
2. Select the secondary part (precast concrete panel).
selected.
See also
Anchor (10): Picture tab (page 115)
Anchor (10): Anchors tab (page 117)
Anchor (10): Conn profile tab (page 120)
Anchor (10): Bolts tab (page 123)

Anchor (10): Cuts tab (page 124)
Anchor (10): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the number of anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in
channel profiles), edge distances and plate embed offset in Anchor (10).
Description Example
1 Horizontal offset of the anchors.
The offset can be defined for both
concrete parts separately.
2 Vertical offset of the anchors.

The offset can be defined for the top
and bottom side.

Description Example
3 Select how the anchors are
distributed.
4 Select which of the anchors are

omitted.

Description Example
5 Connection plate horizontal offset
from the centerline of an anchor.
This option is available only if you
have set the orientation of the
connection plate as follows on the
Conn profile tab:
Anchor (10): Anchors tab

Use the Anchors tab to define the properties, position and orientation of the
anchors (bolt anchors or cast-in channel profiles) in Anchor (10).

Description Example
1 Anchor properties in the main part.
2 Select on which side the anchors are

created in the main part.
3 Select whether a profile from the profile

catalog is used as an anchor, or a custom
part from the Applications &
components catalog.

Description Example
4 Anchor properties in the secondary part.
5 Select on which side the anchors are

created in the secondary part.
6 Select whether a profile from the profile
catalog is used as an anchor, or a custom
part from the Applications &
components catalog.
7 Select the connection method of the
anchor.
• Default (same as Weld to element)
• Weld to element
• Cast unit to element
• Not add to element (bolt anchors or
cast-in channels are loose parts)
• Sub-assembly
8 Position and rotation of the anchors in the
main concrete part.
For the Position in plane and Position in
depth options, an offset can be defined.
9 Orientation of the anchors in the main
part.
10 Position and rotation of the anchors in the

secondary concrete part.
For Position in plane and Position in
depth options, an offset can be defined.

Description Example
11 Orientation of the anchors in the
secondary part.
12 Select the cut-out method of the anchors.
Default, no cut
No cut
Cut-out shape is the exact

profile contour of the bolt
anchor or the cast-in channel
Box shape cut-out
Anchor (10): Conn profile tab

Use the Conn profile tab to define the properties and position of the
connection L profile in Anchor (10).

Description Example
1 Connection profile properties.
2 Select on which side the connection

profiles are created.
3 Select whether a profile from the

profile catalog is used as a
connection profile, or a custom part
from the Applications &
components catalog.

Description Example
4 Position and rotation of the
connection profiles.
For the Position in plane and
Position in depth options, an offset
can be defined.
5 Orientation of the connection profile.
6 Connection profile cuts.

These options are available only if
you have set the orientation of the

Description Example
connection profile as follows on the
Conn profile tab:
7 Select the connection method of the

connection profile.
8 Select the connection profile type.
• Library profile (define the profile
using the L profile options).
• Folded plate (define the
dimensions using the options
below).
Anchor (10): Bolts tab

Use the Bolts tab to define the bolt properties and offsets in Anchor (10).

Description
1 Horizontal bolt distances from the L profile edges.
Default value is half of L profile flange width.
2 Vertical bolt offsets.
Reference is the L profile centerline. Default value is 0 mm.
3 Select how the bolts are added in the main part.
4 Select how the bolts are added in the secondary part.
5 Bolting direction.
Anchor (10): Cuts tab

Use the Cuts tab to define the cuts and the seams in the main and secondary
parts in Anchor (10).
Additionally, the main part can be extended, or the secondary part thickness
can be increased or decreased.
You can create a seam by defining a cut between the main part and the
secondary part.

Description Example
1 Extension of the main part.
If you need to extend the part,
enter a value. Ensure that you have
also selected a cut method from
the cut type list. If you select the
No cut option, the part is not
extended.
2 Seam width.
Reference is the L profile
centerline. Default value is 0 mm.
3 Left side cut along the secondary
part.
Reference is the part centerline.
Part thickness is decreased.
4 Right side cut along the secondary
part.
Reference is the part centerline.
Part thickness is decreased.

Description Example
5 Cut reference for the main and
secondary parts.
Main part near side
Main part centerline
Main part far side
6 Select the cut type.
Default, no cut

Description Example
Reference is the main part.

Secondary part will be adjusted to
the main part using a fitting.
Reference is the main part.

Secondary part will be adjusted to
the main part using a line cut.
Reference is main part. Just like

previous options, but the longest
part of the panel will be removed
using a line cut.
No cut

Wall wall teeth (12)
Wall wall teeth (12) connects two perpendicular concrete panels with a tooth-
shaped connection. The number of teeth can be set. Injection tubes and
connection bars can be added to the connection. The connection is created
with or without seams.
Objects created
• Tooth connection (2 or 3 teeth) between two panels
• Injection tubes
• Connection bars
Use for
2-teeth connection between two panels.
The height of the teeth can be modified and the
clearance between the teeth can be set.
3-teeth connection between two panels with

connection bar.

Tooth connection between two panels with
connection bar and socket.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete panel).
2. Select the secondary part (concrete panel).
selected.
See also
Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab (page 129)
Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab (page 131)
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab (page 133)
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab (page 134)
Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab (page 135)
Wall wall teeth (12): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define the number of teeth, the height of teeth, and
seam widths in Wall wall teeth (12). Wall wall teeth (12) has two main
connection types: A (two teeth) and B (three teeth).

Description
1 Select the number and position of teeth.
Standard is A 2 teeth bottom up.
2 Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).
3 Secondary part tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection).
4 Main part tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type A (2-teeth connection).
This value has an effect only if the secondary part tooth height (3) has no
value.
5 Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type A (2-teeth connection).
6 Horizontal seam width in the main part. For type A (2-teeth connection).

Description
7 Top tooth height. For type B (3 teeth connection).
Reference is center of the seam.
If there is no value, and the middle tooth height and the bottom tooth
height are defined, then the top tooth gets the residual height distance.
If none of the tooth heights are defined, then all three teeth get an equal
height: (wall height - seam width) / 3
This value has lowest priority from the three tooth height-defining
values.
Example:
Panel height is 1500mm. All three tooth heights are defined:
• Top: 400mm
• Middle: 700mm
• Bottom: 600mm
Total defined height of teeth = 1800mm. Result: top tooth gets height
1500-700-600=200mm
8 Vertical seam width between the teeth. For type B (3-teeth connection).
9 Bottom tooth height.
Reference is center of the seam. For type B (3-teeth connection).
If there is no value, and the top tooth and the middle tooth height are
defined, then the bottom tooth gets the residual height distance.
Wall wall teeth (12): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define the properties and dimensions of injection tubes
and connection bars in Wall wall teeth (12).

Option Description
Injection tubes Injection tube properties.
You can define the placing of the injection tubes
separately for the top tooth, middle tooth and
bottom tooth.
1 Select whether an injection tube is created.
Example:
Default is No action.
Top tooth Select whether an injection tube is created in the
teeth and select the connection method.
Middle tooth
Default is Part cut.
Bottom tooth

Option Description
Connection bar Connection bar properties.
One connection bar can be created through the
teeth.
2 Select whether a connection bar is created and the
connection method.
Default is Yes + weld 1.
3 Depth of a connection bar from the top of the top
tooth.
Default is 0.
4 Depth of an injection tube from the top of the top
tooth.
Default is 0.
5 Depth of a connection bar from the top of the
bottom tooth.
Default is top tooth height + seam width. If both
values 5 and 7 are defined, then the value in the box
7 overwrites the value in the box 5.
6 Depth of an injection tube from the bottom of the
bottom tooth.
Default is 0.
7 Depth of a connection bar from the bottom of the
bottom tooth.
If both values 5 and 7 are defined, then the value in
the box 7 overwrites the value in the box 5.
Wall wall teeth (12): Cut sec tab

Use the Cut sec tab to define the way the secondary concrete panel is cut in
Wall wall teeth (12).
By default the component creates a 2-teeth connection.

You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut.
If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how
the secondary part is fitted to the main part.

Wall wall teeth (12): Cut prim tab
Use the Cut prim tab to define the way the main concrete panel is cut in Wall
wall teeth (12).
You can also define a fixed offset value for the cut.
If the concrete panels are not perpendicularly orientated, you can define how
the main part is fitted to the secondary part.

Wall wall teeth (12): Socket tab
are connected and the dimensions and position of the socket anchors in Wall
wall teeth (12). Sockets are created only if you have created connection bars.
Option Description
Dimensions for socket anchor, rod profile
and connecting profile.
Create socket Select whether sockets are created and

which parts are included.
Note that a socket is created only if a
connection bar has been created on the
Parts tab.
In the examples the red profile is the
connection bar:
Connect socket Select how the sockets are connected to

the main part.
Default is By cast unit.
Connection rod-connector Select the connection method between
the rod and the connecting profile.
Default is Part add conn to rod.
Rod type Select the rod type.
Default is Poly-profile.
Leg rotation Select the direction of the rod. You can
enter an angle in the box on the right.

Option Description
Default is Front.
Connecting profile Properties for the connecting profile, rod

and bottom section.
Rod
Note that the bottom section is part-
Bottom section
added to the rod automatically.
Example:
Partname component If you want to use a custom part to create

the socket, select the Custom part
option in the Create socket list.
Then browse for the component, and use
the list of options to position the custom
part.
Electric box in wall (84)

Electric box in wall (84) creates electric boxes in walls.
Objects created
• Electric boxes
• Tubes

Use for
Electric box in a wall with
top connection.

bottom connection.

top and bottom
connections.
Selection order
1. Select a concrete panel.
2. Pick a position for the electric box.
3. Pick a position for the top connection.
4. Pick a position for the bottom connection.
The electric box and connections are created automatically.

Part
Electric box
Panel
See also
Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab (page 139)
Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab (page 142)
Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab (page 143)
Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab (page 147)
Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab (page 149)
Electric box in wall (84): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the shape, number and position of the tubes
and the position of the electric boxes in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling
tool.

Tube direction
Option Description
Select the tube shape in the
up direction.
Select the tube shape in the

down direction.
Select the tube direction in

relation to the start point
(yellow) and end point
(magenta) of the wall.
Select the number of tubes

in the up direction.

Option Description
Select the number of tubes
in the down direction.
Tubes to concrete / Electric parts to concrete

Select how the tubes and the electric parts are connected to the concrete part.
Option Description
As Add as a subassembly to the
subassembly concrete part.
By cast unit Add to the concrete part.
Welds Weld to the concrete part.
Not Do not connect to the concrete part.
Tube and electric box positions
Option Description
Select the position of the up
connection in the concrete part.
Select the position of the electric box
in the concrete part.
Select the position of the down
connection in the concrete part.

Electric box in wall (84): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the tube properties at the top and bottom of the
concrete part and the position of the tube reference points in the Electric box
in wall (84) modeling tool.
Tube top / Tube bottom

t, b, h Define the tube thickness, D19
width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start ET 1
number for the part
position number.
Material Define the material grade. PVC
Name Define a name for the E-tube
tube.
Class Define the part class 2
number for the tube.
Comment Add a comment for the
tube.
1st reference point

Define a reference point for the tube. The reference point determines the
position of the part mark in a drawing.

At top Start point is positioned
at the top of the tube.

At bottom Start point is positioned
at the bottom of the
tube.
At longest Start point is positioned

segment at the longest segment
of the tube.
At smallest Start point is positioned

segment at the smallest segment
of the tube.
Electric box in wall (84): Electric box tab

Use the Electric box tab to control the shape, number and dimensions of the
electric boxes and to define a possible connection piece (Tube a) in the
Electric box in wall (84).

Electric box / Tube a

t, b, h Electric box and the D19
connection piece (Tube
a) thickness, width and
height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start ET 1
number for the part
position number.
Material Material grade. PVC
Name Name for the electric E-tube
box and the connection
piece.
Class Part class number for 2
the electric box and the
connection piece.
electric box and the
connection piece.
Rotation
Control the rotation of the electric box and the connection piece.
Option Example
Front
Top

Option Example
Back
Below
Electric box shape
Option Description
Profiles / Custom part You can use a profile from the profile
catalog or select a custom component
Example custom part:
components catalog.
If you use a custom component,
browse for the component and use
the list of options to position the
custom component.
Select the shape of the electric box

and define the dimensions for the
electric box.
Select an extra shape for creating

several different types of electric
boxes.
This shape is visible in drawings and it
indicates the front and back side of
the electric box.

Option Description
Number = Number of electric boxes in
horizontal or vertical direction.
1 Select the top connection pieces for

the electric box.
2 Select the left side connection pieces
for the electric box.
3 Select the right side connection pieces
4 Select the bottom connection pieces
Dimensions of the connection pieces.
Positions of the connection pieces.

Option Description
Options to add the electric box to the
part.
• Create electric box
• Create electric box + cut electric
box
• Create electric box + cut bounding
box
Electric box in wall (84): Top conn / Bottom conn tab

Use the Top conn and Bottom conn tabs to control the shape and dimensions
of the top and bottom connection boxes, and to define a possible connection
piece (Tube a) in Electric box in wall (84).
Top box / Bottom box / Tube a
Option Description
t, b, h Top and bottom connection box and the connection
piece (Tube a) thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Material Material grade.
Name Name for the connection box and the connection piece.
Class Part class number for the connection box and the
connection piece.
Comment Add a comment for the connection box and the
connection piece.
Rotation
Control the rotation of the connection piece (Tube a).
Connection box shape
Top conn Bottom conn Description

Profiles / Custom part You can use a profile from
the profile catalog or select
a custom component from

the Applications &
components catalog.
If you use a custom
component, browse for
the component and use
the list of options to
position the custom
component.
Select the shape of the
connection box and define
the dimensions for the
box.
Dimensions of the
connection box.
Position of the connection

piece.

Options to add the
connection box to the part.
• Create connection box
+ cut connection box
+ cut bounding box
Select the connection

pieces for the connection
box.
Select the number of

connection boxes.
Connect
Define how to the connection box is connected.
Electric box in wall (84): UDA tab

Use the UDA tab to add information in the parts’ user-defined attributes
(UDAs) in the Electric box in wall (84) modeling tool.

Option Description
Part Select to which part the related information can be saved:
Nothing
Tube top
Tube bottom
Tubes
Electric box
Top connection
Bottom connection
All
UDA Enter the name of the UDA name: UDA:
name user-defined attribute.
• comment • Comment
For example, to add a
• fabricator • Fabricator
comment UDA, open the
name
objects.inp file in a • art_number
text editor and search for • • Article
type
comment. The following number
attribute is shown: • Type
attribute("comment",
"j_comment", string,
"%s", no, none,
"0.0", "0.0")
The first text between the
quotation marks is the
UDA name, comment. The
entered name is case
sensitive.
Type Type of the user-defined Use String for text, Integer for
attribute. numbers, Float for numbers with
decimals and Option for
selecting an item in a list. You can
find the UDA type in the
objects.inp file
Value Enter the value that is saved to the user-defined attribute.

Example

Sandwich And Double Wall
Sandwich And Double Wall creates a precast concrete wall. The wall consists
of an inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell.
Objects created
• Inner shell
• Foil (optional)
• Insulation (optional)
• Outer shell (optional)

Use for
Sandwich wall, split shells.
Sandwich wall, brick wall on outer

shell as surface treatment.
Selection order
1. Pick the first point.
2. Pick the second point.
The wall is created automatically when the second point is picked.

Part
1 Inner shell
2 Foil
3 Insulation
4 Outer shell
See also
Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab (page 154)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab (page 161)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab (page 164)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab (page 170)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab (page 172)
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab (page 175)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the dimensions and positioning of the sandwich
wall inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall.
The inner shell is always created.
Numbering settings
Set Numbering settings to Enabled to show Prefix and Start number for all
parts.

Inner shell

Thickness Define the thickness of 150 mm
the inner shell.
Foil

the foil.
Create foil Define whether the foil Yes and subassembly
is created.
Insulation

the insulation.
Create insulation Define whether the Yes and subassembly
insulation is created.
Outer shell

the outer shell.
Create outer shell Define whether the Yes + cast unit
outer shell is created:

Pos_No Prefix and start number The default part start number
for the part position is defined in the Components
number. settings in File menu -->
Settings --> Options.
Some components have a
second row of fields
assembly position
number.
Material Material grade. The default material is defined
in the Part material box in the
Components settings in File
menu --> Settings --> Options.

Class Part class number.
Positioning
You can use Standard or Advanced positioning. With advanced positioning,
there are more options for sandwich wall width and foil position.
Sandwich wall width
Option: Standard Description

No gaps between the parts. Sandwich
wall thickness is the sum of all
created parts.
Define the total wall width.

A gap is created between the outer
shell and the insulation.
Option: Advanced Description

Define the total wall width and the
gap between the inner shell and the
insulation.
Another gap is created between the
outer shell and the insulation.

gap between the outer shell and the
insulation.
Another gap is created between the
inner shell and the insulation.

Option: Advanced Description
gap between the inner shell and the
insulation.
No gap is created between the outer
shell and the insulation.
Foil position
Option Description
By default, the foil is placed on the
outer side of the inner shell.
Define another foil position. Set

Positioning to Advanced.

Point offset
Option Description
Define the offset from the outer face
of the inner shell.
Define the offset from the inner face

of the inner shell.
Define the offset from the center of

the sandwich wall.
Define the offset from the inner face

of outer shell.
Define the offset from the outer face

of outer shell.
Parametric profile
Option Description
Parametric section Set to Enabled to define the prefix for
the parametric profiles of the
sandwich parts.

Option Description
Prefix for the parametric profile Select the prefix for the parametric
profile:
• Position h*b and Position
b*h to create plate profiles
without a prefix.
If Parametric section is set to
Disabled, the parts have an h*b
prefix, for example, 2000*100.
• Position PLh*b and Position
PLb*h to create plate profiles
whose prefix starts with PL.
• Par. section h*b and Par.
section b*h require you to enter
a parametric plate profile prefix.
Par. section prefix Define the prefix of the parametric
profile.

See also
Sandwich And Double Wall (page 152)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab (page 161)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab (page 164)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab (page 170)
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab (page 172)
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab (page 175)

Sandwich And Double Wall: Vertical section tab
Use the Vertical section tab to control the vertical level part properties in
Sandwich And Double Wall. You can define both the top and the bottom
level. The levels can be set as absolute levels, or vertically relative (displaced)
to the points.
Top level
Option Description
n1, n2, n3, n4 Define the absolute top level height.
h1, h2, h3, h4 Define the part height from the
bottom face.
d2, d3, d4 Define the vertical displacement from
the adjacent part.
When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner
shell level.

Bottom level
Option Description
m1, m2, m3, m4 Define the absolute bottom level
height.
a1, a2, a3, a4 Define the bottom offset from the
point.
b2, b3, b4 Define the vertical displacement from
the adjacent part.
When you use relative levels, the levels of all other parts depend on the inner
shell level.
Thicken innershell
You can define a thickening for both the top and the bottom side of the inner
shell.

Inner shell is not
thickened.
Inner shell is thickened

towards the outer face of
the insulation.
Define the insulation
height to prevent
collisions.
Inner shell is thickened to
the inner face of the
outer shell.
Inner shell is thickened to

the outer face of the
outer shell.
Define the outer shell
height to prevent
collisions.

Thickness Define the inner shell
thickness.
If you do not enter a value, the
inner shell thickness defined
on the Parts tab is used.
Thickening parts Select how the top and

bottom thickening parts are
added to the inner shell.

Offset options Select the offset options for
the thickening parts. Offset
can be defined for both wall
ends.
Sandwich And Double Wall: Horizontal section tab

Use the Horizontal section tab to define the wall ends and to control how the
wall parts are split in the horizontal direction in Sandwich And Double Wall.
Wall end
The wall end options are the same for both ends.
First wall end Second wall end

Wall end offset

Inner shell end is fixed.
Define the offset for the
ends of the foil,
insulation, and outer
shell.
Insulation end is fixed.

ends of the inner shell,
foil, and outer shell.
Outer shell end is fixed.

ends of the inner shell,
foil, and insulation.
Corner shape to the

inside direction.
For the outer shell angle,
define the offset from
inner shell. Insulation is
along the inner shell.
Corner shape to the

inside direction.
Define the length of the
outer shell angle.

Corner shape to the
inside direction.
For the outer shell angle,
inner shell. Insulation is
along the outer shell.
Corner shape to the

outside direction.
Define the horizontal
offset for the outer shell.
There is no gap between
the insulation and the
inner shell angle.
Corner shape to the

outside direction.
For the inner shell angle,
the outer face of the
inner shell.
Corner shape to the
outside direction.
For the inner shell angle,
define the length.
Angled shells are not

created.
Define horizontal offset
for the inner shell,
insulation, and outer
shell.

Corner shape
Option Description
Select the inner shell corner shape.
Select the outer shell corner shape.
Select the insulation corner shape.
Add corner to main shell Add the corner to the shell. The options are:
• Add to 4 Cast Unit (4 = outer shell)
• Add to 4 Sub assembly
• Add to 1 Cast Unit (1 = inner shell)
• Add to 1 Sub assembly

Vertical chamfer
Option Description
Define whether a vertical chamfer is created.
Define the horizontal and vertical chamfer
dimensions, and the part prefix and the start
number.
Horizontal offset
To use the options, set the Split Front view option to Enabled.
Option Description
Define the horizontal offset for the foil,
insulation, and outer shell. The main gap
between the inner shells is defined in the Split
Front view section of the tab.
Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell,

foil, and outer shell. The main gap between the
insulation parts is defined in the Split Front
view section of the tab.
Define the horizontal offset for the inner shell,

foil, and insulation. The main gap between outer
shells is defined in the Split Front view section
of the tab.
Define a 90-degree angle for the inner shell and

the vertical offset towards the angled shell from
the inner face of the outer shell. The main gap
between the inner shells is defined in the Split
Front view section of the tab.
Additional options for the 90-degree angle:

Option Description
• Define the corner shapes for the inner shell.
• Define how the corner is added to the inner

shell.
• Define the part prefix and the start number.
Mirroring
Option Description
Define whether the sandwich wall is
mirrored.
Splitting parts
To split wall parts, set the Split Front view option to Enabled.
Option Description
Parts are not split. Define the
horizontal offset for both wall ends
using the points as reference points.
Parts are split. Define the section
width and the number of sections.
First end offset is the reference for
the first section width at the first wall
end.
Second end offset is the reference for
the last section width at the second
wall end.
width and the number of sections.
First end offset is the reference for
the first section width at the first wall
end.
Point (2) is the reference of the last
section width at the second wall end.

Option Description
width and enter the number of
sections.
Point (1) is the reference of the start
section at the first wall end.
Second end offset is the reference for
the last section width at the second
wall end.
width and enter the number of
sections.
Points (1, 2) are the references for the
section width at both wall ends.
Option Description
Define the horizontal direction.
Sandwich And Double Wall: Insulation tab

Use the Insulation tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of the
insulation in Sandwich And Double Wall.
Dimensions

Option Description
1 Define whether the insulation is split:
• Insulation is not split.
• Insulation is split in the horizontal

direction.
• Insulation is split in the vertical

direction.
• Insulation is split in the horizontal

and vertical direction.
2 Define the number and width of the

middle sections.
3 Define the gap between the sections.
4 Define the width of the first and last
section in the horizontal direction.
5 Define the height of the top and
bottom section in the vertical
direction.
6 Define which wall end is used for
distributing the insulation sections.

Option Description
Point direction Define the direction of the points. The
options are horizontal or vertical.
This option affects the representation

of workshop drawings.
Sandwich And Double Wall: Outside Shell tab

Use the Outside shell tab to control the vertical and/or horizontal splitting of
the outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can also define chamfers
and add a brick wall surface.
Dimensions
Option Description
Define the direction for the splitting.
Description
1 Define whether the outer shell is split:
• Outer shell is not split.

Description
• Outer shell is split in the
horizontal direction.
• Outer shell is split in the vertical

direction.
• Outer shell is split in the

horizontal and vertical direction.
2 Define the number and width of the

middle sections.
3 Define the gap between the sections.
4 Define the width of the first and last
section in the horizontal direction.
5 Define the height of the top and
bottom section in the vertical
direction.
Chamfering
Option Description
Vertical chamfers Define the vertical chamfers. Select a
chamfer shape from the list and
define the chamfer dimensions.

Option Description
Horizontal chamfers Define the horizontal chamfers. Select
a chamfer shape from the list and
define the chamfer dimensions.
Chamfer side Define the sides where the chamfers

are created.
For example:
Brick wall properties

Set the Brick wall option to Enabled to create a brick wall.

Select the brick wall type
for the outer shell and
define the brick
dimensions, mortar
height and width.
Wall edges Define whether the wall

edges are created as
loose parts or whether
they are added into an
assembly.
Sandwich And Double Wall: UDA tab

Use the UDA tab to define user-defined attributes for the inner shell, foil,
insulation, and outer shell in Sandwich And Double Wall. You can define
multiple UDAs for each part. UDAs can be used as filters, and they can be
displayed in drawings and reports.
User-defined attributes
For example:

Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam creates a horizontal seam between two
sandwich walls. Seam dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers:
inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell. In addition, you can define an extra
foil layer.

Objects created
• Seams
• Rabbets
• Foil
• Insulation
• Extra foil layer
Use for
Seams between sandwich wall shells.
Seams with additional rabbets.
Before you start

To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in
components switch.
Selection order
1. Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.
2. Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall.
The seam is created automatically when the secondary part is selected.

Part
1 Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)
2 Point
Multiple points can be picked.
See also
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab (page 178)
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab (page 181)
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab (page 181)
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the horizontal seam properties in Sandwich
Wall Horizontal Seam.
Seam position
Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles
can be defined for the outer shells.

Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line
between the walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated.
Example:
Shell classes
Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich
Wall Horizontal Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with
class 2, insulation with class 3, and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes
to apply seams.
To prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells and outer
shells, leave the Insulation classes box empty.
Rabbets in insulation
You can create rabbets in the insulation layer.

Option Description
No rabbet for the insulation layer.
One side rabbet for the top and

bottom of the insulation layer.
Rabbet depth and width can be
defined.
Mirrored one side rabbet for the top

and bottom of the insulation layer.
defined.
Two sided rabbets for the top and

bottom of the insulation layer.
defined.

Offset
You can define offset for the seam.
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Rabbets tab

Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and
outer shells in Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam.
Rabbet side
Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied. You can
define the rabbets separately for both sides.
The options are:
• Top side
• Bottom side
• Both sides
Sandwich Wall Horizontal Seam: Extra foils tab

Use the Extra foils tab to define an extra foil layer in the seam in Sandwich
Wall Horizontal Seam.
Foil

t Define the extra foil 1 mm
thickness.
Pos_No Prefix and start number The default part start
for the part position number is defined in the
number. Components settings in
> Options.
Material Material grade. The default material is
defined in the Part
material box in the
Components settings in
> Options.
Name Name for the extra foil. FOIL

Class Part class number for
the extra foil layer.
extra foil layer.
Connection method
Option Description
No connection Select how the extra foil is attached to the sandwich
wall.
• No connection (foil is a loose part)
• Weld
• Cast unit
• As subassembly
At Inside shell Select the profile to which the extra foil is connected.
• At inside shell
• At outside shell
Position h*b Select a prefix for the foil layer.
• Position h*b and Position b*h create a profile
without a prefix.
• Position PLh*b and Position PLb*H create a
profile which start with PL prefix.
• Par. section h*b and Par. section b*h: enter a
prefix in the box below.
Auto Select the rotation of the foil layer.
• Auto
• Below
• Front
• Top
• Back

Option Description
Foil shape Define shape of the extra foil.
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam

Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam creates a vertical seam between two sandwich
walls. Seam dimensions and rabbets can be defined for all layers: inner shell,
foil, insulation, and outer shell.
Objects created
• Seam
• Rabbets
• Foil
• Insulation

Use for
Seams between sandwich wall shells.
Seams with additional rabbets.
Limitations
The component works only if the sandwich walls are parallel.
Before you start

To be able to select the needed parts, activate the Select objects in
components switch.
Selection order
1. Select the inner shell of the first sandwich wall.
2. Select the inner shell of the second sandwich wall.
Part
1 Inner shell of the first sandwich wall

Part
2 Inner shell of the second sandwich wall
See also
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab (page 185)
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab (page 185)
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the vertical seam properties in Sandwich Wall
Vertical Seam.
Seam position
Seams can be defined for inner shells, insulation and outer shells. Draft angles
can be defined for the outer shells.
Define the seam position between the sandwich wall shells. The middle line
between the walls is used as a reference when the seam position is calculated.
Example:

Shell classes
Define the part classes to be applied to the seams. By default, the Sandwich
Wall Vertical Seam component creates inner shells with class 1, foil with class
2, insulation with class 3 and outer shells with class 4. Use these classes to
apply seams.
For example, to prevent the creation of seams between foils, insulation shells
and outer shells, leave the Insulation classes box empty.
Asymmetrical seams
You can create asymmetrical seams and/or rabbets in the insulation layer.
Option Description
Symmetrical seams.

Option Description
Symmetrical seams.
Rabbet depth can be defined for the
insulation layer.
Asymmetrical seams for the

insulation layer and outer shell.
Asymmetrical seams for the

insulation layer and outer shell.
Rabbet depth can be defined for the
insulation layer.
Offset / Mirror
You can define offset for the seam.
Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam: Rabbets tab

Use the Rabbets tab to define rabbets in inner shells, insulation layers and
outer shells in Sandwich Wall Vertical Seam.
Rabbet side
Select to which side of the sandwich wall the rabbets are applied.

• Right side
Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the right
side are applied to both sides.
• Left side
Rabbets are equal on both sides, but the rabbet dimensions on the left side
are applied to both sides.
• Both sides
Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides.

• Both sides mirrored
Rabbet dimensions can be defined separately for both sides, but sides are
mirrored.
Rabbet position
Typically the vertical seams go from the top to the bottom of the sandwich
wall. Define the seam offsets for the top and bottom sides. Offsets are applied
only to the inner and outer shells.

Sandwich wall window
Sandwich wall window creates a rectangular window opening in a sandwich
wall, or alternatively, a window and a door opening. The opening is created
through up to four parts (inner shell, foil, insulation, and outer shell). You can
select whether the foil is created. A frame can be created, as well as extra foils
and additional parts. The frame can be a wooden frame or a concrete border,
added to the inner shell.
Objects created
• Rectangular opening
• Wooden frame or concrete border
• Extra foils
• Additional parts
Use for
Opening in a sandwich
wall, with a wooden
frame and foil layers.

wall, with a concrete
border in the inner
shell.
wall, with a door
opening.
Selection order
1. Select the inner shell of the sandwich wall.
2. Pick the first position.
3. Pick the second position.

The second position point is needed to complete the input also if you
have selected an option for only one input point in the component dialog
box. In this case, the second point location does not matter.
The opening is created automatically when the second position is picked.
Part
1 Sandwich wall element
2 First picked position
3 Second picked position
Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions and parts of the opening.
Dimensions
Option Dimensions
Create Window

Option Dimensions
Create Window +
Door
Set the Door
location to Right
side or Left side.
The options on the
Door side detail tab
and Door bottom
detail tab are
available when you
set the Create
option to Window +
Door.
Option Description
1 Set the points for the opening:
• 2 points
Pick two points to create the opening (points 2 and 3 in the
image).
• Point 1 B H
Pick two points to create the opening. With this option, point 2
shown in the image is the reference point. Point 3 is only
needed to complete the input. Define the width and height of
the opening.
• Point 2 B H
Pick two points to create the opening. With this option, point 3
shown in the image is the reference point. Define the width and
height of the opening.
• 2 Points H
Pick two points to create the opening (points 2 and 3 in the
image). Define the height of the opening.
2 Vertical offset from the insertion point.
When you create Window + Door, this is the vertical offset for the
window.
3 Horizontal offset from the insertion point.
4 Width of the opening.
When you create Window + Door, this is the width of the window.
5 Height of the window.
6 Width of the door.
7 Vertical offset for the door.

Select other layers
Option Description
Insulation, Wall Parts where the opening is created.
To create the opening to the insulation and the external
layer parts, enter the class numbers.
If you do not enter any numbers, the opening is only
created to the part you selected when applying the
component.
Foil You can use Sandwich wall window both for sandwich
panels with a foil and for sandwich panels without a foil
(default). If you have a sandwich panel with a foil, select Yes
and enter the class number of the foil.
The frame shape options shown on the Bottom detail,
Left detail, Right detail, and Top detail tabs depend on
whether the foil is created or not.
Bottom detail tab / Left detail tab / Right detail tab

Use the Bottom detail tab, Left detail tab, and Right detail tab to control the
size, position and shape of the opening bottom, left side, and right side, and
the frame size and properties. On the Right detail tab, you can select that the
right detail is created the same as the left detail.
Frame
Part Description Default

Frame Define the frame profile 50*50
by selecting the profile
from the profile catalog.
Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and start number for the part position number.
You can enter the assembly position number on the
second row.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and reports.
Frame shape
The options for inner and outer frame are the same regardless of whether the
foil is created or not.

Inner Outer Description
Default
Cut or extension is not
created.
this option. Any of the
three options is used
depending on the frame
size.
created.
Extension is created.
If the frame is narrower
than the insulation, the
concrete part is
extended to fill the gap.
Cut is created.
If the frame is wider
concrete part is cut so
that the frame fits.

Middle Description
This option is available when the Foil
option is set to Do not create on the
Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.
Frame is not created.
This option is available when you

select Yes in the Foil option on the
Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.

Additional recess
Define the vertical and horizontal dimensions for the additional recess. By
default, the recess is not created.
Frame corner cuts
Option Description
Frame corners are not cut.
Define the horizontal and vertical

dimensions of the frame corner cuts.
Continuous slope
Select whether frame edges are sloped.
Option Description
By length
By angle
You can set the length or the angle for both sides separately.
The default is that frame edges are not sloped.

Top detail tab
Use the Top detail tab to control the size, position, number, and shape of the
opening top side.
Part

Foil2 Foil2 is the additional
foil created only on the
top side.
Define the thickness.
Option Description
second row.
Top frame shape


Default
created.
size.

created.
concrete part is
Cut is created.
Middle Description
Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Middle Description
Picture tab.

Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.
Additional recess

Frame corner cuts
Option Description
Horizontal and vertical dimensions of

the frame corner cuts.
Drip mold
Option Description
Drip mold is not created.
Drip mold is created. Define the mold

dimensions.
Drip mold is created. Define the mold

dimensions.
The drip mold can be created to any
of the shape options. For example, if
the shape has a bevel, the drip mold
is created at the same angle as the
bevel.
Continuous slope
Option Description
By length

Option Description
By angle
Extra foils tab

Use the Extra foils tab to control the creation of extra foils on the top, bottom,
right side, and left side of the opening.
Part

Extra foil Thickness of the foil. 50*50
Option Description
second row.
Extra foil dimensions

Description
1 Define whether extra foils are created.
2 Define the inside offset.
3 Define the foil width.
Shells to cut
Option Description
All shells are cut.
The inner shell is not cut.
The inner shell and the foil are not cut.
The inner shell and the foil are not cut. An insulation
extension is created.
Define the width and the material grade of the
insulation extension.
The outer shell is cut.
Additional parts tab

Use the Additional parts tab to control the size, position, number, and
alignment of additional parts.
Parts
Select whether additional parts, custom component parts, or no additional
parts are created.

Parts Define the profile of the D5
additional parts by
selecting the profile
Custom component Define the custom
parts component parts by
selecting the component

components catalog.
You can also use a
configuration file to
define the properties.
Option Description
second row.
Define distances
Select whether to define the distances between the parts by entering the
distance dimensions on this tab or by using an external text file. You can use
an external file to automate the creation of additional parts when window
sizes differ.
The name of the external file is
SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat. The file is located in the ..
\Environments\Common\system folder.
The image below shows an example of a local standard for creating additional
parts. M is a module that is 100 mm.
The SandwichPanelWindowAdditionalParts.dat configuration file that

contains the needed specifications for the example above is as follows:
BOTTOM;
0;599;1;1
600;1200;1;2;145

1201;1800;1;3;145
TOP;
1201;1800;1;1
LEFT;
0;599;1;1
600;1200;1;2;145
1201;2100;1;3;145
RIGHT;
0;599;1;1
600;1200;1;2;145
1201;2100;1;3;145
The keywords BOTTOM, TOP, LEFT and RIGHT define the side of the window the
settings are applied to.
The syntax in the file is as follows: bmin;bmax;cm;nd;dmax;d1;d2;d3.
bmin Smallest window dimension to apply the setting.

bmax Biggest window dimension to apply the setting.
cm Creation method:
• 1 means use the number of parts for nd.
• 2 means use maximum spacing for nd.
nd Depending on the creation method (cm):
• Number of parts, when cm is 1.
• Maximum allowed distance between parts, when cm is 2.
d1 Distance from the start point to the first additional part (optional).
d2 Distance from the first additional part to the second (optional).
d3 Distance from the second additional part to the third (optional).
The additional parts are placed symmetrically, so distances d1, d2 and d3 are
also used from the end point. If the optional distances d1, d2 and d3 are not
defined, the parts are placed at equal distances.
In the image above 0;599;1;1 means that when the window width is equal or
bigger than 0, but equal or less than 599, the creation method is by number of
parts and 1 part should be created.
600;1200;2;300;145 would mean that when the window width is equal or
bigger than 600, but equal or less than 1200, the creation method is use
maximum spacing. The maximum allowed spacing between additional parts is
300 mm. The first part (and last part) distance is 145 mm. If the window width
is 1200, three more parts are needed (1200 - 2x145)/300=3.03. The spacing
between the additional parts will then be (1200 - 2x145)/4 = 227.5 mm.
Placement
Select whether additional part placement is the same or different on each
side.

Option Description
Placement dimensions for the
bottom, left side, and right side.
If additional part placement is the
same on each side, define the bottom
dimensions only.
Placement dimensions for the top

side.
Door edge options

The options for controlling door edges are available when you set the Create
option to Window + Door on the Picture tab, and the Placement option to
Different each side on the Additional parts tab.
Option Description
Create on door side No, Same as window side, Same as door side
Create in bottom No, Same as bottom
detail
Connections tab
Use the Connections tab to control how the wooden frame, additional parts,
extra foil, and extensions are connected to the shells.
Add
Option Description
Wooden frame to, Additional parts, Select to which part the wooden
Extra foil to frame, additional parts, and extra foil
are connected.
The Extra foil to option is shown if
you have selected to create the foil on
the Picture tab.

Connect extensions to their shells
Option Description
Inside shell extension, Outside Select how the extension parts are
shell extension, Insulation shell connected to their main parts.
extension, Foil extension
The Foil extension option is shown if
you have selected to create the foil on
the Picture tab.
Edge connection
Define the corner connection type for wooden frames.
Option Description
Cut both frames in a 45-degree angle.
Extend horizontal frames.
Extend vertical frames.
Door side detail tab / Door bottom detail tab

Use the Door side detail tab and Door bottom detail tab to control the size,
position, and shape of the door side and bottom, and the frame size and
properties.
Create door
The options on the Door side detail tab and Door bottom detail tab are
available when you set the Create option to Window + Door on the Picture
tab.
Same as options
• Same as on the Door side detail tab:
Select the door short side detail.
• None
• Same as window side follows the side setting of the window side.
• Same as door side follows the door side setting.
The door long side detail follows the setting of the corresponding window
side.

• Same as bottom on the Door bottom detail tab:
Yes follows the setting of the bottom window.
Frame

Option Description
second row.
Frame shape

Default
created.
size.
created.

concrete part is
Cut is created.
Middle Description
Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.

Middle Description
Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.
Frame is created.

Picture tab.
Additional recess
Frame corner cuts
Option Description

Option Description
Define the horizontal and vertical
dimensions of the frame corner cuts.
Door side frame extension
Option Description
Frame on the door side is created only to the
bottom level of the window.
Frame on the door side is extended to the top level

of the window.
Enter the extension distance in the box.
Continuous slope
Option Description
By length
By angle
Wall layout tools

Wall Layout tools is a set of components that you can use for creating and
modifying all common types of concrete walls, such as solid precast panels
from single layers to double walls and sandwich walls, and different wall

structures that are cast on the site. The wall structure may contain several
layers, for example, structural layers, insulation, void, and surface treatments.
You can use direct modification to flexibly change the wall geometry, layer
offsets, openings, and seam lines.
Wall layout is the main component in the set and it is used for defining the
wall layout. Wall layout is available on the Concrete tab, click Panel --> Wall
layout, and in the Applications & components catalog.
The other Wall Layout tools are available in the Applications & components
catalog:
• Wall layout connector connects the walls to each other.
• Wall layout opening sets the default values for openings. Use direct
modification to create and modify openings.
• Wall layout seam divides the wall segment into two or more cast units by
adding seams. Use direct modification to create seams.
• Wall layout elementation divides the wall into elements according to
length, height, number, weight, or crane lifting capacity.
• Wall layout layer swapper is intended for swapping the casting order of
layers in a double wall. Only certain properties of the two layers are
swapped, such as name, class, numbering settings, and all UDAs. The
geometry of the layers is not swapped. If one layer is created using the
layer creation option Add as sub-assembly (shell 2), and the other layer is
defined as Add to cast unit (shell 1), these properties are also swapped.
Wall layout
Wall layout creates a single wall or multiple straight wall segments. The wall
can be a single-layer solid wall, a double wall, or a sandwich wall that has any
number of layers.
Design workflow with Wall layout tools
1. You can build a shape.

2. You can build a shape and create openings.
3. You can create wall type definitions.
4. You can create wall elementation and define detailed wall geometry.
5. You can define detailed connections, openings, embeds, and
reinforcement.

Selection order
1. Ensure that the Direct modification switch is active.

2. On the Concrete tab, click Panel --> Wall layout.
3. Select the appropriate command on the contextual toolbar:
• To create one or more straight wall segments, click , and then pick
two or more points.
Note that you can finish the creation to the first picked point to create
a closed wall structure.
• To create the wall layout as a closed wall, click , and then pick two
or more points.
Wall layout will automatically connect the first and the last point that
you have picked.
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the wall.
Depending on how many points you pick and how you pick the points, one or
more straight wall segments or a closed wall is created in the model. Each
created straight segment is a separate instance of the Wall layout component
that you can modify separately. When you create two or more wall segments,
an instance of the Wall layout connector component is added between each
wall segment.
In the image below, there are four wall segments in an open shape between
the picked points, 1 - 5, and three wall layout connectors at points 2, 3 and 4. If
you had created a closed wall, there would be a fifth wall segment between
points 5 and 1.

The modeling direction of the wall layout determines which face of the wall
layout is shown in the front view of a cast unit drawing when the cast unit
drawing coordinate system is set to Fixed.
In the image below, the top-in-form face is not set by Wall layout. The image
shows an example of sandwich wall settings that you should use when the
outside shell is cast against the pallet, and the inside shell is the uppermost
shell in the casting.

Alternatively, you can set the top-in-form face with Wall layout. Set
Walllayout.Udas.dat to have the top-in-form face property by adding the
following row:
option FixedMainView j_FixedDrawingMainView
The Walllayout.Udas.dat file can be located in the model folder or any of
the system folders.
General tab
Use the General tab to define the basic properties for the whole Wall layout
component. The properties on all other tabs are layer-specific, and apply to
the layer that you have currently selected in the layer list.
Option Description
H, Z1, Z0 You have four options for defining the height and the
global Z coordinates:
• Define the wall bottom level according to the creation
points, and the Position in depth option and value.
Define the height with the H option.
• Define the wall bottom level with the Z0 option (global
Z coordinate), and the height with the H option.
• Define the wall top level with the Z1 option (global Z
coordinate), and the height with the H option.

Option Description
• Define the wall bottom level with the Z0 option (global
Z coordinate), and the wall top level with the Z1 option
(global Z coordinate).
You can use the H option to modify the height of
rectangular walls. If you change the wall shape so that it is
not rectangular, you cannot define height with this
option. Use direct modification instead.
Total thickness Enter the total thickness of the wall layout. Layer
thickness is calculated based on the total thickness.
Use the total thickness for double walls where the
thickness of the void layer or the CIP layer is often
flexible. This means that Wall layout can adjust the
thickness so that the total thickness is as defined.
• If there are no flexible layers in the wall layout, you
can leave the total thickness option empty. Total
thickness is not used if there are no flexible layers.
• If there is more than one flexible layer, the thickness is
divided equally between those layers.
Cast unit name Enter a name for the cast unit.
Prefix Enter a prefix for the cast unit.
Start number Enter a start number for the cast unit.
Position in plane Define the wall layout location in relation to the line
between the input points.
Enter the offset distance, if needed.
Position in depth Define the wall layout vertical location in relation to the
line between the input points.
Enter the offset distance, if needed.
Layer tab
Use the Layer tab to define the properties of a single layer. Select the layer in
the layer list, or in the preview image.
Layer list

Layers Description Example
The layer list shows the The example image
layers of the wall. below shows a preview
of the wall layers. The
Use the buttons to control
image is automatically
the number and the order
updated when you
of the layers:
change the layer type.
• The selected layer is
Click to add a new highlighted with a
layer. magenta frame.
•
Click to remove
the selected layer.
•
Click to
change the order of the
layers by moving the
selected layer up or
down in the list.
Use the check box in front
of the layer name to control
whether the properties of
the selected layer are
modified.
Use the leftmost check box
to control whether the
number of layers and the
order of the layers are
modified when you modify
the Wall layout
component.
Layer properties
Option Description
Layer name Enter a name for the layer. This name is shown in the
layer list.
Layer names are also shown in the direct modification
toolbar when you modify wall boundary offsets. You
can select which layer to modify.
Layer names are not visible in reports or drawings.
Layer type • Structure: Typically used for solid walls, double
walls, and the concrete layers of sandwich walls. Use

Option Description
this type if you want to create a cast-in-place layer
between double wall layers instead of a void.
• Insulation: Insulation layer in a sandwich wall.
Insulation gets a different density in Wall layout
elementation (100 kg/m³).
• Void: Void between double wall layers. Use this type
if you do not want to create any parts for the layer.
• Foil: Typically a very thin layer which is not detailed
in the corners.
• Surface: Surface treatment on top of a structural
layer. Typically, a surface layer is the first and/or the
last layer.
• Component: Layer is not created as a part. Instead,
an instance of the component selected in the Layer
component option is added.
Layer Select whether the layer is split into two pieces using
elementation seams.
Layer creation Select how the layer is created to the precast cast unit:
• Add to cast unit: All layer parts are added to a
single main cast unit.
• Add as sub-assembly: The layer part is added as a
sub-assembly to the main cast unit.
• Do not add to cast unit: The layer part is not added
to the main cast unit. It will be its own assembly or
cast unit. This option changes the concrete type
from precast to cast in place.
Layer component Select a component when you have set the layer type to
Component. Instead of creating the layer as a part, an
instance of the component is created.
Attribute settings Select an attribute file for the layer component.
If you need specific component properties for the layer
component, you can define the properties in the
component dialog box and save them as an attribute
file.
Layer thickness Enter the layer thickness.
You can leave the layer thickness empty to let Wall
layout set the layer thickness so that the total
thickness is correct as defined on the General tab. The

Option Description
void layer or the CIP layer in a double wall can often
have a flexible thickness.
Part name, Class, Define the name, class, material, part prefix and start
Material, Pour number of the layer part. Define the pour phase for CIP
phase, Surface layers. Select the surface treatment when you have set
treatment, Prefix, the layer type to Surface.
Start number
Vertical offset tab

Use the Vertical offset tab to define the vertical offsets of each layer at the
top and bottom horizontal edges of the wall layout.
Note that you can define the offsets at any other edge by using direct
modification and seams.
UDA tab
Use the UDA tab to define the user-defined attributes of each layer part in the
wall layout.
Note that the content of the UDA tab may vary depending on your Tekla
Structures environment. You can customize the content of the UDA tab.
Modify the wall layout

Modify the geometry of the wall layout
You can use direct modification to modify the wall layout. Before you start,
ensure that the Direct modification switch is active. Select the wall
layout to display the direct modification toolbar. To modify the wall layout,
select the appropriate command from the toolbar.

You can modify the outer edges of the wall layout by dragging the edges and
corner handles. You can also insert vertices by dragging the edge midpoint
handles, and delete vertices by selecting a corner handle or edge, and pressing
the Delete key.
In addition to the standard polygon modification, you can drag the special line
handles at the ends of the wall layout to make the wall layout shorter or
longer. You can also drag the line handle perpendicular to the wall layout by
holding down the Alt key while dragging.
As an alternative to dragging the line handle, you can drag the dimension
arrowhead. If you know how much you want to shorten or lengthen the wall
layout, select the dimension arrowhead and enter the value by which you want
the dimension to change. Note that you can use the dimension arrowheads
and line handles in a plan view whereas polygon modification is possible only
in 3D or section views.

Modify the offset at layer edges
Use the Modify wall boundary offsets command on the direct modification
toolbar to modify the offsets of the layers at the outer edges of the wall layout,
or at the edges of the openings or seams. Select the layer that you are going to
modify from the list on the toolbar.
You have three options for modifying the offset at a particular edge:
• Drag the line handle at the edge. You can only drag the line handle
perpendicular to the edge.
• Drag the dimension arrowhead and enter the measurement value.
• Select the line handle and enter a new offset value.
You can select two or more line handles by holding down the Shift key
when selecting the handles.
You can modify the top and bottom offsets at the outer edges in the Wall
layout dialog box, and the seam offsets in the Wall layout seam dialog box.

You can define that a certain layer is not cut with the opening. First select the
opening. On the direct modification toolbar, select the layer and then Do not
create.

Wall layout opening
Use direct modification to add openings to wall layouts. Before you start,
ensure that the Direct modification switch is active.
To add an opening, select the wall layout and then select the appropriate
direct modification command. You can create either rectangular or polygonal
openings.
NOTE Use the Wall layout opening tool from the Applications &
components catalog only if you want to change the default settings of
the openings. You can define the default settings for adding an
opening, and set whether to apply detailing and define detailing
attributes.

Add an opening to a wall layout
Option Description
Add an opening by picking the opening length in
the wall. There are five different dimension
options to define the opening bottom and top
level. To cycle through the options, click the
opening dimension button until it shows the
wanted option. The button is marked with a
blue frame in the example image on the left.
The five options are:
• Enter the distance between the bottom of
the wall and the bottom of the opening,
800.00 in this example, and the height of
the opening, 2400.00. If Position in depth
values are used, the bottom distance is
measured from the creation points.
• Enter the distance between the bottom of
the wall and the bottom of the opening, and
the distance between the bottom of the wall
and the top of the opening. If Position in
depth values are used, the bottom distance
is measured from the creation points.
• Enter the global Z coordinate of the opening
bottom level, and the height of the opening.
• Enter the height of the opening, and the
global Z coordinate of the opening top level.
• Enter the global Z coordinate of the opening
bottom level, and the global Z coordinate of
the opening top level.
You can use an architectural drawing as a
reference model where you can pick the
opening width and the location.
Add a rectangular opening by picking two
points.

Option Description
Add a polygonal opening by picking three or
more points.
Modify an opening in a wall layout
Option Description
Modify the geometry of an opening You can modify an opening in the
same way as the outer edges of the
wall layout by using the appropriate
direct modification command. You
can:
• Drag the edges.
• Drag the corner handles.
• Insert vertices by dragging the
edge midpoint handles.
• Delete vertices by selecting the
corner handle or edge, and
pressing the Delete key.
In addition, you can modify the start
or the end of the opening by dragging
the line handles, or by using the
dimension arrowheads.
Move and copy an opening 1. Select an opening by selecting a
face inside the opening.
2. Start dragging the selected face.
3. To create a copy of the opening,
hold down the Ctrl key.
To move an opening without
changing the shape of the
opening, drag the face handle to
the desired location.

Option Description
Delete an opening Select a face inside the opening and
press the Delete key.
Modify the opening detailing Wall layout can create an opening

without any details. Wall layout can
also create a detailed opening by
inserting an instance of the Sandwich
wall window component, which can
create a detailed window, or a
window + door opening combination.
To create a detailed opening, select
the opening. Activate detailing on the
direct modification toolbar and select
the attributes for Sandwich wall
window. Note that you can only use
detailing components for rectangular
openings, or openings that connect a
window and a door with the same top
edge line.
Wall layout seam

When you create a wall layout, it is at first a single precast wall. Wall layout
seam divides the wall layout into two or more precast wall pieces. In the wall
layout, the wall layout layers that have the Layer elementation option set to
Yes in the Wall layout dialog box are divided.
Add and modify wall layout seams
Use the Modify seams command on the direct modification toolbar to

add and modify seams. Modify seams opens the Wall layout seam dialog
box where you can define the seam properties for each wall layer separately.
Select the layer in the preview image and define the properties.

Option Description
1. Define the gap dimension at the
seam.
2. Define the gap offset from the
seam input position.
Create a connection component Select Yes to create a connection
between the two layer parts at the
seam.
When you select Yes, you can define
the other component options.
Component name Select a connection component from
the Applications & components
catalog.
Component attributes Select the attribute file for the
connection.
Component primary input Select which wall piece is the first
input part for the connection, seam,
or other components created at the
seam.
Option Description
Add a vertical seam
Use the New seam command
to add a vertical seam. Pick a
point to create the seam.
Note that New seam is selected
automatically when you use the
Modify seams command and the
wall layout does not have any
seams yet.

Option Description
Add a polyseam
Use the New polyseam
command to add a polyseam. Pick
two or more points to create the
seam.
Polyseams can contain vertical,
horizontal, and sloping segments.
Extend the start and the end of
the polyseam to make it clearly
cross the edges of the wall it is
dividing.
Move a seam Move a vertical seam by dragging

the seam.
You can also move vertical seams
by dragging the horizontal line
handle or the dimension
arrowhead.
Move and modify a polyseam like
any other polygonal object.
Copy a seam Copy a vertical seam or a

polyseam by holding down the
Ctrl key and dragging the seam.
Delete a seam Delete a vertical seam by selecting
the seam handle and pressing the
Delete key.
Delete a polyseam by deleting all
segments of the polyseam.
Modify the seam properties 1. Select a vertical seam or a
segment of a polyseam.
When you select the first
seam, the current properties
of the seam are loaded into
the Wall layout seam dialog
box.
2. Select two or more seams.
Hold down the Shift key and
then select the vertical seams,
or the segments of a
polyseam.

Option Description
3. When you have selected the
seams, modify the properties
in the dialog box and click
Modify.
Wall layout connector

Use Wall layout connector to apply a connection between two wall layouts.
Wall layout connector fits the layer parts at the corners. You can control the
corner gaps by extending or shortening the layers of the walls, and by adding
connections between the connected layer parts. Wall layout connector can
also add connections between the layer parts when you are using a
connection component at the corners.
Note that if you have created several wall layouts at one go using the Wall
layout tool, wall layout connectors are automatically added between the wall
layouts. Wall layout connector is updated automatically when you change the
wall type.
If you create a wall layout and later add another next to it, you can add a
connection between them using the Wall layout connector component in the
Applications & components catalog. Select the two wall layouts to create the
connection. Ensure that you select the wall layout component instance, not a
single object created by the wall layout. The connector is created when you
select the second wall layout.
Wall layout connector properties
Option Description
Define how the layer parts are fitted.
Click the button three times to cycle through the
three different corner set-up options.
Define whether the panel ends are square or

sloped.
You can use this option to set a typical corner
detail for double walls.
This option is also applied in a connection
component used between the layer parts.

Option Description
Free space A Define the gap between the two layer parts.
The preview image shows where the gap is
located. The gap location depends on the corner
set-up.
TIP If you are using a connection component,

use property name FreeSpace in the
custom connection to control that value
from Wall layout connector directly.
End offset B Define the end offset of the longer part.

The preview image shows where the offset is
located. The offset depends on the corner set-up.
TIP If you are using a connection component,

use property name EndOffset in the
custom connection to control that value
from Wall layout connector directly.
Connection Select a connection component that is created

between the two layer parts.
If you do not select a connection, only fittings are
added according to the gap and the end offsets.
If you want to view the current connector
properties, select the wall layout connector or
double-click the fitting created by the connector.
Attributes If you have added a connection, select an
attribute file for it.
Connection main part If you have added a connection, set the
connection main part.
Wall layout elementation

Wall layout elementation automatically adds new seams to divide the wall
layout into two or more precast wall pieces.
Openings are taken into account when adding the seams. Openings may affect
the final seam position so that the final length or weight of the precast wall is
less than the target value.
NOTE Weight calculations are based on the wall layout geometry. Any other
additional parts in the walls are not taken into account in the
calculation. The density in weight calculation is 2500 kg/m³ for the
structural layer type and 100 kg/m³ for the insulation layer.

Option Description
Create seams • By length: Enter one or more desired lengths. If it
is not possible divide the wall using the first
length, Wall layout elementation tries to use
the next length you have entered, and so on.
• By number: Enter the number of walls you want
to create.
• By weight: Enter the desired weight of a wall
piece. The wall layout is divided so that the weight
of the precast walls is as close to the desired
weight as possible.
• By crane lifting weight: Divides the wall layout
so that the weight of the precast walls is as close
to the maximum lifting capacity as possible.
Min length Enter the minimum length of a wall piece.
Max length Enter the maximum length of a wall piece.
This value is used with all creation methods.
Max weight Enter the maximum weight of a wall piece.
This value is used with all creation methods.
Max crane lifting Select the crane used for erection.
weight
When the crane is selected, the maximum weight of
the walls is always less than the lifting capacity of the
crane.
To define a crane set-up, open the Crane properties
dialog box by clicking the button on the right:
1. Pick the crane location in the model, or enter the
X and Y values.
2. Enter the crane lifting capacity data in the table.
Enter the distance in the from-near-to-far order.
3. Save the crane set-up.
You can use the crane name when saving the
set-up.
To modify and review the existing crane set-up, select
the crane set-up from the list in the Crane
properties dialog box. Click Preview to see the
crane location on the lifting graph visualized in the
model view.

Option Description
Avoid openings Select whether the seams may cross the opening.
If the seams may not cross the opening, enter the
minimum distance from the opening.
Distribution Select the direction of the seams, and the start end
direction at the wall layout.
You can add both vertical and horizontal seams.
Seam settings Select the seam attributes used for new seams.
Ensure that the layer offsets are set properly as they
may affect the weight and length of the wall.
Create to selected Select the wall layout and click the Create to
walls selected walls button to insert the seams. You can
select one or multiple wall layouts.
Wall layout layer swapper

Use Wall layout layer swapper to swap the structural precast layers of one
single wall in a wall layout, typically a double wall. You can swap the order of
some individual walls in the same wall line if they need to be cast in a different
order.

To swap layers, select Wall layout layer swapper in the Applications &
components catalog, then select a wall layout and the wall part that you want
to swap.
When you use the swapper tool, a triangular handle is shown at each
location of the tool . You can drag these handles to modify the wall to be
swapped. To swap another wall in the layout, you can copy the swapper to
another location by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging.
You can delete the swapper instances by selecting the swapper handles and
pressing the Delete key.
Customize the wall layout

You can customize the content of the UDA tab by using the
WallLayout.Udas.dat file. The WallLayout.Udas.dat file can be located
in any of the folders set in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced
options. The file is never read from the model folder.
You can use the file to control which user-defined properties of the created
layer parts can be used in the wall layout. We recommend that you only use
UDAs that are typically common for all precast walls in one wall layout.
The sample file shown below contains a full description of all the settings and
the format of the file. The lines starting with '//' are comment lines.
//
// Customized user defined attributes (UDA) for layer parts created by
wall layout component
//
// Each row shall contain 2 or 3 fields separated by tab(s) or semicolon.
// Please note that all uda names shall be unique
//
// Field 1: The data type of the attribute. Valid values are 'distance',
'float', 'option',
// 'integer' and 'string' compatible with the actual user
defined attributes as
// specified in objects.inp
// Field 2: UDA name. This is the name of the user defined attribute set
for the layer part.
// Field 3: Label. This text is shown in the wall layout UDA tab page if
the uda is not
// defined in objects.inp. Label can be a translatable label or
any text or empty text.
//
string comment j_comment
string USER_FIELD_1 j_user_field_1
1.4 Formwork components

This section introduces formwork components.
Concrete Detailing 233 Formwork components

• Beam Formwork (page 234)
• Column Formwork (page 238)
• Wall Formwork (page 242)
• General Beam Form (page 246)
• General Wall Form (page 249)
• General Clamp (page 252)
• General Clip (page 254)
• General Tie (page 256)
• General Tie and Clips (page 258)
Beam Formwork
Beam Formwork creates a timber formwork around a beam.
Availability
To use the component, go to Tekla Warehouse, locate the Formwork
components and click Insert into model.
The components are then available in the Applications & components
catalog.
Objects created
• Timber formwork (bottom and side plywood panels, supports, walers)
• Ties
• Clips
Use for
Beam formwork
Limitations
Beam Formwork works only with rectangular beams.

Before you start
Create a concrete beam.
Selection order
1. Select the beam.
The beam formwork is created automatically.
Part
1 Bottom and side plywood panels
2 Bottom and side supports
3 Waler
4 Tie and clip
See also
Beam Formwork: Beam tab (page 235)
Beam Formwork: Parameters tab (page 237)
Beam Formwork: Beam tab

Use the Beam tab to control the dimensions, spacings and part properties of
the plywood panels and supports in Beam Formwork.

Dimensions
Description
1 Spacing between side supports.
2 Beam form length.
3 Distance to first bottom support from the form
edge.
4 Spacing between bottom supports.
5 Bottom support length.
Plywood panel and support properties
Option Description
Bottom Profile Thickness, width and height for the bottom
plywood panel.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the side
plywood panel.
Bottom Support Thickness, width and height for the bottom
support.
Side Support Thickness, width and height for the side
support.
Option Description
Pos_No Prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Name Name that is shown in drawings and
reports.

Beam formwork properties
Option Description
Beam Name, prefix and start number for
the beam formwork cast unit.
Beam Formwork: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the waler properties and the dimensions
and spacings of the clips and walers in Beam Formwork.
Dimensions
Description
1 Waler extension length.
2 Number of walers and clips in vertical direction.
3 Vertical spacing between clips.
4 Vertical distance to first clip from the form edge.
5 Horizontal distance to first clip from the form edge.
6 Horizontal spacing between clips.
Waler properties
Option Description
Waler Profile Thickness, width and height for the
walers.
Option Description
position number.
reports.

Option Description
Tie and clip properties
Option Description
Tie Component Name Define the component that you want
to use as tie by selecting it from the
Applications & components catalog.
Tie Attribute File Select an attribute file for the
component.
Clip Component Name Define the component that you want
to use as clip by selecting it from the
Clip Attribute File Select an attribute file for the
component.
Column Formwork
Column Formwork creates a timber formwork around a column.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
• Timber formwork (plywood panels and supports on sides)
• Clamps

Use for
Column formwork
Limitations
Column Formwork works only with rectangular columns.
Before you start

Create a concrete column.
Selection order
1. Select the column.
The column formwork is created automatically.

Part
1 Plywood panel
2 Support
3 Clamp
See also
Column Formwork: Column tab (page 240)
Column Formwork: Column tab

Use the Column tab to control the properties of clamps, plywood panels and
supports in Column Formwork.

Dimensions
Description
1 Number of clamps.
2 Spacing between clamps.
3 Distance to first clamp from the bottom.
Clamp properties
Option Description
Clamp Name Define the component that you want
to use as clamp by selecting it from
the Applications & components
catalog.
Attribute File Select an attribute file for the
component.
Option Description
Plywood Profile Thickness, width and height for the
plywood panels.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the
side supports.
Option Description
position number.

Option Description
reports.
Column formwork properties
Option Description
Panel Name, prefix and start number for
the column formwork cast unit.
Wall Formwork
Wall Formwork creates a timber formwork around a panel.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
• Timber formwork (plywood panels, studs, frame and walers)
• Ties
• Clips
Use for
Wall formwork

Limitations
Wall Formwork works only with single panels.
Before you start

Create a concrete panel.
Selection order
1. Select the panel.
The wall formwork is created automatically.
Part
1 Stud
2 Walers
3 Plywood panel
4 Tie and clip
5 Frame
See also
Wall Formwork: Panel tab (page 244)

Wall Formwork: Parameters tab (page 245)
Wall Formwork: Panel tab

Use the Panel tab to control the properties of studs, frame and plywood
panels in Wall Formwork. Define the dimensions of wall form, studs and
frame.
Dimensions
Description
1 Distance to first stud from the form edge.
2 Spacing between studs.
3 Width of edge lap.
4 Height of wall form.
5 Length of wall form.
Frame, stud and plywood panel properties
Option Description
Edge Profile Thickness, width and height for the
frames.
Stud Profile Thickness, width and height for the
studs.

Option Description
plywood panels.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
Wall formwork properties
Option Description
the wall formwork cast unit.
Wall Formwork: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the waler profile and the dimensions and
spacings of the clips and walers in Wall Formwork.
Dimensions
Description
1 Horizontal distance to first clip from the form edge.
2 Horizontal spacing between clips.
3 Length of waler extension.

Description
4 Number of walers and clips in vertical direction.
5 Vertical spacing between clips.
6 Vertical distance to first clip from the form edge.
Waler properties
Option Description
Waler Profile Thickness, width and height for the
walers.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
Tie and clip properties
Option Description
Clip Component File Select an attribute file for the
component.
Tie Component File Select an attribute file for the
component.
General Beam Form

General Beam Form creates plywood panels and supports. You can use
General Beam Form as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for
Beam Formwork.

Availability
catalog.
Objects created
• Plywood panels on sides and bottom
• Supports on sides and bottom
Use for
Beam form in a beam formwork.
Limitations
General Beam Form works only with rectangular beams.
Selection order
1. Pick the start point.
2. Pick the end point.
The beam form is created automatically.

Part
1 Side support
2 Side plywood panel
3 Bottom plywood panel
4 Bottom support
See also
Beam Form: Parameters tab (page 248)
Beam Form: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of beam
form in Beam Form.
Dimensions
Description
1 Spacing between side supports.
2 Spacing between side plywood
panels.
3 Height of side plywood panels.
4 Distance to first bottom support from
the form edge.
5 Spacing between bottom supports.
6 Length of bottom support.

Option Description
Bottom Profile Thickness, width and height for the
bottom plywood panel.
Side Profile Thickness, width and height for the
side plywood panel.
Bottom Support Thickness, width and height for the
bottom support.
Side Support Thickness, width and height for the
side support.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
Beam form properties
Option Description
Beam Name, prefix and start number for
the beam form cast unit.
General Wall Form

General Wall Form creates a timber form containing a plywood panel, a
frame and studs. You can use General Wall Form as a stand-alone component
or as a subcomponent for Wall Formwork.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
• Plywood panel
• Studs
• Frame

Use for
Wall form in a wall formwork.
Selection order
1. Select the start point.
2. Select the end point.
The wall form is created automatically.
Part
1 Stud
2 Frame

Part
3 Plywood panel
See also
Wall Form: Parameters tab (page 251)
Wall Form: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the wall form in Wall
Form.
Dimensions
Description
1 Distance to first stud from the form
edge.
2 Spacing between studs.
3 Width of edge lap.
4 Height of wall form.
5 Define whether the wall form is
created on the left or right side.

Stud, frame and plywood panel properties
Option Description
Edge Profile Thickness, width and height for the
frame.
Stud Profile Thickness, width and height for the
studs.
plywood panel.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
Wall form properties
Option Description
the wall form cast unit.
General Clamp
General Clamp creates a clamp. You can use General Clamp as a stand-alone
component or as a subcomponent for Column Formwork.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
Clamps

Use for
Clamps in a column formwork.
Selection order
The clamps are created automatically.
See also
General Clamp: Parameters tab (page 253)
General Clamp: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties and dimensions of clamps in
General Clamp.
Dimensions

Description
1 Length of the clamp.
2 Distance to first slot.
3 Number of slots.
4 Spacing between slots.
5 Profile of slots.
Clamp properties
Option Description
Clamp Profile Thickness, width and height for the
clamps.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
General Clip
General Clip creates a clip. You can use General Clip as a stand-alone
component or as a subcomponent for the Beam Formwork and Wall
Formwork.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
Clip

Use for
Clip and tie in a beam formwork.
Selection order
The clip is created automatically.
See also
General Clip: Parameters tab (page 255)
General Clip: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the dimensions and properties of clips in
General Clip.
Dimensions
Description
1 Length of the clip.

Description
2 Width of the slot.
3 Length of the slot.
Clip properties
Option Description
Clip Profile Thickness, width and height for the
clip.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
General Tie
General Tie creates a tie. You can use General Tie as a stand-alone
component or as a sub-component for Beam Formwork and Wall
Formwork.
Availability
catalog.
Objects created
• Tie
• Spacers

Use for
Tie and clip in a wall formwork.
Selection order
1. Pick the start point.
2. Pick the end point.
The tie is created automatically.
Part
1 Spacer
2 Tie
See also
General Tie: Parameters tab (page 257)
General Tie: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control tie dimensions and properties in General
Tie.

Dimensions
Description
1 Length of the tie end extension.
2 Length of the spacer.
3 Define whether or not to create
spacers.
Tie and spacer properties
Option Description
Tie Profile Thickness, width and height for the
tie.
Spacer Profile Thickness, width and height for the
spacers.
Option Description
position number.
reports.
General Tie and Clips

General Tie and Clips creates a tie and clips. You can use General Tie and
Clips as a stand-alone component or as a subcomponent for Beam
Formwork and Wall Formwork.
Availability
catalog.

Objects created
• Tie
• Clips
• Spacers
Use for
Tie and clip in a wall formwork.
Selection order
3. The tie and clips are created automatically.
Part
1 Clip
2 Spacer
3 Tie

See also
General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab (page 260)
General Tie and Clips: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of General Tie and Clips.
Dimensions
Description
1 Length of the tie end extension.
Tien and clip properties
Option Description
Tie Attribute File Select an attribute file for the
component.
Clip Attribute File Select an attribute file for the
component.
1.5 Openings
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete openings.
• Hole Generation (32) (page 260)
• Polygon Hole Generation (33) (page 263)
Concrete Detailing 260 Openings

Hole Generation (32)
Hole Generation (32) creates a hole in the object, or splits the object in two if
the hole cuts the whole object. Use this component, for example, in welded
profiles, slabs, or panels generated with a component.
Objects created
• Cuts
Use for
A hole is created when a point is picked.
Selection order
1. Select the part or object created by a component to be cut.
2. Click the middle mouse button.
3. Pick the position relative to the hole being generated.
See also
Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab (page 261)
Hole Generation (32): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the hole properties in the Hole
Generation (32) modeling tool.

Option Description
Define the hole dimensions and the
location of the picked point.
The selected Partcut option affects
which of these dimensions are
available.
To rotate the hole, define the rotation

angle.
Define the recess depth.
Partcut Select the hole type.

The options are:
• Rectangular creates a rectangular
hole using width and height.
• Circular creates a round hole
using height as a diameter.
• Profile creates a cut using the
selected profile.
Profile If you selected Profile as the hole
type, select a suitable profile from the
Profile Catalog.
Coordination system Select the coordination system.
The options are:
• Use global xy-plane creates the
hole according to the global
coordinate system.
• Use local creates the hole
according to the work plane.
If the part is sloped or skewed, the
Use local option is used
automatically.

Option Description
Cutpart name Define a name for the cut part.
Rotated Select whether the cut is rotated 90
degrees in the XY plane.
Polygon Hole Generation (33)

Polygon Hole Generation (33) creates a polygon-shaped hole in the object.
Use this component, for example, in welded profiles, slabs, or panels
generated with a component.
Objects created
• Cut
Use for
A polygon-shaped hole in
concrete slabs, created by
picking five points.
Selection order
To create a polygon-shaped hole:
1. Select the part or object (component) to be cut.
TIP You can cut other components, such as Modeling of floor bay (66)
with this component.
2. Click the middle mouse button to end selecting.

3. Pick the corner points of the polygon-shaped hole.
4. Click the middle mouse button to end picking.
Polygon Hole Generation (33): Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the cuts created by Polygon Hole
Generation (33).

Field Description
Cutting depth
1.6 Flooring
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete floors.
• Automatic seam recognition (30) (page 264)
• Seam Applicator (page 266)
• Modeling of floor bay (66) (page 268)
• Sloping slab drainage (page 277)
• Hollow Core Opening Tool (page 280)
• Hollow Core Lifting Loops (page 284)
• Floor Tool (page 288)
• Floor layout (page 292)
• Floor Layout CIP Filler (page 317)
Concrete Detailing 264 Flooring

Automatic seam recognition (30)
Automatic seam recognition (30) is used to add predefined custom seams
between parallel parts, such as slabs or wall elements. This tool is useful when
you add seams for warped floors.
Use for

Use to connect parts with predefined
custom seams.
Before you start

Create parallel parts, for example, concrete slabs or walls.
Create custom seam.
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Automatic seam recognition (30) dialog box to define the
Property Description
Seam name Enter the seam name, or use the
browse button (...) to locate the seam
in the Select component dialog box.
Seam property file Enter the name, or use the browse
button (...) to locate the name of the
seam attribute file (optional).
Seam direction Select to change the direction.
Seam input part order Select to reverse the main and
secondary part. You may need to
change the Seam up direction too.
Seam up direction Define the direction of the seam.

Re-calculate seam points for Use to re-calculate the seam points
for all parts or only for warped parts.
• All parts: use for fully or partially
warped decks or floors. This
option creates all seam points in
the same way, no matter, if the
slab is warped or not.
• Warped parts: use for wall panels
and other situations, where
warping is not used, or the All
parts option does not give desired
result.
Position of re-calculated points Control the location of the re-
calculated seam points. The options
in the list box are same as the circles
in the following image.
Selection order
2. Select secondary parts. Click the middle mouse button to create the
seams between the parts.
Seam Applicator
Seam Applicator creates a seam between two double tee slabs, or between a
double tee slab and a wall or a spandrel. The double tees can also be warped
and/or cambered. To be able to use Seam Applicator you need to have a
custom seam. The custom seam can be created in the model, or it can be
imported to the model.
Objects created
• Seams

Use for
Two double tee slabs with seams
Double tee slab and wall with seams
Before you start

Create a custom seam.
NOTE When you define the custom seam in Custom Component Wizard,
make sure that you select the Allow multiple instances of
connection between same parts checkbox on the Advanced tab.
Selection order
2. Select the secondary part.
One of the selected parts must be a double tee slab and the other part
can be a double tee slab, a wall, or a spandrel.
NOTE If the seam cannot be created between the selected parts for
some reason, a dummy beam is created instead. The beam
indicates that the seam creation did not succeed.

See also
Seam Applicator: Parameters tab (page 268)
Seam Applicator: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the seam in Seam
Applicator.
Option Description
Seam name Define the custom seam that connects the
parts by selecting it from the Applications
& components catalog.
Seam property file Select the attribute file for the custom
seam.
Seam direction Seam direction in relation to the main and
the secondary part.
Seam up direction Seam rotation.
Offset start point Seam start point offset from the edge of
the double tee slab start point.
Offset end point Seam end point offset from the edge of the
double tee slab end point.
Number of copies Number of seams.
Distance to first seam Distance between the double tee slab edge
and the first seam start point.
Spacing values Space between the seams.
Copy at equal distances Define whether seams are created at equal
(Ignore spacing values) distances.
If you select Yes, the values in Spacing
values field are ignored.
Modeling of floor bay (66)

Creates an area of concrete slabs between two support lines that you define,
for example, between two main frames. Support lines can be polylines or
sloped.
Parts created
Concrete slabs.

Where to use

Slab area created
between two support
lines.
Before you start

Create two support lines with two or more points.
Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Modeling of floor bay (66) dialog box to define the

Paramet The position of the slab. Defining slab position
ers (page 272)
Profiles The properties of slab Defining slab profile
profiles. properties (page 275)
Picking order
1. Pick points to define the first support line. To finish, middle-click away
from the last point picked.
2. Pick points to define the second support line. To finish, middle-click away
from the last point picked.
3. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slabs.
4. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slabs.
See also
Examples (page 270)

Examples
These examples show how to use the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.
Example 1:
1. Pick 2 points (1, 2) to define support line 1.
2. To finish, middle-click.
3. Pick 2 points to define support line 2.

5. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.

6. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.
Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.
Example 2:

5. Pick a point to indicate the origin of the slab.
6. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the slab.
Tekla Structures creates the floor bay.

Defining slab position
Use these options to define the position of the slab:
The position of the slab relative to the
origin line picked when creating the
slab.
The options are center of profile
(default) or center of seam.
Select the slab spacing and enter the
appropriate dimension. The options are
seam (default) or center to center.
If you select the seam option, the
bottom dimension is enabled. If you
select the center-to-center otion, the
upper dimension is enabled.
Slab offsets from support lines 1 and 2.
Vertical position of the slab.

The options are Top (default), Center
or Bottom.
Enter an optional offset value.
Projection type Defines how the slabs are spaced on a

sloping floor bay. See Defining
projection type (page 273).

Defining projection type
Use the Projection type field to define how to handle slab spacing or seams
on a sloping floor bay. The options are Global (default), Support line 1,
Support line 2, or Both support lines.
• Global: the centers of the slabs remain constant, seam spacing adjusts.
• Support line 1: Seam spacing on support line 1 does not adjust (effect
exaggerated here):
• Support line 2: Seam spacing on support line 2 does not adjust (effect
exaggerated here):

• Both support lines: Seam spacing is calculated at the average plane
position between both support lines
Along this line, center to center and seam width are

exactly as entered in the dialog box.
Support line 2
Plane between support lines 1 and 2
Support line 1
Defining slab profile properties

Use the options on the Profiles tab to define a default profile for all the slabs
in the floor.
Index list
Use the Index list to specify different profiles, seam width, and various cutting
options for specific slabs or seams. See also Adjustment type (page 276).
Input the values individually, or in a list:
Examples for slabs

If the origin point is the center of slab:

If the origin point is the center of seam:
Examples for seams

If the origin point is the center of slab:
If the origin point is the center of seam:
Adjustment type
Use to define the type of adjustment for the selected slab. The options are:
• Default – Use the default slab profile.
• Profile – Use the specific slab profile.
• Cut left side – Cut the left side of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses
the default slab profile.

• Cut right side – Cut the right side of the profile. If no profile is defined,
uses the default slab profile.
• Cut both sides – Cut both sides of the profile. If no profile is defined, uses
the default slab profile.
• Seam width – Adjust the seam width.
Profile/Seam width
Depending on which adjustment type option you choose, defines:
• The width of the default slab profile.
• The width of the specified profile.
• Seam width.
Sloping slab drainage

Sloping slab drainage creates a concrete slab topping and a drainage hole.
Objects created
• Drainage hole
Use for
Drainage holes with valley 1 and hip 2
created.
Limitations
Slab topping does not adapt to slab chamfers. You need to define the slab
chamfers and topping chamfers separately.
Before you start

Create or split the slabs so that there is one drainage point in each slab.

Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab).
2. Pick a point to create the drainage hole.
The drainage hole is created automatically when the point is picked.
Part
1 Drainage hole
See also
Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab (page 278)
Sloping slab drainage: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the type, dimensions and properties of the
drainage hole in Sloping slab drainage.
Drainage hole type
Option Description
A drainage hole is not created.

Option Description
A rectangular drainage hole is
created.
A round drainage hole is created.
Drainage hole dimensions
Option Description
Define the side dimensions of the
rectangular drainage hole.
Define the diameter of the round

drainage hole.
Drainage hole properties
Option Description
Define slab inclination by Select how the slab is inclined, by a
combination of slope (S) or slope
percentage (S%), and topping
thicknesses (d1, d2).
The Slope, d1, and d2 options are
available accordingly.
Slope Slope of the topping, for example,
0.01 (S) or 2 (S%).
d1 Thickness of the topping at the
drainage point or at the hole.
d2 Thickness of the topping at the edge
of the slab or at the hip.

Option Description
Create cast unit Select how the cast unit is created:
• Yes
Topping is part of the slab cast
unit.
• No
Each part of the topping forms a
cast unit.
• Topping
Topping is a separate cast unit.
Material Define the material of the topping by
selecting it from the material catalog.
Type Select whether a valley or a hip is
created. If you select Hip, you can
only pick slab corners.
Hollow Core Opening Tool

Hollow Core Opening Tool creates holes and recesses to hollow core slabs.
Hollow Core Opening Tool works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors
that are created with the Modeling of floor bay (66) modeling tool.
Objects created
• Holes and recesses
Use for
Hollow core slab with small and large
openings

Limitations
Hollow Core Opening Tool calculates the location for the openings based on
the given values and the slab profile data. If needed, you can use an external
configuration file in XML format to provide different rules for the openings and
the slab profile data.
You can define small and large openings. Small openings are placed in the
middle of the hollow cores so that no webs are broken. Large openings break
webs.
Before you start

Create a hollow core slab.
Selection order
2. Pick a position for the opening.
See also
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab (page 281)
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab (page 284)
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the properties of the openings and
recesses in the Hollow Core Opening Tool modeling tool.
Option Description
Select the shape of the openings and recesses.
• Square - in the middle of the slab
• Round - in the middle of the slab
• At one end of the slab
• At both ends of the slab

Option Description
Hollow positions If you select to add openings or recesses at

one end or at both ends of a slab, enter the
positions of the hollows that are cut.
The positions are numbered from left to right
at the start of the part. The part is viewed from
the top in the start-to-end direction. The
openings and recesses are created in the same
voids at the end of the part.
Size Define the size of the opening in longitudinal

and cross direction, or the diameter for a
round opening.
Opening width defines whether the opening is
small or large.
Opening Type Select the type of the opening.
Place exactly by point Select whether the opening is created exactly
to the picked position.
Centralize in zone Select how the center of an opening is
centered
• By hollow:
The opening is centered to the hollow core.

Option Description
• By web:
The opening is centered to the web.
Cut full width of hollow Select whether the opening is cut based on the
minimum width of hollows or the number of
hollows.
To use this option, center the opening By
hollow in the Centralize in zone option.
Rules file (XML) Select the external XML file where you have
defined the opening and slab profiles.
Cutpart name Define a name for the cut part.
Define the recess depth.
Define the alignment for the opening.

Option Description
Select whether the thick side part of the
opening is removed.
Hollow Core Opening Tool: Configuration file tab

Use an external .xml file to define the openings and the slab profiles in the
Hollow Core Opening Tool modeling tool.
Example
An example Zones.xml file is located in ..\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system.
Hollow Core Lifting Loops

Hollow Core Lifting Loops creates lifters for hollow core slabs. Hollow Core
Lifting Loops works with single hollow core slabs, or with floors that are
created with Modeling of floor bay (66) modeling tool.
Objects created
• Lifters

Use for
Hollow core slab with recesses, hollow
core fillings and lifting devices.
Limitations
You also need a lifting device. The lifting device can be created as a custom
part, or it can be imported to the model. Alternatively, you can use an external
configuration file in XML format to define the properties for the recess, the
lifting device and the slab.
Before you start

Create a hollow core slab and a lifting device.
Selection order
The recess and hollow core fillings are created.
See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab (page 285)
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab (page 287)
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab (page 287)
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab

Use the Basic settings tab to control the properties of the lifters and hollow
core fillings in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.
Configuration file
Option Description
Configuration file Select the external XML file where you have defined the
recess, the lifting device and the slab profile properties.

Option Description
Override Define whether the values on the Basic settings and
Lifting device settings tabs override the properties
defined in the external XML file.
Dimensions
Option Description
1 Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the
end of the slab.
2 Define the maximum distance from the lifter insertion point to the
end of the slab.
3 Define the minimum distance from the lifter insertion point to the
edge of an opening.
4 Define the minimum distance between two lifter insertion points.
5 Define the length of the hollow core filling.
6 Define the profile of the recess.
7 Define the depth of the recess.
Hollow core filling
Option Description
Use automatic fill Define whether the automatic hollow core filling
profile profile is used.
Profile Define the hollow core filling profile.
Prefix Prefix for the part position number.
Start Number Start number for the part position number.

Option Description
Name Define a name for the lifter.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and
reports.
Class Use Class to group the lifters.
For example, you can display lifters of different classes
in different colors.
See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab (page 287)
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Lifting device settings tab

Use the Lifting device settings tab to control the properties of the lifting
device in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.
Option Description
Lifter component Define the custom part that represents the actual lifting
device.
Saved properties Select which saved properties to use for the lifting
to use device custom part.
Lifter max load Define the maximum load for the lifting device.
Rotation Select the rotation of the lifting device custom part
around its axis.
Angle Define the rotation angle of the lifting device custom
part.
Up Direction Select the lifting device up direction in relation to the
local coordinate system.
Offset Define the offset of the lifting device in relation to the
local coordinate system in the corresponding
directions.
See also
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Basic settings tab (page 285)
Hollow Core Lifting Loops: Configuration file tab

Use an external XML file to define the lifting device, the lifter, and the slab
properties in the Hollow Core Lifting Loops modeling tool.

Example
Floor Tool
Floor Tool creates a floor bay with optional insulation.
Objects created
• Hollow core slabs
Use for
Floor bay with insulation
Selection order
Make sure that you have defined the slab properties.
1. Pick the contour points of the floor bay.
The floor bay is automatically created when you close the polygon.
NOTE The list of picked contour points on the Bay contour tab and the list
of slabs on the Slab list tab are created when the slabs are created.
See also
Floor Tool: Slab properties tab (page 289)
Floor Tool: Insulation tab (page 290)

Floor Tool: Bay contour tab (page 290)
Floor Tool: Slab list tab (page 291)
Floor Tool: Slab properties tab

Use the Slab properties tab to control the profile, material and location of the
hollow core slabs in the Floor Tool modeling tool.
Slab attributes
Option Description
Profile Define the profile by selecting it from the profile
catalog.
Name Define a name for the slab.
Material Define the material grade by selecting it from the
material catalog.
Prefix Define the part prefix.
Start number Define the start number for the cast unit.
Cut slab ends Define whether the slab ends are cut or not.
If you select Yes, define the minimum end angle
for the slabs.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the slab.
Vertical location Define the offset location in the vertical direction.
Offset Define the offset in the vertical direction.
Minimum end angle Define the minimum end angle for the slabs.
If the line to which the slab ends has a bigger
angle than the defined minimum end angle, the
part will be aligned to the line.
Additional attributes
Option Description
Exposure Class Define the exposure class for the hollow core
slab.
The exposure class will be saved as a user-
defined attribute.
Relative strength Define the relative strength of the hollow core
slab.
The relative strength will be saved as a user-
defined attribute.

Option Description
Fire rating Define the fire rating for the hollow core slab.
The fire rating will be saved as a user-defined
attribute.
User-defined attributes User-defined attributes are located in the
FloorTool.ini file.
Slab direction
Option Description
Slab direction Define the direction of the slab.
If you select Angle, you need to pick points in
the model to define the new direction. The
angle you have picked is shown in the Angle
field. You can also define the angle directly in
the field to rotate the slabs.
Note that picking two points does not change
the local +X direction.
Floor Tool: Insulation tab

Use the Insulation tab to control the insulation properties of the hollow core
slabs in the Floor Tool modeling tool.
First define whether to create insulation or not. Insulation is created

separately for each slab.
Insulation
Option Description
Name Define a name for the insulation.
Material Define a material grade by selecting it from
the material catalog.
Thickness Define the thickness of the insulation.
Offset at slab start/end Define the offset between the slab start/end
positions and the corresponding positions
in the insulation parts.
Left/Right offset Define the offset between the slab and the
insulation for the rightmost and leftmost
slab.

Floor Tool: Bay contour tab
Use the Bay contour tab to control the coordinates of the picked contour
points and the horizontal offset of the lines connecting the contour points in
the Floor Tool modeling tool. If the coordinates are not visible on the tab, click
the Get button.
You need to create the hollow core slabs before using the Bay contour tab.
Bay contour properties
Option Description
XY-constant Z Define the Z coordinate for all contour points at
the same specific height.
XYZ (sloping floor) Define the Z constant for each contour point
separately. The floor may be sloped.
Offset method Define the offset method.
Default end offset Define the default end offset.
Default side offset Define the default side offset.
Bay contour table

The table lists the contour points showing their X, Y, and Z coordinates. You
can modify the Z coordinate in the table only if you have selected XYZ (sloping
floor). You can modify the Horizontal offset on all rows of the table.
The table also shows the lines connecting the points. You can only modify the
Horizontal offset. Entering a positive value enlarges the slab area and
entering a negative value shrinks the slab area.
Floor Tool: Slab list tab

Use the Slab list tab to list all the hollow core slabs created in the Floor Tool
modeling tool. If the slab list is not visible on the tab, click the Get button.
Slab properties
Option Description
Slab number Shows the order of the hollow core slabs starting
from the first picked point.
Width Shows the width of a narrowed slab.
Narrowed from Define whether the slab is narrowed. The
options are:
• not narrowed (default)
• Right side
• Left side

Option Description
Type Define the slab type.
• Use Slab for normal hollow core slabs.
• Use PIP for a precast infill piece.
• Use GAP for an empty space between the
slabs. You do not need to define a profile
when you select this option.
• Use CIP to create a concrete part using the
width defined in the Width column. The
width range that you can use is defined in the
FloorTool.ini file.
The slabs listed in the FloorTool.ini file
can only have a width that is inside the
defined range. The slabs that are not listed
can have any width. The value you give is
rounded down to the nearest allowed value.
Profile Define the profile by selecting it from the profile
catalog.
You can Add and Delete slabs, and move them Up and Down in the list by
using the buttons on the left. To restore the default values, click Restore
defaults.
Floor layout
Floor Layout creates floors built of precast filigree and hollow core slabs. The
floors may contain several layers, such as precast slabs, insulation and a cast-
in-place topping. Floor Layout is most useful for non-rectangular floors that
contain one or more openings that split slabs into many pieces, and when slab
widths are not constant on the whole floor area. You can modify the floors
using direct modification.
Objects created
• Slabs
• Insulation
• Cast-in-place topping

Use for
Create floor structures that have
layers, for example, hollow core slabs
at the bottom, insulation as the
middle layer, and cast-in-place
topping.
Selection order
1. On the Concrete tab, click Slab --> Floor layout.
2. Pick the corner points of the floor.
You can pick the points at grid lines or the reference points of supporting
parts. You can change the offsets later.
The default slab direction is from the first (P1) point to the second (P2)
point. You can change this later if needed.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the floor.

Layer tab
Use the Layer tab to control the layer type, profile, and how the layer is
created in Floor Layout.
Layer list
Layers Description
The layer list shows the current layers of the floor. The
first layer in the list is the top layer and the last layer is
the bottom layer. In the example image on the left, the
FILIGREE layer is the top layer and the CIP layer is the
bottom layer.
Use the buttons to do the following:
•
Click to add a new layer.
•
Click to remove the selected layer.
•
Click to change the order of the layers by
moving the selected layer up or down in the list.
Layer properties
Select a layer in the layer list to define the layer properties.

Option Description
Layer name Enter a name for the layer. This is the layer name shown
in the layer list. The name is also shown in the direct
modification toolbar when you are modifying offsets .
This name is not visible in the model so you can enter
any suitable name.
Layer type Select the layer type. The Precast layer is the primary
layer and any insulation parts are added to precast units.
The parts created for a Cast in place layer are not added
to any other cast unit.
Create layer as Select how the layer parts are created: as beam parts,
custom parts, or a single part.
Layer When the layer parts are created as custom parts, you
component can select a component and the component attributes.
Component
attributes
Layer thickness When the layer parts are created as beam parts or as a
or profile single part, you can select the profile or thickness of the
layer parts.
With parametric profiles, you can replace the width of the
profile with the text [W]. When you do this, the beam is
never cut but the desired width is achieved by setting the
profile name based on the slab width.
For example, the profile could be BL80*[W].
Rotation Select the rotation of the layer parts.
Part name Define the name, class, material, part prefix and start
number of the layer parts. Define the pour phase for CIP
Class
layers.
Material
Pour phase
Part prefix, Start
no
Cast unit prefix,
Start no
General tab
Use the General tab to control the default part and gap width, depth position
of the layers, and the direction for lining up the slabs in Floor Layout.

Option Description
Default part Enter the default width for the slabs in the primary layer.
width
If you define the width of an individual slab in the slab
part properties, the Default part width value is not
used.
Default gap width Enter the default seam gap width in the primary layer.
If you define the width of an individual gap, the Default
gap width value is not used.
Depth position Select how the layers are positioned in relation to the
plane of input points.
Line up direction Select the direction for the slabs. By default, the width of
the last slab may differ from the width of the other slabs.

Customizing allowed slab width
You can customize the allowed slab widths in the FloorLayout.ini file. This
file can be located under the model folder or in any of the folders defined in
the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options.
The image below shows an example of the FloorLayout.ini file:
Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to control the minimum angles, and the width and
length of the slabs in Floor Layout.
Option Description
Minimum end Controls how the slab ends are modeled.
angle
When the angle of the floor edge is smaller than the
Minimum start minimum angle, you can select a suitable option from
angle the list to make the slab end straight.

Option Description
Minimum slab width. Slabs narrower than the minimum
width are not created.
Minimum slab length. Slabs shorter than the minimum

length are not created.
Minimum required width of a single neck on either side

of the slab when there is a large opening in the slab.
If either of the necks on the sides of the opening is
smaller than the defined neck width, the neck is cut off
completely. In addition, the total width of the necks must
be bigger than the minimum slab middle zone neck
width, otherwise the slab is split into two separate slabs
(the width of the actual opening is the same as the width
of the slab).
Minimum end nose width and length.
If there are noses on both sides of the slab, these two
end noses are checked separately and cut off if the width
of the single nose gets smaller than the given minimum
required nose width.
Default offsets
Use the Default offsets tab to set the default offsets for each layer. These
default offsets will be used whenever a specific value is not given for the edge.

Description
1 Default offset for the side offset.
Offset that is parallel to the bearing direction.
2 Default offset for the end offset.
All other offsets that are not side offsets.
3 Default offset for the break line.
The default value is 10. If the break line value is 0, the objects are
not split.
Detailing tab
Use the Detailing tab to select the components that are applied to all slabs in
the floor.
Option Description
Component Select a component that is applied to the slabs in the
name floor.
Component attr Select the settings that are used with the component you
file name have selected.
The list contains all the files that are available for the
selected component.
Adding a component to the component name list

The component name list is empty by default. You can add components to the
list:
1. Select Add new from the list.
The Detailing component data dialog box is displayed.

2. Enter a suitable name in the Name in dropdown box.
3. Click to open the Applications & components catalog.

4. Select a component and click OK.
The component name or number is added to the Component name box.
5. Click OK.
When you have added the needed components, the names of the components
are shown in the component name list as shown in the example image below.
Select a component from the list:
The list is stored in the \attributes folder under the model folder.
If you want to predefine the list to contain your favorite components in any
new models, you can copy the LayoutConfiguration.datx file from the

\attributes folder under the model folder to any of the folders defined in
the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM.
User defined tab

Use the User defined tab to set the user-defined attribute values for the slabs
in Floor Layout.
If you have defined the user-defined attributes in the part properties dialog
box and want to use those values, leave the User defined tab empty.
The content of the tab may vary depending on your environment, see below
how to customize the content.
Customizing the User defined tab

You can customize the content of the User defined tab using the
floorlayout.objects.inp file. Note that you cannot create new user-
defined attributes with the file. The user-defined attributes on the tab are
existing user-defined attributes that have been defined in the objects.inp
file. The floorlayout.objects.inp file has the same format as the
objects.inp file.
The floorlayout.objects.inp file can be located in any of the folders set
in the XS_FIRM, XS_PROJECT or XS_SYSTEM advanced options. The file is
never read from the model folder.
Below is an example of the floorlayout.objects.inp file:

Modifying a floor
You can use direct modification to modify the floor. Before you start, ensure
that the Direct modification switch is active. Select the floor to display
the direct modification toolbar.
To modify the floor, select the appropriate command from the toolbar.
Button Description
Add a polygonal opening.
Add a rectangular opening.
Add a break line to split the slab into two slabs.

Button Description
Modify the openings or exterior boundary of the floor. This
command is active by default.
Make the floor warped by offsetting one or more vertices of the
exterior boundary polygon from the plane.
Modify the offsets at floor boundaries
Modify the layout of the floor:

• Modify the width or profile of any of the slabs in the floor.
• Modify the side of the cut when the slab is cut to a smaller
width.
• Modify the gaps between the slabs.
• Modify the direction of the slabs.
• Modify the order of slabs when the slabs do not the have the
same width or profiles.
Add or modify the detailing components that are applied only to
certain slabs in the floor layout. The detailing components are listed
on the Detailing tab.
You can apply the same detailing component settings to all slabs in
the floor layout using the floor layout attributes.
Known limitations
Floor layout is not designed to work with floors where the layout is not in one
plane. Egdes can be offset from the plane only to warp the floor, not to make
floors that have several planes.
The image below shows an example where Floor layout has been used to
create several planes. If precast slabs are used in this way, the outcome is not
correct. Use multiple Floor layout components to create precast floors with
several planes.
Adding a polygonal opening
1. Click .
2. Pick the corner points of the opening.

You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of
supporting parts. You can change the offsets later.
Adding a rectangular opening
1. Click .
2. Pick the corner points of the opening.

You can pick the points at grid lines or you can pick the reference points of
supporting parts. You can change the offsets later.
Adding a break line to split the slab into two slabs
1. Click .
2. Pick the end points of the break line.

Modifying the openings and exterior boundary of the floor
1. The button is active by default.

The handles are shown for the exterior boundary and for all openings in
the floor.
2. Do any of the following:
• To move an edge, drag any of the edge lines. Hold down the left mouse
button when dragging.

• To move a corner point, drag the handle in the corner.
• To add new points to the edge, drag the handle in the middle of the
edge.

• To delete any of the points, select the handle in the corner and press
the Delete key.
• To make the floor warped, offset the vertices of the exterior boundary
so that all vertices are not in the same plane.
Drag a handle normally to move the vertices in the original floor plane.
Hold down the Alt key while dragging to move the vertex
perpendicular to the floor plane.

Hold down the Alt and Shift keys to move the vertex both in the plane
and off from the plane by snapping to any point in the model.
Modifying the offset at floor boundaries
1. Click .
The handles for modifying the offset are shown. If there are offsets, the
offset dimensions are also shown.
2. To adjust the offset, do one of the following:
• Drag the edge offset lines.

• Select one or more offset lines by holding down the Shift key.
When you have the offset lines selected, right-click on any of the
selected lines. Enter the offset value to the toolbar that is displayed
and click .
Note that when you use the offset command, the direct modification toolbar
shows the floor layout layers. Each layer may have different offsets. You can
select which layers to modify. The simplest way is to select all layers and have
the offsets equal in each layer.

Modifying the layout of the floor
1. Click .
The following direct modification elements are shown:
2. To modify the layout of the floor, do any of the following:

• To modify slab width, do one of the following:
• To move all seams, select one seam and start dragging.
• To add a new seam, select a seam, hold down the Ctrl key and start
dragging. When you stop dragging and release the mouse key, a
new seam is added to that location.
• To make one slab smaller, select a seam, hold down the Alt key and
start dragging. The slab on the left or right side is made smaller and
all slabs on the other side will move with the seam.
• To modify the profile, width, and cut side of a slab, right-click the slab
handle.
When the profile of the slab is fixed (not parametric), the slab is cut on
either side when the width is smaller than the original width. The

Default cut side is leading edge for the first slab and trailing edge for
all others in relation to the layout direction.
You can modify the properties of multiple slabs at the same time by
holding down the Shift key when selecting slabs.
• To modify the gap width between the slabs, do one of the following:
• Drag the end of the gap dimension.
• Right-click a seam line handle, enter the width and click .
You can modify multiple gaps at same time by holding down the
Shift key when selecting seam line handles.
• To move a slab or change the order of slabs, drag the slab handles.

• To change the direction of slabs, drag the slab direction handle.

• To remove a slab from the layout, select the slab handles and press the
Delete key.
Adding and modifying detailing components
1. Click to open the detailing toolbar.
2. Do any of the following to add, remove or modify the detailing strips that
control how and to which slabs the detailing components are added in the
floor:
Button/ Description
Option
Add a new detailing strip. Pick the start and end points for the
strip.
In practice, the selected detailing component will be added into
the slabs that the strip touches, see the example image below.
You can also add new detailing strips by dragging an existing
strip and holding down the Ctrl key.
Delete a detailing strip. Select the strip that you want to delete.
You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key.

Button/ Description
Option
Componen Select the actual detailing component from the Component
t name name list.
The content of the list may vary depending on your
environment.
You can also add new components to the list by selecting the
Add new option. Note that you can only add detailing
components that use one input part.
Componen Select the detailing component attributes that are used for the
t attribute slab.
file name
Note that the content of the list varies depending on the
component that you have selected.
Modify the detailing component and/or attribute file of the

detailing strip.
Select the detailing strip and select the component name
and/or attribute file from the list. Click the button to modify the
selected detailing strips.
You can select multiple strips by holding down the Shift key.
Close the detailing toolbar to continue the other modifications
of the floor layout.
Note that the detailing toolbar is also closed when you select
any other modification tool in the Floor Layout direct
modification toolbar.
The image below shows an example of a floor layout containing three detailing
strips.

Floor Layout CIP Filler
Floor Layout CIP Filler creates CIP filler parts into the empty areas in floors
created with Floor layout. The empty areas are spaces created by offsets

around the exterior and interior boundaries. There may also be empty areas
when the slab is too narrow to be created with Floor layout.
Floor Layout CIP filler properties
Option Description
Minimum width Minimum width of the part.
If the empty space is smaller than this width, the part is
not created in this location.
Cast unit prefix, Cast unit prefix of the CIP filler part
Start no
Cast unit start number of the CIP filler part
Name, Class, Define the name, class, material, finish and pour phase of
Material, Finish, the CIP filler parts.
Pour phase
1.7 Concrete stairs

Tekla Structures includes the following tools you can use to create concrete
stairs and stairwells:
• Concrete stairs (65) (page 319)
Concrete Detailing 318 Concrete stairs

• Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) (page 334)
• Reinforced concrete stair (95) (page 338)
Concrete stairs (65)

Concrete stairs (65) creates precast stairs with optional landings, ridges,
stringers, and anti-skid and kick plate profiles. It contains five different step
shapes and options to create round or chamfered step edges.
Objects created
• Stairs
• Landings
• Ridges
• Stringers
• Anti-skid
• Kick plate
Use for
Staircase with
• square step shape
• stringers on both sides
• top and bottom landings
Staircase with
• chamfered step corners
• ridges on both sides

Staircase with
• rounded step corners
• anti-skid profile
• bottom landing
Staircase with
• square step shape
• rounded step corners
• ridges on both sides
• anti-skid and kick plate profiles
Selection order
Selection order depends on the selected Creation method option on the
Stairs tab.
When Creation method is set to Default:
1. Pick the first point to indicate the start point of stairs.
2. Pick the second point to indicate the direction of stairs.
The stairs are created automatically.

Part
1 Landings
2 Stringers
3 Ridges
4 Kick plates
5 Steps
6 Anti-skids
See also
Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab (page 321)
Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab (page 324)
Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab (page 326)
Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab (page 327)
Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab (page 330)
Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab (page 332)
Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab (page 333)
Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab (page 334)
Concrete stairs (65): Stairs tab

Use the Stairs tab to define how the stairs are created and what are the
dimensions of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65).

Creation method
Option Description
Creation method Select the creation method of the
stairs. Creation method defines how
many and which points you need to
pick when you create the stairs.
• Default
Number of steps is calculated
automatically using the vertical
distance between the two input
points.
• One point - N & L & H: define N, L,
and H (number, length, and height
of the steps).
• Two points - N & L: define N and
L.
Height of the steps is calculated
points.
• Two points - N & H: define N and
H.
Length of the steps is calculated
automatically using the horizontal
points.
• Two points - L & H: define L and
H.
Number of steps is calculated
points.
• Two points - N: define N.
Height and length of steps is
calculated automatically using the
horizontal and vertical distance
between the two input points. You
can define the length of the top
step.
No of steps, N Define the number of steps, if the
Two points - L & H option is not
selected.

Option Description
Position Define the horizontal position of the
staircase, relative to the line joining
the picked points.
Distance Enter a distance to move the stairs in
the horizontal direction from the line
joining the picked points. The selected
Position option has an effect on this
dimension.
Rotation Define the angle between the line
joining the steps and the line joining
the selected points.
Cast unit type Select the cast unit type:

• Precast
• Cast in place
Stair dimensions

Description
1 Height of the step.
2 Length of the step.
3 Length of the top step.
4 Height of the top step.
5 Width of the top corbel.
6 Slope from the corbel to the underside of the stairs.
7 Thickness of the slab.
8 Chamfering for the underside of stairs.
9 Chamfer or radius values.
10
11 Height of the bottom step.
12 Height of the stair foot.
13 Chamfering for the bottom of stairs.
14 Slope from the foot nose to the foot base.
15 Length of the bottom cut.
16 Length of the stair foot.
17 Width of the staircase, including stringers.
Create foot
Define whether a foot is created at the bottom of the stairs.
Concrete stairs (65): Step shapes tab

Use the Step shapes tab to define the shape of steps in Concrete stairs (65).
All other steps/Last step at foot

Select the step shape. You can define the shape of the last step at the bottom
if you set Last step same as other step to No.
Option Description
Default
Beveled
From the list below the step shape
options, select whether you want to
enter a dimension or an angle.

Option Description
Straight step
Top straight, bottom beveled

Enter two dimensions.
Top beveled, bottom straight

Enter the vertical dimension and then
select whether you want to enter an
angle or a horizontal dimension.
Top and bottom staight

Enter vertical dimensions and then
select whether you want to enter an
angle or a horizontal dimension.
out
Select the shape of the step front edge and enter the required dimensions.
• Default

• Radius: Creates rounded edge.
• Chamfer: Creates chamfered edge.

• No: Creates square edge.
in
Select the shape of the step inner corner and enter the required dimensions.
• Default
• Radius: Creates rounded inner corner.
• Chamfer: Creates chamfered inner corner.

• No: Creates square inner corner.
Concrete stairs (65): Landings tab

Use the Landings tab to create top and/or bottom landings in Concrete stairs
(65).
Create landings
Define whether one or two landings are created, or whether there are no
landings.

Landing dimensions and extensions
Description
1 Thickness of the bottom landing.
2 Length of the bottom landing.
3 Length of the top landing.
4 Thickness of the top landing.
5 Left and right extensions of the bottom landing.
7
6 Left and right extensions of the top landing.
8
Concrete stairs (65): Ridges tab

Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or
only on the other side of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65).

Dimensions
Description
1 Thickness of the vertical ridge.
2 Width of the vertical ridge.
3 Width of the horizontal ridge.
4 Thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.
Horizontal ridges
Part Description
Create Define whether horizontal ridges are
created.

Part Description
Create at foot Define whether horizontal ridges are
created at the foot of the stairs.
This option works in the same way as
the Create option.
Inside chamfer Select the type of the inside chamfer

and enter the required dimensions.
1
Corner chamfer Select the type of the corner chamfer
2
Slope Set the slope as an angle or a
dimension. The slope makes the ridge
3
inclined.
Foot corner chamfer Define whether corner chamfers are
created at the stair foot.
Top and foot ridges

Define the horizontal ridge length at the stair top step and at the stair foot.
When no foot is created, vertical ridges continue to the bottom level of the
stairs.

Vertical ridges
Part Description
Create Define whether vertical ridges are
created.
Slope Set the slope as an angle or a

dimension. The slope makes the ridge
inclined.
Concrete stairs (65): Stringers tab

Use the Stringers tab to create stringers and ridges on the left, right, or both
sides of the stairs in Concrete stairs (65).
Parts
Part Description
Create stringers Define whether stringers are created.
Create top ridge Select an option to create top ridges.
Create bottom ridge Select an option to create bottom

ridges.

Part Description
Slope Use to incline the inner surface of the
stringers.
You can define the slope using an

angle or a dimension.
Inside chamfer Define whether the inside edge of
stringer is chamfered or not.
Outside chamfer Define whether the outside edge of
stringer is chamfered or not.
Stringer height Define how the stringer height is
determined.
Dimensions
Description
1 Height of the stringer bottom ridge.
2 Horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the bottom step.
3 Height of the stringer top ridge.

Description
4 Width of the stringer.
5 Difference in height that is the perpendicular distance between the step
edge and stringer edge.
You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Diff in height.
6 Total height of the stringer.
You can enter this dimension if Stringer height is Default or Total
height.
Concrete stairs (65): Anti-skid/Kick plate tab

Use the Anti-skid and Kick plate tabs to create slip resistant surfaces in
Concrete stairs (65).
Parts
Part Description
Creation anti-skid Define whether anti-skids or kick
plates are created.
Creation kick plate
Create anti-skid on foot Define whether anti-skids are created
at the stair foot.
Create cutout Define whether you want to create
cutouts with the anti-skid profile.
By default, the cutouts are not
created.
Include in cast unit Define whether anti-skids or kick
plates are included in cast unit.
Profile Define the anti-skid or kick plate
profile by selecting it from the profile
catalog.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the anti-
skid or kick plate profile.

Anti-skid/kick plate position
Description
1 Anti-skid or kick plate distance from the left edge of the step.
2 Anti-skid or kick plate distance from the right edge of the step.
Description
1 Distance from the step front edge.
2 Depth for the anti-skid or kick plate.
Concrete stairs (65): Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the properties of different stair parts in

Part attributes

Pos_No Prefix and start number The default part start number
for the part position is defined in the Components
number. settings in File menu -->
Settings --> Options.
Some components have a
second row of fields
assembly position
number.
Material Material grade. The default material is defined
in the Part material box in the
Components settings in File
menu --> Settings --> Options.
Concrete stairs (65): UDA tab

Use the UDA tab to provide additional information about the parts created in
TIP The user-defined attributes are case sensitive. Check the correct spelling
of an attribute from the objects.inp file.
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90)

Creates a rectangular stairwell or elevator shaft to represent the structure in
the design stage. When you detail the structure, you can apply seams,
connections, and reinforcement to complete the details of a stairwell or
elevator shaft. This component uses the Concrete stairs (65) (page 319)
component for creating stairs.
Parts created
• Wall panels
• Landings (optional)
• Flights of stairs (optional)
• Roof slab (optional)
• Openings (optional)

Where to use

A stairwell over four floors created
using the default options.
As shown, the points picked and the
dimensions on the Stairs and
landings tab determine the length of
the stairwell.
Walls consist of one or more precast
concrete panels.
1 First point picked
2 Second point picked
Stairwells always contain a first floor

and a top floor. Indicate the number
of additional floors on the Plan view
tab, Levels field. This stairwell has 2
additional floors, for a total of 4
floors.
1 Top floor
2 Additional floor
3 Additional floor
4 1st or ground floor
Elevator shaft created by selecting the

Elevator shaft option on the Stairs
and landings tab, Type field, for all
floors.
Limitations
The minimum floor height between floors is 200 mm.

Defining properties
Use the tabs in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box to define

Plan view Number of floors or Stairwells and elevator
levels. shafts (90): Defining
stairwell properties
Position of picked
(page 336)
points.
Length and width of
shaft.
Wall panel dimensions.
Openings Opening dimensions for Each wall may have a
each wall panel and for single opening, or no
the first, additional, and opening.
top floors.
Stairs and landings Stair and landing options
and dimensions.
Option to create elevator
shaft (in the Type list
boxes).
Attributes Basic part properties for Part properties
walls, stairs, and
landings.
Option to use the saved
properties from the
Concrete stairs (65)
(page 319) component
for the first, additional,
and top stairs.
Picking order
1. On the Plan view tab, check the Position option. The default is in the
middle of walls 3 and 4.
2. Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 3.

3. Pick a point to indicate the position of wall 4.

Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining stairwell properties
Use the Plan view tab in the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) dialog box
to define the properties of the stairwell or elevator shaft.
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining number of floors and

height
To define the number of levels and floor heights, enter a height for each floor
level in the Levels field, for example:
You can also define negative floor levels, for example:
You can also use multiplier to define many floors, as in the following US
imperial example:
Tekla Structures also uses these values to calculate the total height of the
stairwell.
Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining position

To create the stairwell or elevator shaft, you pick two points in the model. Use
the Position field to define the location of the stairwell or elevator shaft
relative to these points. The options are:
• Middle (default)
• Left
• Right
Enter the offset distance from the selected position. Here, the offset is from
the middle of wall.

Stairwells and elevator shafts (90): Defining length and width
To manually define the total length and total width of the stairwell or elevator
shaft, enter the following values:
L - total length
W - total width
Leave both fields blank to have Tekla Structures automatically calculate these
dimensions from the the points picked:
Description
1 First point picked.
2 Second point picked.
3 Total width, W
4 Total length, L
NOTE The dimensions defined on the Stairs and landings tab may override the
total length or width that is automatically calculated or that you manually
enter.
Reinforced concrete stair (95)

Reinforced Concrete Stair (95) creates reinforced concrete stairs.
Objects created
• Stairs
• Landings (optional)
• Ridges (optional)
• Stringers (optional)
• Anti-skid (optional)
• Main bars and stirrups of stair reinforcement (Bar A - Bar L tabs) (optional)
• Meshes in stairs and landings (optional)

• Mesh bars (optional)
• Anchor bars (optional)
• Landing end bars (optional)
Use for
Reinforced concrete
stairs.
Reinforced concrete stairs

with chamfered steps,
ridges and stringers.
Reinforced concrete stairs

with reinforced landings.
Selection order
1. Pick the first point to indicate the start point of the stairs.

2. Pick the second point to indicate the direction of the stairs.
3. Select any number of parts to be cut by the stairs (optional).
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the stairs.
Parameters tab
Use the Parameters tab to control the shape of the stairs, number of steps,
stair creation method and the stairs width.
Stair dimensions
Description
1 Horizontal dimension of the
steps area
2 Vertical dimension of the steps
area
3 Step length
4 Step height
5 Shape options for stair bottom
6 Shape options for stair top

Description
7 Stair width
Stair creation method
Option Description
P1 P2 step length Create stairs between points P1 and P2.
Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1
and P2 and step length.
P1 P2 step height Create stairs between points P1 and P2.
Stair dimension are defined by the distance between P1
and P2 and step height.
P1 step length Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
step height N
Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and step height,
steps
length and number of steps.
P2 step length Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
step height N
Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and step height,
steps
length and number of steps.
P1 horizontal and Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
vertical step
Stair dimensions are defined by P1 and horizontal and
distance
vertical step distance.
P2 horizontal and Create stairs from point P1 to point P2.
vertical step
Stair dimensions are defined by P2 and horizontal and
distance
vertical step distance.
Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the material, name, class, positioning, cast unit
type and step chamfering.
Step chamfer settings
Option Description
Middle for all All steps are chamfered according to the Middle
steps settings.
Bottom different Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step
at bottom settings.
All other steps are chamfered according to the
Middle steps settings.

Option Description
Top different Top step is chamfered according to the Last top
step settings.
All other steps are chamfered according to the
Middle steps settings.
Bottom and top Bottom step is chamfered according to the 1st step
different at bottom settings.
Top step chamfered are according to the Last top
step settings. All other steps are chamfered
according to the Middle steps settings.
Step chamfer settings are set in the same way for 1st step at bottom, Middle
steps and Last top step.
Option Description
Size of step cut is defined by the distance.
Size of step cut is defined by the angle.
Corner chamfer types

Corner chamfers 1. and 2. can be defined by the Radius x or by the sides of
the Chamfer x, y.
Stairs and landings tab

Use the Stairs and landings tab to control the size and type of the bottom
landing and the top landing.

Bottom landing cut option
Option Description
Bottom landing with no cut.
Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and

distance from the top side of landing.
Bottom landing with cut defined by its length and

distance from the bottom side of landing.
Bottom landing with L shape cut defined by its three

dimensions and distance from the top side of
landing.
Bottom landing cut defined by a profile and its

position in landing.
Top landing cut option
Option Description
Top landing with no cut.
Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance

from the top side of landing.
Top landing with cut defined by its length and distance

from the bottom side of landing.

Option Description
Top landing with L shape cut defined by its three
dimensions and distance from the top side of landing.
Top landing cut defined by a profile and its position in

landing.
Landing dimensioning
Description
Use the top view setting to define the dimensions
of the bottom landing and the top landing.
Ridges tab
Use the Ridges tab to create horizontal and/or vertical ridges on both sides or
only on one side of the stairs.
Dimensions
Description
1 Thickness of the vertical ridge.
2 Width of the vertical ridge.
3 Width of the horizontal ridge.
4 Thickness/height of the horizontal ridge.

Horizontal ridges
Option Description
Create Define whether horizontal ridges are created.
Create at foot Define whether horizontal ridges are created at the foot
of the stairs.
This option works in the same way as the Create option.
Chamfering 1 Inside chamfer: Select the type of the inside chamfer
2 Corner chamfer: Select the type of the corner chamfer
3 Slope: Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The
slope makes the ridge inclined.
Foot corner Define whether corner chamfers are created at the stair
chamfer foot.

Vertical ridges
Option Description
Create Define whether vertical ridges are created.
Slope Set the slope as an angle or a dimension. The slope

makes the ridge inclined.
Stringers tab
Use the Stringers tab to create the stringers and ridges on the left, right, or
both sides of the stairs.

Description
1 Height of the stringer bottom ridge.
2 Horizontal offset of the bottom ridge from the
bottom step.
3 Height of the stringer top ridge.
4 Width of the stringer.
Slope Use to incline the inner surface of the

stringers.
You can define the slope using an angle or a

dimension.
Inside chamfer Define whether the inside edge of stringer is
chamfered or not.
Outside chamfer Define whether the outside edge of stringer is
chamfered or not.
Stringer height
Stringer height based on the total height or distance from inner/outer step
corner.
Anti-skid tab
Use the Anti-skid tab to create slip resistant surfaces.

Option Description
Creation anti-skid Define whether anti-skids are created.
Create anti-skid Define whether anti-skids are created at the stair foot/
on foot/top top.
Create cutout Define whether you want to create cutouts with the
anti-skid profile. By default, the cutouts are not created.
Include in cast Define whether anti-skids are included in the cast unit.
unit
Profile Define the anti-skid profile by selecting it from the
profile catalog.
Rotation Select an option to rotate the anti-skid profile.
Bar A tab
Use the Bar A tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group.
Option Description
Geometry and concrete cover thickness.
Spacing, number of bars and concrete cover

thickness of the reinforcing bar group.
Bar B tab
Use the Bar B tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing

Bar B bottom ending options
Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B bottom ending.
Option Description
Bar B simple bottom ending.
Bar B bottom ending bent once to fit the

bottom footing of the stairs.
Bar B bottom ending bent twice to fit the

bottom footing of the stairs.
Bar B bottom ending bent up to three times

to fit the bottom footing of the stairs.
Bar B top ending options

Define geometry and concrete cover thickness of the bar B top ending.
Option Description
Bar B simple top ending.

Option Description
Bar B top ending bent once to fit the top
geometry of the stairs.
Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top

geometry of the stairs. Last leg length is
defined by the cover thickness.
Bar B top ending bent twice to fit the top

geometry of the stairs.
Reinforcing bar spacing
Option Description
Spacing, number of bars and concrete
cover thickness of the reinforcing bar
group.
Bar C tab
Use the Bar C tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing

Option Description

Extra I bars
Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents the
extra I bars.
Define whether to create the extra I bars. Select

the check boxes next to the purple points.
Cover thickness of the reinforcing bars.
Bar D tab
Use the Bar D tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
reinforcing bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar
group.

Option Description

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar D. You can create up to four extra I
bars.
Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box represents
the extra I bars.
Define whether to create the extra I bars.

Select the check boxes next to the purple
points.

Bar E tab
Use the Bar E tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
Create options
Option Description
No Bar is not created.
Stirrup Bar is created as stirrup.
Pin Bar is created as pin.

Option Description
Option Description

Bar F tab
Use the Bar F tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group

Option Description

Bar G tab
Use the Bar G tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
group.

Option Description

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar G. You can create up to four extra I
bars.
Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box
represents the extra I bars.
Define whether to create extra I bars.

points.
Bar H tab
Use the Bar H tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
group.

Create option
Option Description
• Do not create bar H
• Create bar H
• Create only bottom bar H reinforcing bar
group
Bar H geometry option
Option Description
Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define
geometry and concrete cover thickness.
Top reinforcing bar group is straight, bottom

reinforcing bar group is bent on both sides.
Define geometry and concrete cover
thickness.
Two bent reinforcing bar groups. Define

geometry and concrete cover thickness.
Bar I tab
Use the Bar I tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing

Option Description
Positioning, spacing and concrete cover
thickness.
Concrete cover thickness of the reinforcing

bar groups.
Bar J tab
Use the Bar J tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
bar spacing and reinforcing bar properties of a stair reinforcing bar group. You
can create several bar J reinforcing bar groups. Each group has its own color
representation on the Bar J tab.
Color group options
Option Description
Use the color group option to define which
combination of bar J reinforcing bar groups
(blue, green, brown) is created.

Option Description
Positioning and concrete cover thickness for
reinforcing bar groups based on the color
representation.
Concrete cover thickness for all reinforcing bar

groups.
Bar K tab
Use the Bar K tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
Option Description

Extra I bars
Extra I bars are straight bars crossing bar K. You can create up to three extra I
bars.

Option Description
The purple color in the dialog box
represents the extra I bars.
Define whether to create extra I bars
by selecting the check boxes next to
the purple points.
Cover thickness of the reinforcing

bars.
Bar L tab
Use the Bar L tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing
Option Description
Define whether an L shaped reinforcing bar group
is created at the stair footing.
Define offsets for the reinforcing bar groups in the

two top steps.
Define geometry for reinforcing bar groups in all

steps, except for the two top steps.


Bar L geometry options
Option Description
L shape reinforcing bar groups.
L shape reinforcing bar groups with hooks.
Mesh picture tab

Use the Mesh picture tab to define bottom landing meshes, stair meshes and
top landing meshes.
Side view
Description
1 Bottom landing mesh (top).
Define offsets and cover thickness
of the mesh.
2 Bottom landing mesh (bottom).
of the mesh.
3 Stair mesh (top). Define offsets
and cover thickness of the mesh.
4 Stair mesh (bottom). Define
offsets and cover thickness of the
mesh.
5 Top landing mesh (top). Define
offsets and cover thickness of the
mesh.
6 Top landing mesh (bottom).
of the mesh.

Top view
Description
1 Cover thickness of bottom landing
mesh (top).
2 Cover thickness of bottom landing
mesh (bottom).
3 Cover thickness of stair mesh (top).
4 Cover thickness of stair mesh (bottom).
5 Cover thickness of top landing mesh
(top).
6 Cover thickness of top landing mesh
(bottom).
Mesh attributes tab

Use the Mesh attributes tab with the Mesh picture tab to define the
properties, positioning and creation type of bottom landing meshes, stair
meshes and top landing meshes.
Cross bar location
Description
Cross bar above.
Cross bar below.

Creation type
Description
Create mesh as reinforcement mesh.
Create mesh as two independent reinforcing

groups.
Mesh bars tab

Use the Mesh bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the mesh bars in the
top and bottom landing. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.
Description
1 Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar
groups in the stair bottom landing.
Use the color representation in the
dialog box.
2 Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh
bar groups in the stair bottom landing.
dialog box.
3 Cover thicknesses of all mesh bar
groups in the stair top landing.
dialog box.
4 Vertical cover thicknesses of all mesh
bar groups in the stair top landing.
dialog box.
Bottom anchor bars tab

Use the Bottom anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover
thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the
bottom anchor bars. You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.
Creation type
Option Description
No No reinforcing bar group created.
Type1 L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.

Option Description
Type2 Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.
Top anchor bars tab

Use the Top anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the top anchor bars.
You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.
Creation type
Option Description
No No reinforcing bar group created.
Type1 L shape anchor reinforcing bar group.
Type2 Simple straight anchor reinforcing bar group.

Option Description
Z anchor bars tab

Use the Z anchor bars tab to define the geometry, concrete cover thickness,
reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties of the Z anchor bars.
You can create up to three reinforcing bar groups.
Description
1 Cover thicknesses of all Z
anchor bar groups in the
stair bottom landing.
Use the color
representation in the
dialog box.
2 Vertical cover thicknesses
of all Z anchor bar groups
in the stair main part.
Use the color
dialog box.
3 Cover thicknesses of all Z
anchor bar groups in the
stair top landing.
Use the color
dialog box.
Bot Length of the Z anchor
L bars that extend from the
stair bottom landing.
Top Length of the Z anchor
L bars that extend from the
stair top landing.

Landing end bars tab
Use the Landing end bars tab to reinforce the stair landings and to define the
geometry, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and bar
properties of the landing end bars.
Bottom end
Reinforcement of bottom landing.
Description
1 Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows
the shape of the landing based on the
defined cover thicknesses.
Color representation in the picture: blue,
green.
2 Define whether to create extra cross bars.
points.
Select the check boxes next to the red
points.
Top end
Reinforcement of top landing.
Description
1 Landing end bars. U-shape geometry follows
the shape of the landing based on defined
cover thicknesses.
Color representation in the picture: blue,
green.
Select the check boxes next to purple points.
Select the check boxes next to red points.
Side cover thickness
Option Description
Side cover thickness of all reinforcing bar groups
defined on the Landing end bars tab.

UDA tab
Use the UDA tab to define user-defined attributes for the stairs. You can
define multiple UDAs. UDAs can be used as filters, and they can be displayed
in drawings and reports.
Configuration tab
Use the Configuration tab to define the default cover thicknesses and
bending radiuses of all reinforcing bars created by Reinforced Concrete Stair
(95).
Cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C

Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups A - C.
Option Description
Value Default cover thickness defined by a value.
Rebar diameter Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing
bar diameter.
General cover thickness bars D - L

Define the default cover thickness for reinforcing bar groups D - L and all
reinforcing bars except the reinforcing bar groups A - C and meshes.
Option Description
Value Default cover thickness defined by a value.
Rebar diameter Default cover thickness multiplied by reinforcing
bar diameter.
Bending radius
Define the default bending radius of all reinforcing bars.
Option Description
Rebar_database.inp Default bending radius defined by
rebar_database.inp file.
Relative to diameter Default bending radius according to the
reinforcing bar diameter.
Bending radius Default bending radius defined by value.
Mesh cover thickness

Define the default cover thickness for the meshes created by Reinforced
Concrete Stair (95).
Concrete Detailing 367 Foundations

1.8 Foundations
This section introduces components that can be used in concrete foundations.
• Precast foundation block (1028) (page 368)
• Concrete foundation (1030) (page 373)
Precast foundation block (1028)

Precast foundation block (1028) creates a concrete foundation block. The
block can be divided in three sections. All three sections can be dimensioned
separately.
Parts created
• Foundation block
• Embed
• Regulator
Use for
Precast foundation block with three
sections.

Precast foundation block with one
section.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete column).
2. Pick a position.
The detail is created automatically.
See also
Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab (page 369)
Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab (page 372)
Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab (page 372)
Precast foundation block (1028): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to dimension the foundation block in Precast foundation
block (1028).

The foundation block can be dimensioned in both the front view and in the
side view.
Description
1 Width of the top chord in section 1 (in front view).
2 Width of the inclined column cut-out.
3 Height of the column cut-out.
4 Offset of the plate that is under the block.
The offset is relative to the foundation block.
5 Thickness of the plate under the block.
6 Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in front view).
Width of section 2 and section 3 (in front view).
7 Distance between the foundation block and the sides of the column.
8 Select how the sections in the foundation block are connected.
9 Select the reference point of the Component
foundation block. insertion point is
at the bottom side
of the foundation
block.

Description
Additionally, you can set the Note that the red
vertical offset: part (additional
plate under the
block) is not taken
into account.
Component
insertion point is
at the bottom side
of the cut-out of
the column.
Component
insertion point is
at the bottom side
of the column.
Component
insertion point is
at the top of the
foundation block.
10 Width of the top chord in section 1 (in side view).

11 Distance from the bottom of the column to the foundation block.
12 Width of the bottom chord in section 1 (in side view).
Width of section 2 and section 3 (in side view).

Precast foundation block (1028): Parts tab
Use the Parts to define the profiles for the foundation block, embed and
regulator, and the embed dimensions in Precast foundation block (1028).
Opti Description
on
1 Foundation block profiles, regulator and embed properties.
If you do not select any material, Precast foundation block (1028)
uses the same material as the column.
2 Select whether the regulator and the embed is created, and how they
are connected to the foundation block.
3 Dimensions of the three sections of the foundation block.
Additionally, you can define the column cut-out in the upper section.
For sections 2 and 3 you can define the height of the inclined plane.
4 Dimensions of the embed.
Precast foundation block (1028): Grooves tab

Use the Grooves tab to define the grooves in Precast foundation block
(1028).

Example:
Description
1 Height of the groove.
2 Distance between the grooves.
3 First distance related to the bottom of the column.
4 Depth for the grooves.
5 Number for the grooves.
Concrete foundation (1030)

Concrete foundation (1030) creates a concrete foundation plate at the
bottom of a selected concrete column.
Objects created
• Concrete foundation plate

• Injection tubes and injection hoses in concrete column
• Up to 4 concrete piles under the foundation plate (optional)
• Stirrups for the reinforcing bars
Use for
Concrete foundation plate with
chamfers, piles, injection tubes with
curved injection hoses, reinforcing
bars and stirrups.
Concrete foundation plate with more

than 4 edges, recesses in the
foundation plate, and multiple
reinforcing bars.

Concrete foundation plate with
multiple reinforcing bars.
Selection order
1. Select a concrete column.
2. Pick a point.
The concrete foundation plate is created automatically when the point is
picked.

Part
1 Concrete column
2 Point
The point defines the new bottom level of the column.
See also
Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab (page 376)
Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab (page 381)
Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab (page 383)
Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab (page 385)
Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab (page 386)
Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab (page 389)
Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab (page 390)
Concrete foundation (1030): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the dimensions of the reinforcing bars and
injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).

Dimensions
Description Default
1 Length of the injection tube extension 180 mm
from the top of reinforcing bar.
2 Reinforcing bar height in the column. 400 mm
3 Reinforcing bar top and bottom cover 0,5 * foundation
thickness. plate thickness
4
The bottom cover thickness is used only
if you do not define the top cover
thickness.
5 Pile thickness. 300 mm
The pile thickness value on the Parts tab
overrides this value.
6 Distance from the bottom of the 5000 mm
foundation plate to the bottom of the
pile.

Description Default
7 Pile depth in the foundation plate. 50 mm
8 Foundation plate thickness. 800 mm
9 Distance between the column and the 0 mm
foundation plate.
10 Vertical offset from the picked point. 0 mm
11 Reinforcing bar height. 800 mm 400 mm + 50%

of height of concrete
footing
12 Injection tube elevation 1. 500 mm
13 Injection tube elevations 2 and 3.
Vertical offset for the injection tubes if
the tubes are pointing to the same
direction.
Define the level to use on the Inj. Tube
and rebar tab.
Injection tube
Select the shape and dimensions of the injection tubes.

Option Description
Injection tube in one piece, 90 degree angle.
Injection tube in one piece.

Use value a to define the slope of the tube.
Injection tube and a 90 degree injection hose.
Injection tube and a sloped injection hose.

Use value a to define the slope of the hose.

Option Description
Straight injection tube. No injection tube opening is
created.
Description Default
1 Define the height of a sloped injection 30 mm
tube or hose angle.
2 Define the height of a curved injection 0 mm
hose.
Reinforcing bar hook length

Define the reinforcing bar hook length. You can define also the end angle of
the reinforcing bar.
The default value is 10 * reinforcing bar diameter.

Concrete foundation (1030): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to control the profile properties of the foundation plate,
foundation piles, stirrups and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).
Concrete massive, Piles

Define the profile properties of the concrete foundation plate and the
foundation piles.
If you leave the pile thickness value empty on the Parts tab, the pile thickness
value defined on the Picture tab is used instead together with the Pile profile
type prefix (e.g. D).
Option Description
t, b, h Part thickness, width and height.
position number.

Reinforcing bars
Option Description
Type of reinforcing bars Select the profile type for the reinforcing bars.
• Default: the same as Reinforcing bar
• Poly-profile: profile catalog
• Reinforcing bar: reinforcing bar catalog
Reinforcement bars Size of the reinforcing bars.
Radius Radius of the reinforcing bar hook.
Reinf. bars belong to Define to which part the reinforcing bars belong.
• Default: the same as Columns
• Concrete massive: reinforcing bars belong to
the concrete foundation plate.
• Column: reinforcing bars belong to the
column.
Injection tubes and curve
Option Description
Injection tubes Size of the injection tubes.
Curve Size of the injection hoses.
Article number Article number for the injection hose
and the injection tube.
The entered values are saved to the
user-defined attribute of the part.
Define how the injection hoses are
connected to the injection tubes.
• Default: injection hoses are loose
parts.
• Part-add gain: injection hoses are
added to the injection tubes.
• Weld gain: injection hoses are
welded to the injection tubes.
• Cast unit column: injection hoses
are added to the column.
• Weld to column: injection hoses
are welded to the column.

Option Description
Pile profile type prefix (e.g. D) Default parametric profile prefix for
the piles.
This value works only if you have set
the pile thickness on the Picture tab.
You can override this value by setting
the pile thickness on the Parts tab.
Reinf. bar profile type prefix (e.g.D) Default parametric profile prefix for
the reinforcing bar profiles.
Concrete foundation (1030): Massive tab

Use the Massive tab to control the shape and the dimensions of the concrete
foundation plate and the recesses in Concrete foundation (1030).
Concrete foundation plate type
Option Description
Type of massive Select the plate type for the rectangular
foundation plate.
Massive direction Select the direction of the foundation plate.
Concrete foundation plate dimensions

Description
1 Offset from the concrete column in the x direction.
2 Offset from the concrete column in the y direction.
3 Select the shape of the foundation plate.
4 Width of the foundation plate.
5 Length of the straight part of the foundation plate.
6
7 Offset from the foundation plate center line.
8 Width of the straight part of the foundation plate.
9 Length of the foundation plate.
Recess dimensions

Description
1 Select the type of the recess.
2 Width of the recesses.
3 Depth of the recesses.
4 Distance between the bottom of the reinforcing bar and
the bottom of the recess.
5 Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar
and the left side of the recess.
6
Distance between the center line of the reinforcing bar
and the right side of the recess.
Option Description
Chamfer type for Chamfer type for the rectangular foundation
rectangular massive plate.
Chamfer X Chamfer size in the x direction.
Chamfer Y Chamfer size in the y direction.
Concrete foundation (1030): Piles tab

Use the Piles tab to control the position of the foundation piles in Concrete
foundation (1030).
Pile positions
Description
1 Select the position and the offset of the piles.
2 Distance between the first pile and the column in the x
direction.
4
Distance between the second pile and the column in the x
direction.

Description
6 Distance between the third pile and the column in the x
8 direction.
Distance between the fourth pile and the column in the x
direction.
3 Distance between the first pile and the column in y direction.
5 Distance between the second pile and the column in y
direction.
7
Distance between the third pile and the column in y direction.
9
Distance between the fourth pile and the column in y direction.
10 Pile offset from the concrete column in the x direction.
11 Pile offset from the concrete column in the y direction.
Option Description
Piles direction Define the direction of the piles.
Join piles to massive Define how the piles are connected to the
foundation plate.
Concrete foundation (1030): Inj. tube and rebar tab

Use the Inj. tube and rebar tab to control the creation, number and position
of the reinforcing bars and injection tubes in Concrete foundation (1030).
Option Description
Create Select which parts are created.
Injection tubes bend Radius of the injection tubes.
radius

Injection tube properties
Description
1 Select the direction of the bent bars.
2 Select the direction of the injection hoses.
3 Number of injection tubes.
4 Center-to-center distance between the injection tubes.
5 Define the level of the curved injection parts.
This is useful if the curved parts are pointing to the same
direction.
You can define the levels on the Picture tab.

Description
Example:
6 Define the distance from the center of the injection tube to the
outer contour of the concrete foundation.

Example
Concrete foundation (1030): Column tab

Use the Column tab to control the dimensions of the column cut-out in
Concrete foundation (1030).

Column dimensions
Description
1 Size of the column cut-out.
2 Height of the column cut-out.
Concrete foundation (1030): Stirrups tab

Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in Concrete foundation
(1030).
Stirrup properties
Option Description
Select whether the stirrups are created.
Define the length of the laps.
Grade Grade of the stirrups.

Size Size of the stirrups.
End conditions left Hook for the start point of the stirrups.
End conditions Hook for the end point of the stirrups.
right
Bend lengths left Hook length for the start point of the stirrup.
Bend lengths right Hook length for the end point of the stirrup.

Option Description
Creation method Creation method of the stirrups.
Number of bars: Enter the number of the stirrups.
By spacing: Enter a spacing value.
Define the comment, name, class, serie and start

number for the stirrups.

Description
1 Select the start point of stirrups, either from the bottom of the
column to the first stirrup or from the top of the reinforcing bar to
first stirrup.
2 Define the distance from the bottom of the reinforcing bar to the
last stirrup.
Example

2 Reinforcement
This section introduces components that can be used in reinforcement.
See also
Reinforcement for foundations (page 393)
Beam, column, and slab reinforcement (page 405)
Lifting (page 592)
2.1 Reinforcement for foundations

Tekla Structures includes the following components that you can use to
automatically create reinforcement for foundations:
Strip footing (75) Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip
(page 393) footing.
Pile cap reinforcement Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile
(76) (page 396) cap.
Pad footing (77) Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad
(page 400) footing.
Starter bars (page 402) Creates starter bars in a footing and a
pedestal for a column.
Creates starter bars in a footing for a
column.
Reinforcement 393 Reinforcement for foundations

Strip footing (75)
Creates reinforcement for a concrete strip footing.
Bars created
• Longitudinal bars for the top and bottom surfaces and sides of the footing
• Stirrups
Use for
Situation More
information
Straight strip footings that have
rectangular cross sections
Main bars entirely
inside the footing,
no side bars,
stirrup laps at
stirrup corners.
Main bars
protruding from
the footing, two
bars on both
sides, stirrup laps
in the middle of
the top surface.
Do not use for

Footings that have:
• Irregular cross sections
• Skew or cut corners
Before you start

• Create the concrete strip footing.
• Calculate the required area of reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Strip footing (75) dialog box to define the
properties of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Concrete cover thickness,
location of side bars and
first stirrups

Main bars Grade, size, number, Strip footing
spacing, and bond lengths reinforcement
of the top, bottom, left, properties
and right bars (page 395)
Stirrups Grade, size, spacing, and
bend type of stirrups
Attributes Numbering properties,
name, and class of the
top, bottom, left, and right
bars, and stirrups
Picking order
1. Concrete strip footing.
Strip footing reinforcement properties

Bond length of main bars
Bond lengths define how far main bars extend into adjacent structures at the
ends of strip footings. Use the Bond length 1 fields on the Main bars tab for
the first end of the footing (with the yellow handle), and the Bond length 2
fields for the second end of the footing (with the magenta handle).
You can define bond lengths separately for:
• Top bars
• Bottom bars
• Bars on the left side of the footing
• Bars on the right side of the footing
Bend type for stirrups

To define the location of the stirrup laps in the strip footing, select an option
from the Bend type list box on the Stirrups tab. The options are:
Option Examples
At mid

Option Examples
At corner
Pile cap reinforcement (76)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete pile cap.
Bars created
• Bars in two directions for the top and bottom surfaces of the pile cap
• Lacer bars
Use for

Bottom bars concentrated
over the piles, top bars
under the column. Two lacer
bars.
Bars evenly distributed on

the bottom and top
surfaces. No lacer bars.
Rectangular footings with or Pad footing and pile cap

without cut corners, footings shapes (page 397)
that are skewed on one or both
sides
Bars on the top, bottom, or
both surfaces of the footing

Straight or bent bar ends
Before you start

• Create the concrete pile cap.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Pilecap reinforcement (76) dialog box to define
the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Concrete cover thickness,
primary bar direction
Primary top Grade, size, hooks, bend Bar distribution
bars lengths, distribution (by (page 398)
Secondary number or spacing), and
top bars arrangement/location of
the top and bottom bars
Primary in two directions
bottom
bars
Secondary
bottom
bars
Lacer bars Option to create lacer Lacer bars for pad
bars, grade, size, number, footings and pile
spacing, location, type, caps (page 399)
orientation, and laps of
lacer bars
top, bottom, and lacer
bars
Picking order
1. Concrete pile cap
2. Piles and/or columns
3. Click the middle mouse button to finish.

Pad footing and pile cap shapes
Use the Pile cap reinforcement (76) and Pad footing (77) tools to create
reinforcement for the following shapes of foundations:
Shape Description
Rectangular
Skewed on two sides
Skewed on one side
Rectangular with cut corners
Bar distribution
Pad footings
In pad footings, you can arrange the main reinforcing bars into:
• One zone of bars that have the same bar properties
• Three zones of bars that have different bar properties
You set the options separately for primary and secondary bars. Select an
option from the Arrangement list box on the relevant tab in the Pad footing
(77) dialog box.
Pile caps
Define the pile cap reinforcement using the following properties in the Pile
cap reinforcement (76) dialog box:
Field Description
To suit pile/column Select Yes to concentrate main
bars over piles and under columns.

Field Description
% of pile/column The area where the bars are
width concentrated, as a percentage of
the width of the pile or column.
For example, if the pile diameter or
width is 500 mm, enter 120 in the
% of pile width field to
concentrate bars in a 600 mm-wide
area over the pile.
Bar portioning (%) The proportion of bars

concentrated over a pile or under a
column.
Bar portioning The number of bars concentrated
(number of bars) over a pile or under a column.
You can define these properties separately for:

• Primary top bars
• Secondary top bars
• Primary bottom bars
• Secondary bottom bars
Lacer bars for pad footings and pile caps

Lacer bars are reinforcing bars that loop around the sides of a concrete
footing.
You can create up to six different groups of lacer bars in a footing. Each group
can contain different values for:
• Grade
• Bar size
• Number of bars
• Spacing
• Shape
• Dimensions
To create lacer bars for a footing:
1. Open the footing reinforcement properties dialog box and click the Lacer
bars tab.
2. In the Lacer bar option list box, select Yes to create lacer bars.
3. Enter properties for each lacer bar group:

Quantity, spacing, and location of
lacer bar groups.
Tekla Structures only uses
information from some of the fields,
in this order of priority:
1. Number of bars and Spacing
2. Number of bars, Start, and End
3. Spacing, Start, and End
Type The number and location of laps. The

options are:
Orientation The options are Default, Front, and

Back.
p1...p4 The exact locations and lengths of
lacer bar laps. Locations are
L1...L4
measured from the corner of the bar
to the midpoints of laps.
The location of the topmost lacer bar,

measured from the end of main bars.
Entering a value here overrides the
location defined in the End field.

Pad footing (77)
Creates reinforcement for a concrete pad footing.
Bars created
• Bars in two directions for the bottom surface of the pad footing
• Lacer bars
Use for

Rectangular footing, 90-
degree hooks at the primary
bar ends, 180-degree hooks
at the secondary bar ends,
no lacer bars.
Rectangular footing, three

zones of primary bars with
different spacing, straight
bar ends, three lacer bars.
Footing skewed on two

sides, two groups of lacer
bars with different spacing.
Rectangular footings with or Pad footing and pile cap

without cut corners, footings shapes (page 397)
that are skewed on one or both
sides
Before you start

• Create the concrete pad footing.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Pad footing (77) dialog box to define the

Picture Concrete cover thickness
Primary bar Arrangement, grade, size, Bar distribution
Secondary hooks, bend lengths, and (page 398)
bar distribution (by number
or spacing) of the primary
and secondary bars,
primary bar direction
Lacer bar Grade, size, number, Lacer bars for pad
spacing, location, type, footings and pile
orientation, and laps of caps (page 399)
lacer bars
primary, secondary, and
lacer bars
Picking order
1. Concrete pad footing
Starter bars
Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for footing (87) create starter
bars in a footing for a column. Starter bars may go through a pedestal or
straight to the column. Starter bars can be in a rectangular or circular form.
Bars created
• Starter bars (straight or L-shaped)
• Stirrups (optional)

Use for

Starter bars for footing
(87) places starter bars in a
footing in rectangular or
circular form. Starter bars
can be straight or L-shaped,
and can have stirrups.
Starter bars for pillar (86)

creates straight or L-shaped
starter bars that go through
a rectangular or circular
pedestal. Starter bars can
have stirrups.
Before you start

• Create the footing.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Starter bars for pillar (86) and Starter bars for
footing (87) dialog boxes to define the component properties:

Picture 86: Bar dimensions and Starter bar stirrups
locations, number and (page 404)
spacing of bars, stirrup
type, concrete cover
thickness
87: Bar dimensions and
locations, number and
spacing of bars, concrete
cover thickness

Location 87 only: Location of bars, Starter bar location
stirrup type (page 404)
Starter bar stirrups
(page 404)
Parameters Grade, size, name, class,
and numbering properties
of bars
Picking order
1. Footing
2. Pedestal (only for Starter bars for pillar (86))
Starter bar stirrups

Use these options to define stirrup laps in footings:
Option Description
Laps on the side of the stirrups
45-degree hooks at bar ends
Laps at stirrup corners

Laps at stirrup corners

If the starter bars are in a

circular form, you must define
the angle of stirrup overlap.

Starter bar location
When you use Starter bars for footing (87), you must define the location of
starter bars. Enter the distance from the center of the bar group to the center
of the footing, in two directions:
2.2 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

automatically create reinforcement for beams, columns, and slabs:
• Detailing manager (page 406)
• Mesh Bars (page 408)
• Mesh Bars by Area (page 414)
• Slab bars (18) (page 438)
• Slab Reinforcement Tool (page 440)
• Beam reinforcement (63) (page 444)
• Double tee reinforcement (64) (page 448)
• Beam end reinforcement (79) (page 450)
• Corbel reinforcement (81) (page 454)
• Round column reinforcement (82) (page 459)
• Rectangular column reinforcement (83) (page 467)
• Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84) (page 479)
• Hole creation and reinforcement (85) (page 481)
• Braced girder (88) (page 485)
• Braced girder (89) (page 505)
• Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91)
(page 524)
• Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening reinforcement
(page 529)
• Multiple Wire Size Mesh (page 536)
• Embedded anchors (8) (page 540)
Reinforcement 405 Beam, column, and slab reinforcement

• Embed (1008) (page 581)
• Continuous Beam Reinforcement (page 591)
Detailing manager
Detailing manager is used to apply detailing components into any structure.
With Detailing manager you can define rules to apply multiple components
at one go to detail the structure of a cast unit or the entire model.
You can use selection filters to define detailing rules for automating repetitive
detailing tasks. You can add custom details, extensions or system components
with Detailing manager.
You have three options:
• Use Detailing manager to have a part as input. All parts in the cast unit
are examined and detailed by the set rules.
• Use Detailing manager to have a cast unit as input. All parts in the cast
unit are examined and detailed by the set rules.
• Use Detailing manager to have a component as input, for example, tools
such as Floor layout or Wall layout where the same tool creates multiple
parts. All parts in the component are examined and detailed by the set
rules.
The image below shows an example of Detailing manager. In the example,
the Mesh bars component is created to the outside shell of the cast unit
because it has the class 4 filter selected and there is a selection filter for
objects with class 4.

Properties
Option Description
Rule Use the rules to define detailing settings.
The maximum number of rules is 10. Click to

add a new rule. You can rename a rule by right-clicking
the rule tab.
You can also delete rules.
Component Click to select the component that you want to use
to detail a structure.
Double-click the component in the Applications &
components catalog to add it to the Component box.
Attribute Select the attribute file for the component. If you do
not select a file, the standard file is used.
Component input Define the creation method of the selected
component:
• Part: Select the part to which you are creating the
component.
• Part + one point: Select the part and one
additional point on the part. With this option,
Detailing manager places the center of the object
boundary box to that point.
Use this setting with custom component details.
• Part + two points: Select the part and two
additional points on the part. With this option,
Detailing manager uses the start and the end
point of the part as insertion points.
Filter Select which parts inside the selected cast unit or
component get the selected component. The available
selection filters are listed in the filter list.
You can also create new selection filters. You can use
five selection filters if you want to create an
intersection of the filters.
Create on selected Detailing manager is created to selected parts, cast
objects units or components. The rule settings that are
currently set in the Detailing manager dialog box are
used.
Create as • Detailing manager plug-in: Components are
inserted as Detailing manager plug-ins and not as
separate components.
Select this option if you use a component as input.

Option Description
• Separate components: With this setting, the
inserted components do not have any connection
to Detailing manager.
Mesh Bars
Mesh Bars creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls.
Objects created
• Primary bars
• Crossing bars
Use for
Reinforcement for the bottom or the
top surface of the concrete element,
or for both.
Selection order
1. Select a concrete slab.
The reinforcement is created automatically.

See also
Mesh Bars: Picture tab (page 409)
Mesh Bars: Detailing tab (page 410)
Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab (page 412)
Mesh Bars: Splicing tab (page 413)
Mesh Bars: Attributes tab (page 414)
Mesh Bars: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in
Mesh Bars.
Option Description
Create bars Top bars with primary bars
above secondary bars
Top bars with secondary bars

above primary bars
No bars
The same options are available for the bottom bars as well.
The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/
bottom layer.
Same as Select whether the top bars are created using the same
bottom properties as the bottom bars.
If you select No, enter the top bar properties.
Bar type Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a
mesh.
Size Select the diameter of a bar.
You can set the size separately for the top primary and
secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and secondary
bars.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the bars.
You can set the grade separately for the top primary and
bars.
Spacing Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or
type the spacing value.

Option Description
• By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the
Spacing box.
• Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number
of bars box.
Spacing Distance between the bars.
Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars.
You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and
bars.
Number of Number of bars.
bars
Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars.
You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary
and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and
secondary bars.
Primary The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction.
bars
If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created
direction
along the two longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no
parallel sides, then the bars are created along the slab x
direction instead.
Up Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of
direction the slab.
If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the
side with the greatest area.
Mesh Bars: Detailing tab

Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars.
Option Description
Bar edge Define the edge distance of the bars.
distances
Adjustment Select how the bars are distributed.
The same options are available for both the primary and the
secondary bars.
Equal distribution by target
spacing value.

Option Description
By exact spacing value with
flexible first space without
first bar.

flexible last space without
last bar.

flexible first and last space
without first and last bars.

flexible first space.

flexible last space.

flexible first and last space.
Bar grouping Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not.

If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along
tapered the edge are handled.
Tapered bars are handled
normally.
Creates as many bars as

possible with same length in
the tapered edge.
Bar behavior Select how bars next to openings are handled.

at cuts
• Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts
are ignored.

Option Description
• Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by
which the bar is shortened. Lower values are ignored.
• Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar
end/start point to the edge of the opening.
Minimum Bars that are shorter than this value are not created.
length of bar
to be created
Mesh Bars: Bar end conditions tab

Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks
in Mesh Bars.
Option Description
Cover • Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have
thickness different distances from part edges.
on sides
• Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same
distance from part edge.
End Creates a 90° hook at a given
conditions end of bar
Creates a 135° hook at a

given end of bar.

given end of bar.
Creates a straight bar without

a hook at the given end of a
bar.
Creates a hook with a free
angle at the given end of a
bar.
Creates a double bent hook

at the given end of a bar.
Bending Bending radius at bar ends

radius
Bending Bending length at bar ends
length

Mesh Bars: Splicing tab
Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh
Bars.
Option Description
Splice bars Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or
not.
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the reinforcement.
The maximum bar lengths and lap lengths are then
listed by the grade and size of the bar.
If needed, you can modify these splicing definitions
in the MeshBarsSplicing_Manufacturers.dat
file. You can also copy the default file from ..
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\common\system, edit it, and
save it to your project or firm folder.
Maximum length of Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the
bars bars are spliced.
Lapping length Length of the lapping connection.
Splicing in same cross Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in
section the same location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in
the same cross section.
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the
same cross section.
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in
Splicing symmetry Select the symmetry that is applied when the
reinforcing bars are spliced.
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the
reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the
uneven length is only at one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at sides:
The splice pattern of the reinforcing bar is
symmetrical with uneven lengths at the sides.
• Symmetrical with different length at center:
symmetrical with uneven length in the center.

Option Description
Splicing offset Offset of the splice center point from the point
where the reinforcing bars originally met.
Minimum splitting Minimum longitudinal distance between two
distance splices in consecutive bars.
Splicing type Select the type of the splice.
Bar position Select whether the lapping bars are on top of each
other or parallel to each other.
Mesh Bars: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in Mesh
Bars.
Option Description
Name Name of the bar group or mesh.
Prefix Prefix for the position number of the bar group or
mesh.
Start number Start number for the position number of the bar
group or mesh.
Class Class of the bar group or mesh.
If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is
taken into account.
Mesh Bars by Area

Mesh Bars by Area creates reinforcement for concrete slabs or walls.
Objects created
• Primary bars
• Crossing bars
Use for
Reinforcement for the bottom or top
surface of the concrete element, or
for both.

Selection order
1. Select a concrete slab.
2. Select a group of points to define a working polygon.
See also
Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab (page 415)
Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab (page 418)
Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab (page 420)
Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab (page 420)
Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab (page 422)
Mesh Bars by Area: Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to define how the top and bottom bars are created in
Mesh Bars by Area.
Option Description
Create bars Top bars with primary bars
above secondary bars
Top bars with secondary bars

above primary bars

Option Description
No bars
The same options are available for the bottom bars as well.
The value defined in the box is the cover thickness for the top/
bottom layer.
Mesh area Select the outline that the mesh follows.
perimeter
The meshes in the examples are created by picking the same
points but with different mesh area perimeters.
Part, for example:
Part
Polygon, for example:
Polygon

Option Description
Part + polygon, for example:
Polygon + part
Same as Select whether the top bars are created using the same
bottom properties as the bottom bars.
If you select No, enter the top bar properties.
Bar type Select whether the bars are created as a bar group or as a
mesh.
You can set the size separately for the top primary and
bars.
You can set the grade separately for the top primary and
bars.
Spacing Select whether the spacing is based on the number of bars or
type the spacing value.
• By spacings: enter the distance between the bars in the
Spacing box.
• Number of bars: enter the number of bars in the Number
of bars box.
Spacing Distance between the bars.
Tekla Structures calculates the number of bars.
You can set the spacing separately for the top primary and
bars.
Number of Number of bars.
bars

Option Description
Tekla Structures calculates the distance between bars.
You can set the number of bars separately for the top primary
and secondary bars, and for the bottom primary and
secondary bars.
Primary The direction of the primary bars. Use to change bar direction.
bars
If the Auto option is selected, the primary bars are created
direction
along the two longest parallel sides of a slab. If there are no
parallel sides, then the bars are created along the slab x
direction instead.
Up Select which sides are regarded as the top and bottom sides of
direction the slab.
If the Auto option is selected, then the bars are created on the
side with the greatest area.
Mesh Bars by Area: Detailing tab

Use the Detailing tab to control how the bars are distributed in Mesh Bars by
Area.
Option Description
Bar edge Define the edge distance of the bars.
distances
Adjustment Select how the bars are distributed.
The same options are available for both the primary and the
secondary bars.
Equal distribution by target
spacing value.

flexible first space without
first bar.

flexible last space without
last bar.

Option Description
flexible first and last space
without first and last bars.

flexible first space.

flexible last space.

flexible first and last space.
Bar grouping Select whether tapered bars are grouped or not.

If you group the tapered bars, select how the bars along
tapered the edge are handled.
Tapered bars are handled
normally.
Creates as many bars as

possible with same length in
the tapered edge.
Bar behavior Select how bars next to openings are handled.

at cuts
• Cut bars: Select whether the bars are cut and which cuts
are ignored.
• Ignore openings smaller than: The minimum value by
which the bar is shortened. Lower values are ignored.
• Cover thickness in holes: Distance between the bar end/
start point to the edge of the opening.
Minimum Bars that are shorter than this value are not created.
length of bar
to be created

Mesh Bars by Area: Bar end conditions tab
Use the Bar end conditions tab to control the cover thickness and bar hooks
in Mesh Bars by Area.
Option Description
Cover • Different each side: Each end of a bar group can have
thickness different distances from part edges.
on sides
• Same all sides: All ends of the bar groups have the same
distance from part edge.
End Creates a 90° hook at a given
conditions end of bar

given end of bar.

given end of bar.
Creates a straight bar without

a hook at the given end of a
bar.
Creates a hook with a free
angle at the given end of a
bar.
Creates a double bent hook

at the given end of a bar.
Bending Bending radius at bar ends

radius
Bending Bending length at bar ends
length
Mesh Bars by Area: Splicing tab

Use the Splicing tab to control the splicing of the reinforcing bars in Mesh
Bars by Area.
Option Description
Splice bars Select whether the reinforcing bars are spliced or
not.

Option Description
Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the reinforcement.
The maximum bar lengths and lap lengths are then
listed by the grade and size of the bar.
If needed, you can modify these splicing definitions
in the MeshBarsSplicing_Manufacturers.dat
file. You can also copy the default file from ..
\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>
\environments\common\system, edit it, and
save it to your project or firm folder.
Maximum length of Maximum reinforcing bar length after which the
bars bars are spliced.
Lapping length Length of the lapping connection.
Splicing in same cross Select how many reinforcing bars can be spliced in
section the same location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the same
cross section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is spliced in
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced in the
same cross section.
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced in
Splicing symmetry Select the symmetry that is applied when the
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of the
reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and the
uneven length is only at one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at sides:
symmetrical with uneven lengths at the sides.
• Symmetrical with different length at center:
symmetrical with uneven length in the center.
Splicing offset Offset of the splice center point from the point
where the reinforcing bars originally met.
Minimum splitting Minimum longitudinal distance between two
distance splices in consecutive bars.
Splicing type Select the type of the splice.
Bar position Select whether the lapping bars are on top of each
other or parallel to each other.

Mesh Bars by Area: Attributes tab
Use the Attributes tab to control the bar group or mesh properties in Mesh
Bars by Area.
Option Description
Name Name of the bar group or mesh.
Prefix Prefix for the position number of the bar group or
mesh.
Start number Start number for the position number of the bar
group or mesh.
Class Class of the bar group or mesh.
If you create a mesh, only the class of primary bars is
taken into account.
Rebar coupler
Rebar coupler creates couplers to split reinforcing bars and bar groups, or to
bars and bar groups whose ends are in contact and parallel.
Rebar coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar Coupler
and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and manage
• reinforcing bar couplers that connect two bars
• end anchors that are devices at the unreserved end of the bar.
The following components belong to Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
• Rebar coupler (page 422)
• Rebar end anchor (page 425)
• Split rebar and add coupler (page 429)
• Rebar end trimming (page 433)
In addition, you can manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of the Rebar
Coupler and Anchor Tools with the Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update
rebar attributes (page 435) component.
Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.

Use for
Couplers with split reinforcing bars.
Before you start

Couplers can be created between reinforcing bar groups or single reinforcing
bars and reinforcement meshes. The two selected reinforcement objects can
be of different type and they can even have different number of bars. The only
requirement is that one or more bar ends are in contact and parallel.
Selection order
1. Select the first bar or bar group.
2. Select the second bar or bar group.
Couplers are created at each location where
• the bar ends are parallel enough (angle < 5 degree) and
• the gap along the bar end is less than the length of the coupler and
• the offset perpendicular to the bar end legs is less than the diameter of the
bars
When there is no valid and no parallel end-to-end location between the
selected bars, the component creates a dummy part that identifies the
unsuccessful coupler insertion.
All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar.
This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added
to the sub-assembly of the cast unit.
In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may
happen with reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars
and straight bars with hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the
concrete, change the cover thickness to either a negative or a positive value
depending on what is required.
Two report templates Rebar Extra Fabrication Length.rpt and Rebar
Thread Length.rpt can be used to inquire Threaded Length and Extra
Fab. Length of the reinforcing bars in the BOMs or BOQs.
See also
Rebar coupler: Parameters tab (page 424)

Rebar coupler: Attributes tab (page 425)
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and
user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436)
Rebar coupler: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Rebar coupler.
Option Description
Use manually entered Enter values for the coupler properties.
values
Use auto attribute file The values in the auto attribute file override the
coupler component values.
Typically the auto attributes file contains one or
more attribute values to be used with certain bar
sizes.
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files
for your project.
For more information on the structure of the auto
attribute files, see Rebar Coupler and Anchor
Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping and
user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).
Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom part.
Select No to create the coupler as a normal part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or select
it from the Applications & components catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a custom
part.
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the custom
component.
The coupler custom part is created using the saved
attributes given here.
Input points The order of the start and the end points of the
custom component.
Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the coupler part
position number.
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of the
coupler parts.

Option Description
The overall end-to-end length of the coupler.
If you use a custom part, this is the length
between the start point and the end point of the
custom part.
This is also the maximum gap between the bar
ends. If the gap is bigger than the length of the
coupler, the coupler cannot be inserted.
When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the
Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled from the custom part
settings if you have named the properties in a certain way. For an example,
see Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files, part mapping
and user-defined attributes (UDAs) (page 436).
Rebar coupler: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar
coupler.
Option Description
Threaded length The value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA.
The fields are used for checking which bars have
threads and what are the thread values so that they
can be shown in drawings and reports.
Extra fabrication This value is written to the reinforcing bar UDA.
length
This value does not affect the length of the
reinforcing bar. You need to add this value in your
drawings and reports to get the correct length if
required.
Method UDAs written to the reinforcing bars.
Type You can set the reinforcing bar end method and the
coupler type, and add a product name and a code for
Product
reporting purposes.
Code
The used attribute name depends on which end of
the reinforcing bar the coupler was created to.
NOTE The above user-defined attributes affect numbering. Reinforcing bars

with different attribute values get different part marks.

Rebar end anchor
Rebar end anchor creates end anchors at the ends of reinforcing bars and
bar groups.
Rebar end anchor is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar
Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and
manage
The following components are part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools:
Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are attached to the end of a reinforcing bar group.
Use for
Reinforcing bars with end anchors.
Selection order
1. Select the reinforcing bar or bar group.
2. Pick any point close to the bar end where you want to create the end
anchors.

All end anchors are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing
bar. This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are
added to the sub-assembly of the cast unit.
See also
Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab (page 427)
Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab (page 428)
Rebar end anchor: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the end anchor properties in Rebar end
anchor.
Option Description
Use manually entered Enter values for the end anchor properties.
values
end anchor component values.
sizes.
for your project.
Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the end anchor as a
custom part.
Select No to create the end anchor as a normal
part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or
select it from the Applications & components
catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a
custom part.

Option Description
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the
custom component.
The end anchor custom part is created using
the saved attributes given here.
custom component.
Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the end anchor
part position number.
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of
the end anchor parts.
The dimensions of the end anchor.
If you use a custom part, define the length
between the start point and the end point of
the custom part using these values.
The offset of the far most point of the coupler

measured from the physical end of the
reinforcing bar.
Note that you cannot control the end of the
reinforcing bar with this component. You need
to make sure the end concrete cover of the
reinforcing bar is greater or equal to this
offset plus the minimum concrete cover.
When you create the end anchors as custom parts, the properties in the
Rebar end anchor: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Rebar
end anchor.
Option Description

Option Description
length
required.
Product
reporting purposes.
Code

Split rebar and add coupler

Split rebar and add coupler splits a reinforcing bar group and adds couplers
in relation to the direction of the picked points.
Split rebar and add coupler is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools.
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to
model and manage
Objects created
• Round parts
The parts are connected between two reinforcing bar groups.

Use for
Staggered couplers with split
reinforcing bars.
Selection order
1. Double-click Split rebar and add coupler to open the component
properties.
2. Click Split rebar with coupler.
3. Select the reinforcing bar or bar group to be split.
4. Pick the first split point.
5. Pick the second split point.
This point defines the line at which the reinforcing bar or bar group is split
and couplers are inserted.
6. Pick the third point.
This point defines the side of the main reinforcing bar or bar group. This is
needed if you have applied different properties for the first bar or group
and the second bar or group.
7. Repeat the steps 3 - 6, or press Esc to cancel picking.
All couplers are automatically added to the parent part of the reinforcing bar.
This allows them to be shown in reports and drawings because they are added
to the sub-assembly of the cast unit.
In some cases the reinforcing bars can move outside of the concrete. This may
happen with reinforcing bars that are modeled with two points (straight bars
and straight bars with hooks). If the reinforcing bars move outside of the
concrete, change the cover thickness to either a negative or a positive value
depending on what is required.
See also
Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab (page 431)
Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab (page 433)

Split rebar and add coupler: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to define the coupler properties in Split rebar and
add coupler.
Option Description
Use manually entered Enter values for the coupler properties.
values
coupler component values.
sizes.
for your project.
Option Description
Use custom component Select Yes to create the coupler as a custom
part.
Select No to create the coupler as a normal
part.
Name Type the name of the custom component, or
select it from the Applications & components
catalog.
Ensure that the selected component is a
custom part.
Attribute Type the name of the attribute file of the
custom component.
The coupler custom part is created using the
saved attributes given here.
custom component.
Option Description
Numbering series Prefix and a start number for the coupler part
position number.

Option Description
Attributes Name, diameter, material, finish and class of
the coupler parts.
Staggered type • None
Couplers are placed along the two picked
points.
• Left
Couplers are placed to the left side of the
two picked points.
• Right
Couplers are placed to the right side of the
two picked points.
• Middle
Couplers are placed on both sides of the
two picked points.
The overall end-to-end length of the coupler.
If you use a custom part, this is the length
between the start point and end the point of
the custom part.
This is also the maximum gap between the bar
ends. If the gap is bigger than the length of
the coupler, the coupler cannot be inserted.
Coupler position Location of the couplers in relation to the
selected split line.
If you select the Left or the Right option, the
actual left or right depends on the third input
point which defines the side of the first bar.
This option is available only when there is no
staggering.
Example:

Option Description
When you create the couplers as custom parts, the properties in the
Split rebar and add coupler: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to define the user-defined attributes (UDAs) in Split
rebar and add coupler.
Option Description
length
required.
Product
reporting purposes.
Code


Rebar end trimming
Rebar end trimming adjusts the space between two reinforcing bar ends.
Rebar end trimming is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools. Rebar
Coupler and Anchor Tools is a set of four components that help to model and
manage
Use for
Space between reinforcing bar
ends.
Selection order
1. Select the couplers you want to modify.
2. Modify the properties.
3. Click Apply to selected couplers.
OR
1. Modify the properties.
2. Click Select rebars.
3. Select the reinforcing bars whose ends are adjusted according to the value
set for the gap.
See also

Rebar end trimming: Adjusting reinforcing bar ends
Option Description
Get free gap from auto Select Yes if you want to use the gap defined in
attributes file the Auto attribute file for the couplers. When
you select Yes, only the coupler components that
have the Use auto attribute file in use are
adjusted.
See Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize
attribute files, part mapping and user-defined
attributes (UDAs) (page 436).
Select No if you want to manually enter the free
gap.
The gap when Get free gap from auto
attributes file is set to No.
Trim both bars Select which of the reinforcing bars is modified.

Apply to selected Select the couplers you want to modify and click
couplers the Apply to selected couplers button to adjust
the bars according to the value set for the gap.
Select rebars Click the Select rebars button and select the
reinforcing bars whose ends you want to adjust
according to the value set for the gap.
The reinforcing bar ends need to be close to each
other.
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Update rebar attributes

Use Update rebar attributes to manage the user-defined attributes (UDAs) of
the couplers and the end anchor parts created by the Rebar Coupler and
Anchor Tools. With Update rebar attributes you can check the current
values of the selected reinforcing bars or all reinforcing bars.
Update rebar attributes is a part of Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools.

model and manage

If you have added coupler or end anchor components to reinforcing bars, the
UDA values are controlled by the coupler or the end anchor components and
their properties. If you delete the coupler or the end anchor component, the
UDAs defined by those components are not cleared automatically. Use Update
rebar attributes to clear the obsolete attribute values.
Option Description
Selected The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of the
selected reinforcing bars in the model.
All The values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs of all
reinforcing bars in the model.
Update Deletes the values of all coupler and end anchor UDAs
of all reinforcing bars on the selected rows.
Only the obsolete coupler UDAs of the reinforcing bar
are deleted.
You can select multiple rows by holding down Ctrl or
Shift.
Show only rebar Select this check box if you want to show only
with attributes reinforcing bars that have values in their coupler or
end anchor UDAs.
After you have selected the check box, click Selected
or All to refresh the table.
See also
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools: Customize attribute files,

part mapping and user-defined attributes (UDAs)
model and manage

Auto attribute files

The attribute table files are text files that can locate in any of the system
folders, or in a model folder. You can have as many attribute table files as you
need. There are different attribute tables for end anchors (one input
reinforcing bar) and coupler components (two input reinforcing bars). The
extensions for attribute table files are
• .couplers.csv for Rebar coupler and Split rebar and add coupler
components
• .anchors.csv for Rebar end anchor component.
The attribute table contains a header line, including the column names and
one or more table rows containing the attribute values. Columns are either
selector columns or attribute columns.
The selector column names are Primary.Size, Primary.Grade,
Secondary.Size, and Secondary.Grade.
The attribute columns contain the attribute value that is the name given in the
header row. The component attribute values given in the table row are used
whenever the component input (primary + secondary for Rebar coupler and
secondary for Rebar end anchor) matches with the selector values.
Go to Tekla Warehouse to get auto attribute files for your project.
Custom part mapping

When you create the coupler or the end anchors as custom parts, the
properties in the Numbering series and Attributes sections can be filled
from the custom part settings if you have named the properties in a certain
way. The following example shows the mapping between the Numbering
series and Attributes properties and the custom part properties.

User-defined attributes (UDAs)
You can customize the content of the Attributes tab and the UDAs in the
Rebar Coupler and Anchor Tools components.
The UDAs are defined in a text file named RebarCoupler.Udas.dat, located
in the ...\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\Environments
\Common\system folder. The file can also be placed in some other system
folder or in a firm folder. Note that the file is not read from the model folder.
The RebarCoupler.Udas.dat file only defines which UDAs are shown on the
Attributes tab. If you modify the file, include only existing UDAs to the file. If
you want to create new UDAs, ensure that you define them properly.
NOTE The UDAs affect numbering if the UDAs' special numbering flag
(special_flag) is set to yes in the objects_couplers.inp file.
Reinforcing bars with different UDA values will then get different part
marks.
Slab bars (18)

NOTE Alternatively, you can use the Mesh Bars and the Mesh Bars by Area
components to create reinforcement to concrete slabs or walls.
See Mesh Bars (page 408) and Mesh Bars by Area (page 414).
Creates reinforcement for a concrete slab.
Bars created
• Primary slab bars
• Crossing slab bars

Use for

Slab bars (18) creates reinforcement for
the bottom or top surface of the slab, or
for both. See Slab reinforcement
properties (page 440).
Before you start

• Create the concrete slab.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Slab bars (18) dialog box to define the properties
of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Concrete cover thickness, Slab reinforcement
which bars to create properties (page 440)
(bottom/top/both), primary
bar direction, which sides
are regarded as top and
bottom sides
Bottom bars Grade, size, spacing, and Slab reinforcement
generation type of bottom properties (page 440)
bars, concrete cover
thickness on slab sides,
crossing bar location in
relation to primary bars, end
hooks and bend lengths
Top bars Grade, size, spacing, and
generation type of top bars,

concrete cover thickness on
slab sides, crossing bar
location in relation to
primary bars, end hooks and
bend lengths
name, and class of bars
Picking order
1. Concrete slab
Slab reinforcement properties

Tekla Structures creates slab reinforcement using the properties in the Slab
bars (18) dialog box:
Field Description
Create bars Defines on which surface(s) to create bars. The
options are:
• Both sides
• Bottom side
• Top side
Primary bar The direction of primary bars. Use to change bar
direction direction. The options are:
• Use slab x direction
• Use slab y direction
• Use global x direction
• Use global y direction
Up direction Defines which sides are regarded as the top and
bottom sides of the slab.
Bar generation Defines whether Tekla Structures treats the bars
type as a group or a mesh.
Cross bar Defines whether the crossing bars are located
location above or below the primary bars.
End conditions The hook angles at bar ends. The options are
Straight, 90, 135, and 180 degrees.
Bend lengths The bend lengths at bar ends.

Slab Reinforcement Tool
Slab Reinforcement Tool creates reinforcement to irregularly shaped
concrete slabs. The reinforcement is created as reinforcing bar groups. It is
also possible to splice the reinforcing bars.
Objects created
• Reinforcement
Use for
Slab with reinforcement
Before you start

Create a slab.
Selection order
2. Pick points to define the direction of the reinforcing bars.
3. If the area to be reinforced is set to By polygon, pick the polygon points to
define the reinforced area.
See also
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab (page 441)
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab (page 443)
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Parameters tab

Use the Parameters tab to control the reinforcement properties, cover
thickness, and reinforcing bar spacing and area in the Slab Reinforcement
Tool modeling tool.

Reinforcing bars
Option Description
Prefix Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position number.
Name Define the name for the reinforcing bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawing and reports.
Size Define the diameter of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the reinforcing
bars.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display reinforcement of different
classes in different colors.
Cover thickness
Option Description
Cover thickness Define the concrete cover thickness on the different
sides of the slab.
Depth Define the concrete cover, either from the top or from
the bottom of the slab.
Depth value Define the depth value for concrete cover thickness.
Spacing and area
Option Description
Spacing Method Define the reinforcing bar spacing method.
Number of Bars Define the number of reinforcing bars in a
reinforcement.
Spacing Define the space between the reinforcing bars.
Adjustment Define how the reinforcing bars are placed in the slab.
The placing is based on the slab width and the cover
thickness at sides.
• Target spacing: The reinforcing bars are placed at
even spacing.
• Exact spacing cover at left/right side: The
reinforcing bars are placed starting from the left/
right side.
• Exact spacing centered both covers: The
reinforcing bars are centered and at equal distance
from the sides.

Option Description
Area to be Define the area to be reinforced in the slab.
Reinforced
• By part perimeter: The reinforcing bars are
created in the whole area of the slab.
• By polygon: The reinforcing bars are created to a
picked polygon shaped area in the slab.
Slab Reinforcement Tool: Advanced tab

Use the Advanced tab to control the reinforcing bar end hooks, splicing, and
opening properties in Slab Reinforcement Tool modeling tool.
Bar Ends
Option Description
Start/End Define the type of the hooks to be used at
the reinforcing bar ends.
If you select Custom Hook, you can define a
custom hook’s Angle, Radius and Length.
Angle Define the hook angle by entering a value
between –180 and +180 degrees.
Radius Define the internal bending radius of the
hook.
Length Define the length of the straight part of the
hook.
Splicing
Option Description
Splice Bars Define whether the reinforcing bars are
spliced or not.
Maximum Length of Bar Define the maximum reinforcing bar length
after which the bars are spliced.
Splicing in Same Cross Define how many reinforcing bars can be
Section spliced in the same location.
• 1/1 = all reinforcing bars are spliced in the
same cross section.
• 1/2 = every second reinforcing bar is
spliced in the same cross section.
• 1/3 = every third reinforcing bar is spliced
in the same cross section.

Option Description
• 1/4 = every fourth reinforcing bar is spliced
in the same cross section.
Splicing Symmetry Define the symmetry that is applied when the
• Not Symmetrical: The splice pattern of
the reinforcing bar is not symmetrical and
the uneven length is only at one side.
• Symmetrical with different lengths at
sides: The splice pattern of the reinforcing
bar is symmetrical with uneven lengths at
the sides.
• Symmetrical with different length at
center: The splice pattern of the
reinforcing bar is symmetrical with uneven
length in the center.
Splicing Offset Define the offset of the splice center point
from the point where the reinforcing bars
originally met.
Minimum splitting distance Define the minimum longitudinal distance
between two splices in consecutive bars.
Splicing Type Define the type of the splice.
Lapping Length Define the length of the lapping connection.
Openings
Option Description
Cut Bars at Opening Define whether reinforcing bars are cut in slab
openings.
Cover thickness for Define the concrete cover thickness on the sides
openings of the openings.
Minimum Size of Large Define the minimum size of an opening that is
Opening considered to be large.
This field is available if you set Cut Bars at
Opening to At Large Opening Only.
Beam reinforcement (63)

Creates reinforcement for a concrete beam.
Bars created
• Longitudinal main bars

• Corner and side bars
• Main stirrups
• Stirrups for one or two ledges
Use for

Rectangular beams
L-shaped beams (RCL

profiles)
RCX profiles
Inverted T-beams
(RCDL profiles)

Before you start
• Create the concrete beam.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to define
the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Parameters Concrete cover thickness, Beam
number, size, and location reinforcement (63):
of bars, stirrup size, Beam
option to place main bars reinforcement
only inside the main properties
stirrups or distributed to (page 446)
the ledges
Stirrup Distances from the part Beam
spacing ends to the first stirrups, reinforcement (63):
number of spaces and Stirrup spacing tab
spacing of main and ledge (page 447)
stirrups in five zones
along the length of the
part, option to create
different stirrups in two
ledges, ledge stirrup
spacing method
Advanced Grade, name, class, and
numbering properties of
the bottom, top, and side
bars, and main and ledge
stirrups
Picking order
1. Concrete beam

Beam reinforcement (63): Beam reinforcement properties
Use the following fields on the Parameters tab in the Beam reinforcement
(63) dialog box to define the beam reinforcement properties:
Description
1 Main stirrup size
2 Size of corner bars
3 Ledge stirrup size
4 Number of bars
5 Size of bars
Beam reinforcement (63): Stirrup spacing tab

Use the Stirrup spacing tab in the Beam reinforcement (63) dialog box to
define the spacing of the beam stirrups.
Additional stirrup spacing type

Defines how the ledge stirrups are distributed along the length of the beam.
The options are:

Option Description
Target Tekla Structures creates equal spaces between the
bars, aiming the spacing value as closely as possible
to the value you specify. This is the default option.
Exact The first and last space of a zone adjust themselves to
even out bar distribution. The spaces in the middle of
each zone are exactly the size you specify.
Double tee reinforcement (64)

Creates prestressed strands and other reinforcement for a concrete double
tee.
Bars created
• Prestressed strands in double tee ribs
• Stirrups in double tee ribs
• Reinforcement mesh on the top surface of the double tee
Use for
Situation
Straight strands
Different strand pattern and number of strands
When you use different stirrup shapes and
spacings
Before you start

• Create the concrete double tee.
• Calculate the required area of strands and other reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Double tee reinforcement (64) dialog box to
define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Parameters Concrete cover thickness, Double tee
size, number, and pattern reinforcement
of strands, stirrup size properties
and type, size and spacing (page 449)
of longitudinal and
crossing bars in the mesh
Stirrup Distances from the part
spacing ends to the first stirrups,
number of spaces and
spacing of stirrups in five
zones along the length of
the part
Advanced Grade, name, class, and
the strands, stirrups, and
mesh bars
Picking order
1. Concrete double tee
Double tee reinforcement properties

Strand pattern
Use the following options to define the strand pattern in double tee ribs:
Grid Staggered 1st Staggered 2nd
Stirrups
Use the following options to define the stirrups and stirrup hooks in double
tees:

Option Example
Closed
Open
Open with 90
degree hooks
Open with 135

degree hooks
Open with 180

degree hooks

Beam end reinforcement (79)
Creates reinforcement for the end of a concrete beam or strip footing.
Bars created
• Horizontal U-shaped bars (types 1 and 2)
• Vertical U-shaped bars (types 3A and 3B)
• Oblique bar (type 4)
• Stirrups (types 5A and 5B)
Description
1 Horizontal U bars (type 2)
2 Horizontal U bars (type 1)
3 Oblique bar (type 4)
4 Vertical U bars (type 3A)
5 Stirrups (type 5A)
6 Vertical U bars (type 3B)
7 Stirrups (type 5B)
Use for

Standard beams Use bars 3A and 5A for the beam end.
Dapped beams
Beams with anchor bolt hole in the
notched area
Beams and strip footings that have a
rectangular cross section
Do not use for

Parts that have irregular cross sections.

Before you start
• Create the concrete beam or strip footing.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Beam end reinforcement (79) dialog box to
define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Concrete cover
thickness, distances
from the concrete
surface to the bars,
angle of bar 4
Bars Bar dimensions of each Beam end reinforcing
bar type, which bars to bars (page 452)
create, option to splice
bars 3A and 3B
Groups Number and spacing of
bars in each group of
bar types. If the spacing
varies, enter each value
individually.
In the Bar 4 list box,
select Yes to create the
bar.
Attributes Grade, size, class, and
the bars
Picking order
1. Select concrete beam or strip footing.
2. Pick position.
Beam end reinforcing bars

Horizontal U bars 1 and 2 (page 452)
Vertical U bars 3A and 3B (page 453)
Stirrups 5A and 5B (page 454)

Horizontal U bars 1 and 2
Use the following options to create bars in the lower area of the beam end, in
the horizontal planes (bar type 1):
Option Description
Two bars on each plane.
One in the middle of the
beam end, the other
extending to the sides of
the beam.
One bar on each plane,

extending to the sides of
the beam.
One bar on each plane, in

the middle of the beam
end.
Two identical, overlapping

bars on each plane.
To create bars in the upper area of the beam end, around a hole, enter
dimensions for bar 2.
Vertical U bars 3A and 3B

To create vertical U-shaped bars, enter dimensions for:
• Bar 3A: for the notched area of the beam.
• Bar 3B: for the higher part of the beam.
Splicing bars 3
You can create vertical U bars (bar type 3) of two bars joined with a splice. To
do this, use the following list box on the Bars tab:

If you choose to splice bars, you can select the splice type:
Option Description
Lap up Creates a lap splice above the horizontal
center line of the beam end.
Lap down Creates a lap splice below the horizontal
center line of the beam end.
Lap both Creates a lap splice centered to the
horizontal center line of the beam end.
Coupler Creates a coupler.
Weld joint Creates a welded joint.
For lap splices, you can define the lap length L and whether the bars are on
top of each other or parallel to each other.
For all splice types, you can define the offset of the splice center point from
the horizontal center line of the beam end.
Stirrups 5A and 5B
To create stirrups for beam ends, enter dimensions for:
• Bar 5A: for the notched area of the beam.
• Bar 5B: for the higher part of the beam.
Corbel reinforcement (81)

Corbel reinforcement (81) creates reinforcement for one or two corbels in a
concrete column. The two corbels must have the same top level, thickness,
and horizontal location.
Objects created
• Main bars
• Stirrups
• Additional bars

Use for
Two corbels, beveled and
rounded, with the same top
level, thickness, and horizontal
location.
Two additional bars crossing
each other.
One straight corbel.

One additional bar.
Limitations
Do not use Corbel reinforcement (81) for two very different corbels.
Before you start

• Create the concrete column and beam(s).
• Create the corbel(s). Use Corbel connection (14) or a Seating connection
to create the corbel(s).
Selection order
1. Select the main part (concrete column).
2. Select the secondary part(s) (one or more corbels).
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement.

See also
Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab (page 456)
Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal Stirrups tabs
(page 457)
Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab (page 458)
Corbel reinforcement (81): Main bars tab

Use the Main bars tab to control the main bar length, concrete cover
thickness, reinforcing bar spacing, and reinforcing bar properties in Corbel
reinforcement (81).
Description
1 Main bar length.
2 Distance from the concrete surface to the main bar.
Option Description
Grade Strength of the steel used in the
reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name for the main bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in
Class Use Class to group reinforcement.
For example, you can display
reinforcement of different classes in
different colors.

Option Description
Start number Start number for the part position
number.
Option Description
Concrete cover Concrete cover thickness.
Number of bars Number of bars in the reinforcement.
Bar spacing Space between the reinforcing bars.
Corbel reinforcement (81): Stirrups/Transverse Stirrups/Diagonal

Stirrups tabs
Use the Stirrups, Transverse Stirrups and Diagonal Stirrups tabs to control
the stirrup creation, stirrup type, concrete cover thickness, reinforcing bar
spacing, and reinforcing bar properties in the Corbel reinforcement (81)
modeling tool.
Stirrups
Option Description
Stirrup Define the distance from the concrete surface to the
location stirrups.
Number of Define the number of bars in the reinforcement.
bars
Bar spacing Define the space between the reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name for the stirrups.
reports.
Stirrup type
Option Description
The stirrup consists of a bent single reinforcing bar.
Define the hook length.
The default values (for the standard 90 degree stirrup
hook) are read from the rebar_database.inp file.
Select a suitable overlap position for this stirrup type.

Option Description
The stirrup consist of two overlapping U bars that face
each other.
Define minimum and maximum overlapping length.
Concrete cover
Option Description
Thickness Define the concrete cover thickness.
Grade Strength of the steel used in the reinforcing bars.
Tekla Structures uses the name in drawings and reports.
Start Start number for the part position number.
number
Concrete Define whether the concrete cover thickness is same on
cover all sides.
Corbel reinforcement (81): Additional bars tab

Use the Additional bars tab to control the creation of additional bars in
corbels, concrete cover thickness, and additional bar properties in the Corbel
reinforcement (81) modeling tool.
Additional bars
Option Description
No additional bars.
One additional bar.

Option Description
Two additional bars parallel to each other.
Two additional bars crossing each other.
Two pairs of additional bars crossing each

other.
Option Description
Concrete Define the concrete cover thickness.
cover
Name Define a name for the additional bars.
reports.
For example, you can display reinforcement of
different classes in different colors.
Start number Start number for the part position number.
Round column reinforcement (82)

Round column reinforcement (82) creates reinforcement for a concrete
column that has a round cross section.
Objects created
• Longitudinal main bars (6)
• Stirrups
• Column end reinforcement

Use for
Round concrete column with main
bars bent outside the column.
Continuous spiral stirrup.
Round concrete column with straight

main bars protruding from the
column, or entirely inside the column.
Separate stirrups. Top of the column
is reinforced.
Limitations
Do not use for rectangular columns.
Selection order
The component is created automatically when the part is selected.

Part
1 Main bars
2 Stirrups
3 Column end reinforcement

Main bars tab
Use the Main bars tab to control the length of the vertical and horizontal
extensions of the main bars at the top and bottom of the column, the
thickness of the concrete cover over stirrups, and the cranking of the main
bars.
Main bar properties
Option Description
Number of bars Number of main bars.
Rotation Rotation of main bars.
Size Diameter of the main bars.
Bending radius Bending radius of the main bars.
Name Name for the main bars.
Cranking
You can create cranked reinforcing bars at the top of the column. Enter the
horizontal distance dimensions for the bars.
Stirrups tab
Use the Stirrups tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover over the
stirrups at the top and bottom of the column, spacing and number of stirrups
or laps in each stirrup group, stirrup types and stirrup shapes.

Stirrup dimensions
1. Thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and the
bottom of the column. The default cover thickness is 50 mm.
Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom stirrup group. Group 3 is
always created.
2. Spacing of stirrups in each stirrup group.
3. Number of stirrups in each stirrup group.
4. Select how the stirrups are distributed.
• Exact space, flexible at ends: Tekla Structures uses exactly the
spacing value you specify, and evens out the stirrup distribution at the
column ends.
• Target space: Tekla Structures creates the stirrups at even spacings
and tries to use the spacing value you specify.
Stirrup types
Option Description
Separate stirrups
Single, continuous spiral stirrup
Separate spiral stirrups

Option Description
Single, continuous stirrup
Stirrup shape
Select the shape of the stirrup from the list.
Stirrup overlap
Select the angle or the length of stirrup overlap. The option is not active if you
have created spiral stirrups.
The overlapping angle can be of maximum 180 degrees.

The overlapping length can be in millimeters or inches.
Stirrup attributes tab

Use the Stirrup attributes tab to control the grade, size, class, name, and
numbering properties of the stirrups.
Stirrup properties
Option Description
Size Diameter of the stirrups.

Option Description
Name Name for the stirrups.
Top tab
Use the Top tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover of the top
reinforcement, the number of top bars, and their spacing and rotation.
Column top reinforcement
1. Define the concrete cover thickness.

2. Define the length of the ultimate leg.
Column top reinforcement rotation

Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the top of columns.
Column top reinforcement properties
Option Description
Number of bars Number of top bars.
Size Diameter of the top bars.

Option Description
Name Name for the top bars.
Bottom tab
Use the Bottom tab to control the thickness of the concrete cover of the
bottom reinforcement, the number of bars, and their spacing and rotation.
Column bottom reinforcement

Column bottom reinforcement rotation

Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the bottom of columns.
Column bottom reinforcement properties
Option Description
Number of bars Number of bottom bars.
Name Name for the bottom bars.

Option Description
Advanced (main bars) tab

Use the Advanced (main bars) tab to control the main bar extensions
separately for each bar in Round column reinforcement (82).
In Bar index, enter the bar number for which to define the extension. Define
the size, the distance from the column edge and the length of each extension.
Select whether the main bars are tapered or moved according to the upper
surface, if the top of the column is skewed.
Rectangular column reinforcement (83)

Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool creates
reinforcement for a concrete column that has a rectangular cross section.
Objects created
• Longitudinal main bars: corner bars (4), side bars
• Stirrups
• Intermediate links
• Column end reinforcement

Use for
Rectangular concrete column with
corner bars and side bars bent
outside the column. Side bars on long
sides. Intermediate links tie side bars
at every second stirrup.
Rectangular concrete column with

straight corner and side bars entirely
inside the column. End of column
reinforced.
Limitations
Do not use for round columns.
Selection order
The component is created automatically when the part is selected.

Part
1 Corner bars
2 Side bars
3 Stirrups
4 Intermediate links
See also
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab (page 470)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab (page 471)

Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab (page 472)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab (page 473)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab (page 475)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab (page 477)
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Main bars tab

Use the Main bars tab to control the corner bar properties, the symmetry
options, rotation, and concrete cover thickness in the Rectangular column
reinforcement (83) modeling tool.
Basic corner bar properties

Define the grade, size and bending radius of the corner bars. The active fields
depend on the selected symmetry option.
Option Description
bars.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the corner bars.
Define the concrete cover thickness.
Symmetry options
Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define
which of the corner bars have the same grade, size and bending radius
properties. The corners bars that have same properties are symmetrical.

Rotation
In square columns, you can select the perpendicular sides of a column if the
sides require different reinforcement. You can rotate all reinforcement in a
square column by 90 degrees.
Additional corner bar properties
Option Description
Name Define a name for the main bars.
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Bar ends tab

Use the Bar ends tab to control the length of vertical and horizontal
extensions for the corner and side bars at the top and bottom of the column,
and the cranking in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling
tool.
Bar creation
Select whether the extensions of corner bars and side bars are created
symmetrically on both sides of the column. If you select Not symmetrical,
you can enter separate extension values for the opposite sides of the column.
Vertical extension
Define the length of the vertical extension outside the column for corner bars
and side bars.
The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not
symmetrical.

Horizontal extension
Define the length of the horizontal extension for corner bars and side bars.
The active fields depend on the Bar creation options: Symmetrical or Not
symmetrical.
Corner bar direction

Select how to rotate the bent corner bars.
Cranking
You can create cranked reinforcing bars at the top of the column.
In the Corner bar direction option list, select to activate the

cranking options. When you select this option, you can enter the horizontal
distance dimensions for the cranked bars.
To successfully create the cranked reinforcing bars, ensure that the bending
radius is not too large.
Define the distance from the column corner to the point where the cranking
starts .
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Side bars tab

Use the Side bars tab to control the number of side bars, their spacing and
placing, symmetry options, and side bar properties in the Rectangular
column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.
Number of side bars

Define the number and spacing of side bars. You can define two sets of side
bars on each side of the column.
You can define the side bars separately for each side of the column.
The active fields depend on the selected symmetry option.
Placing of side bars

Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the side bars. Select whether the
bars are placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces.

Distance between corner bars and side bars.
Distance between side bars.
Symmetry options
Select the symmetry option. Using the symmetrical conditions you can define
which side bars are symmetrical, and which side bars use the same properties.
Side bar properties

Define the side bar properties for side bars 1 and side bars 2.
Option Description
bars.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the side bars.
Name Define a name for the side bars.
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Stirrups tab

Use the Stirrups tab to control the stirrup properties in the Rectangular
column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.

Stirrup dimensions
1. Define the thickness of the concrete cover over the stirrups at the top and
the bottom of the column. The default cover thickness is 50 mm.
Group 1 is the top stirrup group, 5 is the bottom stirrup group. Group 3 is
always created.
2. Define the spacing of stirrups in each stirrup group.
3. Define the number of stirrups in each stirrup group.
4. Select how the stirrups are distributed.
5. If you select the Distance list option, enter different spacing values for
the groups.
6. Define the cover thickness for each stirrup group.
Bar lapping at stirrup corners

Select the how the bars lap at the stirrup corners. The options are 135-degree
hooks at the bar end or 90-degree hooks at the bar end.
Create as one group

Select whether all the stirrups are created as a single group. If you select Yes,
all stirrup groups are created and they have the same properties as Group 3.

Ignore cuts
If you have a recess or a hole in the column, you can select to ignore the cuts
at the top and bottom of the column when stirrups are created.
Stirrup properties
Option Description
bars.
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Intermediate links tab

Use the Intermediate links tab to control the intermediate links in order to
tie all side bars in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling
tool.
If you have rectangular columns that have very large cross sections, the side
bars may be a far from the corners of the stirrups. You will need to create
intermediate links to tie all side bars, and to prevent them from buckling when
they are in compression.
Intermediate links are created for each stirrup group.
NOTE Intermediate links are created between Side bars 1 or Side bars 2
that are symmetrical.
For Side bars 2 intermediate links are created only if no Side bars 1
are created.
Properties of intermediate links
Option Description
bars.

Option Description
Spacing of intermediate links
Spacing is the same as stirrup spacing.
Spacing is double the stirrup spacing (intermediate links at

every second stirrup).
Same as above, but for alternate stirrups.
No intermediate links are created.
Intermediate link type

Select the type of the link.
Intermediate link pattern

Select whether intermediate links go in one direction or in a crossing pattern.

Hook orientation
Select the hook orientation for both sides.
Closed stirrups as intermediate links

Select whether to use closed stirrups as intermediate links.
If you select Yes, select the type of the bar lapping at the stirrup corners.
Zone without intermediate links

Define the zone length where intermediate links are not created. In this zone
the stirrups tie the side bars. The distance is measured from the stirrup
corner.
If you have selected the Yes option in Use closed stirrups always when
possible, you can define the distance from the corner of the closed stirrup.
Rectangular column reinforcement (83): Top / Bottom tab

Use the Top and Bottom tabs to control the top and bottom reinforcement
thickness of concrete cover, the number of bars and their spacing and rotation
in the Rectangular column reinforcement (83) modeling tool.
Number and spacing of top or bottom bars

Define the number and spacing of the top or bottom bars.
You can define the number of transverse bars in both cross directions.

Column top / bottom reinforcement

Placing of top or bottom bars

Select the horizontal and vertical placing for the top or bottom bars. Select
whether the bars are placed starting from the corner or at equal spaces.
Distance between corner bars and side bars.
Distance between side bars.
Rotation
Select how to rotate the reinforcement at the top or bottom of columns.
No rotation.
Transverse bars are perpendicular to the longer side of
the column.
Rotation angle is 90 degrees.
Transverse bars are parallel to the longer side of the
column.
Top and bottom reinforcement properties
Option Description
bars.
Bending radius Define the bending radius of the top or bottom bars.

Option Description
Name Define a name for the top or bottom bars.
Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)

Creates a hole in a concrete slab or wall and reinforcement around the hole.
Bars created
• Straight bars along hole edges
• Diagonal bars close to hole corners
• U-shaped edge bars
Use for

Rectangular or round holes in
concrete slabs and walls

Straight and edge bars only,
no diagonal bars.
Diagonal and edge bars only,

no straight bars.
Hole rotated from the

direction of the slab.
One diagonal bar at each
corner.
Different number of bars on

each side of the hole in the
wall. No diagonal bars.
Before you start

• Create the concrete slab or wall.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hole reinforcement for slabs and walls (84)
dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Shape of the hole
(rectangular or round):
Hole dimensions, bar

dimensions and location,
concrete cover thickness
Rotation angle of the hole:
Horizontal Which bars are closest to The slab or wall

and vertical the surface of the direction defines
bars concrete (vertical or the direction of the
horizontal), number, hole and which
grade, size, numbering bars are to the left
properties, name, and and right of, and
class of each bar group above and below
along the sides of the hole the hole.
Edge bars Spacing, grade, size,
numbering properties,
name, and class of bar
group on each side
Diagonal Number, grade, size,
bars numbering properties,
name, and class of bar
group at each corner of
the hole
Picking order
1. Center of the hole
2. Concrete slab or wall

Hole creation and reinforcement (85)
Creates a hole in a concrete part and reinforcement around the hole.
Bars created
• Straight bars at hole edges
• Stirrups
• Z-shaped bars
Use for

Rectangular hole, stirrups on
each side of the hole, no Z-
shaped bars.
Round hole, Z-shaped bars, no

stirrups around the hole.
Concrete beams or columns

Round or rectangular holes Hole only. No additional
reinforcement around it.
With or without Z-shaped
bars or stirrups
Do not use for

Parts that have round or irregular cross sections.
Before you start

• Create the concrete part.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hole creation and reinforcement (85) dialog
box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Picture Hole shape, direction, and Reinforcement
dimensions, bar around holes
dimensions and location, (page 483)
concrete cover thickness,
angle of Z-shaped bars
Bars The number, grade, size,
name, class, and
numbering properties of:
• Straight bars above
and below the hole
• Z-shaped bars on the
left and right side of
the hole
Stirrups Number, spacing, grade,
size, name, class, and
stirrups
Additional stirrup settings Stirrups at holes
(page 484)
Picking order
1. Center of the hole
2. Concrete part
Reinforcement around holes

Use these options to create holes and additional reinforcement:
Option Description
Creates a hole and
additional
reinforcement
around it.
Only creates a hole,
no reinforcement.
Use these options to define the direction of holes:

Option Description
Hole along the local
y direction of the
part.
Hole along the local

z direction of the
part.
Use these options to define Z-shaped bars around round holes:
Option Description
Concrete cover
measured in the
direction of the
radius of the hole.
Concrete cover
measured from the
corner of the
bounding box
around the hole.
Use these options to define the direction of Z-shaped bars:
Option Description
Stirrups at holes
Use these options to define the stirrups around holes:
Option Description
Single stirrups

Option Description
Bundled stirrups
Hooks
Option Description
135-degree hooks
90-degree hooks
Braced girder (88)

Braced girder (88) creates braced girders in a precast concrete part, such as in
a thin-shell slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The girders are cast into the
concrete part and they also work as a part of the reinforcement and as a
connector between the precast and cast-in-place concrete.
Objects created
The girders consist of the following parts:
• Bottom reinforcing bars (2)
• Top reinforcing bar
• Connecting reinforcing bars (2)
Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog
to create the braced girders.
Use for
Braced girders are created in the
precast concrete slab.

precast concrete sandwich panel.
Braced girders are created in a wide

plate floor with an opening.
Braced girders are created in a hollow

wall.
Profile as a girder.

Selection order
1. Select the concrete part.
The girders are created automatically.
Part
1 Top reinforcing bar
2 Connecting reinforcing bar
3 Bottom reinforcing bar
See also
Braced girder (88): Picture tab (page 487)
Braced girder (88): Parts tab (page 490)
Braced girder (88): Geometry tab (page 501)
Braced girder (88): Double wall tab (page 503)
Braced girder (88): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcing bars in
Braced girder (88).

Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape
Description
1 Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the
part end.
2 Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and
the part end.
3 Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the
part end.
4 Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.
5 Distance between bendings.
Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance
between the top and bottom reinforcing bars.

Examples

Examples

Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting
reinforcing bars.
Option Description
Size Size of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Grade of the reinforcing bar.
Comment A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar,
and a prefix and a start number for the part
Name
position number.
Class
Serie
Start number
Create Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is
created or not.
UDAs
You can define UDAs.
Braced girder (88): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of
girders in Braced girder (88).

Girder creation
Option Description
Creation method Select the type of the girders.
Profile If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile
In addition, define a prefix and a start number for
the part position number, a material and a name.
Workplane orientation
Option Description
Workplane position Select the work plane position.
Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position
in depth options to define the orientation of the
girder on the work plane.
Girder position in z direction
Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.

Examples
Geometry

Option Description
Multiple L factor Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder
length.
The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are
no decimals in the girder length.
Geometry Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars.
Examples:

Option Description
Girder position in y direction
Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction.

Examples

Examples
Extra girders
Select whether additional girder groups are created.
Examples
For example, if you have selected this option:

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created
between 2 existing braced girders.

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are
created based on the entered number. Distances between the groups are
equally divided.

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder
groups is based on the defined distance. The distances between the girder
groups are equally divided.
Girder group
Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders.
Number is the number of girders in the girder group.
Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group.
e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.

Option Description
• Girder group is positioned middle of the
reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the right side of the
reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the left side of the
reference line.
Examples
Existin
g
girders

Examples
Additio
nal
girders
Braced girder (88): Geometry tab

Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the
girder creation in Braced girder (88).
Option Description
Create always girders Select whether girders are always
created.
If you select Yes, girders are created
even when the girder is placed fully
outside the concrete part.

Option Description
Openings Select whether girders are created in
openings.
Length Select how girders adapt to the part
shape.
Minimum length Define the minimum length of the
girder.
Maximum length Define the maximum length of the
girder.
The girder is split when the maximum
length is reached.
Examples of minimum length

No minimum length defined:

Defined minimum length (no girder created):
Braced girder (88): Double wall tab

Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the
Look up sec concrete element

Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders.
Define the class of the second wall in the Class box.
Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder
is created. You can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation
method in combination with the options defined for openings on the
Geometry tab.
The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have
different geometry.
Examples
A hollow core wall where inside and outside shells have different geometry.
Look up second concrete element = No

Examples
Look up second concrete element = Yes

Examples
Braced girder (89)

Braced girder (89) creates braced girders between selected points in a precast
concrete part, such as in a thin-shell slab or in a sandwich wall panel. The
girders are cast into the concrete part and they also work as a part of the
reinforcement and as a connector between the precast and cast-in-place
concrete.
Objects created
The girders consist of the following parts:
• Bottom reinforcing bars (2)
• Top reinforcing bar
• Connecting reinforcing bars (2)
Instead of using reinforcing bars, you can use profiles from the profile catalog
to create the braced girders.

Use for
precast concrete slab.

precast concrete sandwich panel.
Braced girders are created in a wide

plate floor with an opening.
Braced girders are created in a hollow

wall.

Profile as a girder.
Selection order
1. Select the concrete part.
2. Pick the starting point of a girder.
3. Pick the end point of a girder.
Part
1 Top reinforcing bar
2 Connecting reinforcing bar
3 Bottom reinforcing bar
See also
Braced girder (89): Picture tab (page 507)
Braced girder (89): Parts tab (page 510)
Braced girder (89): Geometry tab (page 520)
Braced girder (89): Double wall tab (page 522)

Braced girder (89): Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to control the shape and dimensions of reinforcement
bars in Braced girder (89).
Reinforcing bar dimensions and shape
Description
1 Distance between the end of the top reinforcing bar and the
picked point.
2 Distance between the end of the connecting reinforcing bar and
the picked point.
3 Distance between the end of the bottom reinforcing bar and the
picked point.
4 Radius of the connecting reinforcing bar.
5 Distance between bendings.
Define the distance between the bottom reinforcing bars, and the distance
between the top and bottom reinforcing bars.

Examples

Examples

Define the reinforcing bar properties for the top, bottom and the connecting
reinforcing bars.
Option Description
Size Size of the reinforcing bar.
Grade Grade of the reinforcing bar.
Comment A comment, name, and class for the reinforcing bar, and a
prefix and a start number for the part position number.
Name
Class
Serie
Start number
Create Select whether the reinforcing bar in question is created
or not.
UDAs
You can define UDAs.
Braced girder (89): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to control the girder creation, positioning and number of

Girder creation
Option Description
Creation method Select the type of the girders.
Profile If you use a profile as a girder, select the profile from
the profile catalog.
In addition, define a prefix and a start number for the
part position number, a material and a name.
Workplane orientation
Option Description
Workplane Select the work plane position.
position
Use the Position in plane, Rotation and Position in
depth options to define the orientation of the girder on
the work plane.
Girder position in z direction
Select how the girders are positioned in the z direction.

Example
Braced girders are positioned to picked points. The braced girders are related
to the top side of the part.
Geometry
Option Description
Multiple L factor Define the accuracy for the rounding of the girder
length.
The default value is 1.0. With the default value, there are
no decimals in the girder length.
Geometry Select the geometry for the connecting reinforcing bars.
Examples:

Option Description

Girder position in y direction
Select how the girders are positioned in the y direction.
Examples

Examples
Extra girders
Select whether additional girder groups are created.
Examples
For example, if you have selected this option:

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to None: No additional girder groups are created
between 2 existing braced girders.

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By number: Additional girder groups are
created based on the entered number. Distances between the groups are
equally divided.

Examples
Extra girder groups is set to By distance: The number of additional girder
groups is based on the defined distance. The distances between the girder
groups are equally divided.
Girder group
Define whether additional girders are created from the existing girders.
Number is the number of girders in the girder group.
Distance list is the distance between the girders in the girder group.
e = is the position of the girders from the reference line.

Option Description
• Girder group is positioned middle of the reference
line.
• Girder group is positioned on the right side of the
reference line.
• Girder group is positioned on the left side of the
reference line.
Examples
Existin
g
girders

Examples
Additio
nal
girders
Braced girder (89): Geometry tab

Use the Geometry tab to control how openings and part length affect the
girder creation in Braced girder (89).
Option Description
Create always girders Select whether girders are always
created.
If you select Yes, girders are created
even when the girder is placed fully
outside the concrete part.

Option Description
Openings Select whether girders are created in
openings.
Length Select how girders adapt to the part
shape.
Minimum length Define the minimum length of the
girder.
Maximum length Define the maximum length of the
girder.
The girder is split when the maximum
length is reached.

No minimum length defined:

Defined minimum length (no girder created):
Braced girder (89): Double wall tab

Use the Double wall tab to select how a second concrete element affects the
Look up sec concrete element

Select whether a second concrete element affects the creation of the girders.
Define the class of the second wall in the Class box.
Select the first wall, and if the second wall matches the defined class, a girder
is created. You can also enter a series of classes. You can use this creation
method in combination with the options defined for openings on the
Geometry tab.
The example below shows a hollow wall where inside and outside shells have
different geometry.
Examples
Look up second concrete element = No

Examples
Look up second concrete element = Yes

Examples
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement

mesh array (91)
Reinforcement mesh array in area (89) / Reinforcement mesh array (91)
create reinforcement meshes for an entire concrete part, or for a defined
polygonal area. Reinforcement mesh array (91) is suitable especially for
precast panels and slabs.
Objects created
• Reinforcement meshes

Use for
Array of overlapping
rectangular meshes.
Array of meshes in a
polygonal area that you
define. Meshes clipped to
fit the defined area.
Before you start

• Create the concrete part.
• Set the work plane parallel to the plane where you want to create the mesh
array.
Selection order
Component Create reinforcement mesh

Reinforcem 1. To attach the reinforcement mesh array:
ent mesh
• to the entire part, pick the starting point of the mesh
array in
area (89) • to a selected area, pick points to define the polygonal
shape of the mesh
2. Click the middle mouse button to create the reinforcement
mesh array.
Reinforcem 1. Select the part.
ent mesh
The reinforcement mesh array is created automatically
array (91)
when the part is selected.
Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to define the mesh catalog type, cover thickness and
location, mesh generation, cuts, and mesh area perimeter.

Mesh type
Select the mesh catalog type from the mesh catalog.
Cover thickness
Define the mesh location and give values for Cover thickness on plane and
Cover thickness from plane.
Define the cross bar location for top and bottom.
Mesh generation
Option Description
Generation To rotate the mesh generation direction around the
direction alignment point, enter an angle.
Direction of Select Opposite of top layer to mirror the bottom layer.
bottom layer
Cut by father Select Yes to cut the mesh with the cuts made in the
part cuts father part.
Clipping outside Select Yes to clip the meshes to fit the part or the
selected area.
Mesh area Select the outline which the mesh follows.
perimeter
The meshes in the examples below are created by picking
the same points but with different mesh area perimeters.

Option Description
Example: Polygon
Example: Part

Option Description
Example: Polygon + Part
Hole cover Define the hole cover thickness.

thickness
Overlapping tab
On the Overlapping tab, define the minimum and maximum overlapping
along the longitudinal and crossing direction, and set the mesh offset.
Option Description
Overlapping Define the minimum and maximum overlap along the
Long side and Short side of the mesh.
Mesh offset Define how the meshes are placed.
Mesh start offset Define mesh start offset for the first mesh. The length
of the first mesh is divided by the selected value.
For example, if you select the Mesh start offset to be
1/4, the length of the first mesh is divided by 1/4.
If you select Specified, the Start length offset option
becomes visible and you can enter the offset for the
first mesh.
Attributes tab
On the Attributes tab, define the numbering properties, name, and class of
the reinforcement meshes.

Wall panel reinforcement / Double wall edge and opening
reinforcement
Wall Panel Reinforcement is used for detailing single precast wall panels. It
includes the reinforcement for the panel edges, around the openings, a mesh
for the whole panel and additional bars, for example, with a wall shoe
connection. Double wall edge and opening reinforcement is used for
detailing double walls by connecting two panels to each other. It includes the
reinforcement for the panel edges and around the openings.
Object created
• Reinforcement
• Stirrups
• Mesh (for single panels)
Use for
Wall panel reinforcement with
openings and reinforcement in the
panel edges and around openings.

Double wall with opening and
reinforcement around the opening.
Ring reinforcement goes around both
shells.
All reinforcing bars that connect the
shells (U-bars and stirrups) are
attached to the shell that is selected
at creation.
Ring, beam and column reinforcing
bars are attached to the selected shell
that has been the input.
Selection order
1. Select the concrete part to reinforce.
Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to select how the corners of a wall panel are reinforced.
Option Description
Corner Select how the corners are
reinforcem reinforced and the bar is offset
ent on both sides of the corner.
Minimum Cuts smaller than this value are ignored and the reinforcing
breaking bars are not cut.
distance

Option Description
Rebar Creates a single layer of
count reinforcement.
Creates two layers of

reinforcement.
Cover Distance from the edge of the wall panel to the side of the
thickness outermost bar.
Door Cuts greater than this value are considered as door openings
minimal and the additional reinforcing bars that are needed, for
height example, in shoe connections are not created.
This option is available in Wall panel reinforcement.
Create Select whether horizontal or vertical reinforcing bars are on
stirrups top.
priority
Minimum The edge stirrups are not created if the dimension is less than
edge length the defined minimum value.
Reinforcement tab
Use the Reinforcement tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall
panel edges.

Option Description
Wall panel Creates normal
edge reinforcement.
reinforcem
ent type
Creates U reinforcement.
Mesh Select whether a mesh is created for the whole panel.

If a mesh is created, you can define the mesh properties, or use
custom settings.
You can use the Mesh Bars component to create the mesh.
This option is available in Wall panel reinforcement.
Create Select whether reinforcement is created at the edges.
edge
If you select Yes, define the horizontal and vertical reinforcing
reinforcem
bar properties.
ent
This option is available in Double wall edge and opening
reinforcement.
Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties for the wall
reinforcing panel edges.
bars
Note that horizontal bars have three sets of properties,
depending on the length of the bar.
For example, if the length of the main bar is less than 3000, it
uses the options on the left, if in between 3000 and 6000, the
middle options and if greater than 6000, the options on the
right.

Option Description
Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties for the wall panel
reinforcing edges.
bars
Note that vertical bars have two sets of properties, depending
on the length of the bar.
U Define the U reinforcing bar properties.
Reinforcem
Each side of the wall panel has a separate set of U reinforcing
ent
bar properties.
Opening tab
Use the Opening tab to create the reinforcing bars around the wall panel
opening.
Option Description
Opening Can be set for all four opening edges.
reinforcem Creates normal
ent type reinforcement.
Creates U reinforcement.
Horizontal Define the horizontal reinforcing bar properties.

reinforcing
Note that horizontal bars have separate sets of properties for
bars
the top and the bottom bars.
Vertical Define the vertical reinforcing bar properties.
reinforcing
bars
U Define the U reinforcing bar properties.
Reinforcem
Each side of the opening has a separate set of U reinforcing bar
ent
properties.

Diagonals tab
Use the Diagonals tab to create diagonal reinforcing bars at the corners of the
openings.
Option Description
Create diagonals Select whether diagonal reinforcing bars are created
or not.
Diagonals count Number of diagonal reinforcing bars.
Bending radius Define the bar bending radius.
L1 and L2 L1 + L2: Length of the diagonal reinforcing bars.
C Distance between the diagonal reinforcing bar and the
corner of the opening.
Column tab
Use the Column tab to a create column reinforcement.
Option Description
Column Column reinforcement is as high as the
reinforcem part.
ent
Column reinforcement does not reach

higher than the top edge of opening.
Column reinforcement is approximately

the L value higher than opening edge.
Column reinforcement is approximately

the L value lower than the opening
edge.
Column Select whether column reinforcing bars are created or not.

reinforcem

Option Description
ent • Minimum column height H: cuts and openings smaller
properties than the minimum value are not taken into account in the
column creation.
• Maximum column width B: if the width between two
openings or cuts or edges is greater than the maximum
value, then the column reinforcement is not created.
• Column height offset L1: distance between the column
reinforcement end and the opening edge.
• Column height offset L2: same as L1 but for the bottom
part of column reinforcement.
Main Define the main reinforcing bar properties.
reinforcing
Note that main bars have three sets of properties, depending
bars
on the width of the column.
Stirrup Select the stirrup type.
type
Reinforcing Define the stirrup properties.
stirrups
Note that stirrups have three sets of properties, depending on
the width of the column.
Beam tab
Use the Beam tab to create a beam reinforcement on top of the opening.
Option Description
Beam Select whether beam reinforcing bars are created or
reinforcement not.
properties
• Maximum beam height Hmax: distance from the
top edge of the wall to the top edge of the opening.
If the height is greater than the maximum, then the
beam reinforcement is not created.
• Minimum beam length Lmin: distance between
the sides of the opening. If the width of the
opening is less than the minimum, then the beam
reinforcement is not created.
Top Define the beam top reinforcement properties.
Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of
properties, depending on the length of the beam.
Bottom Define the beam bottom reinforcement properties.
Note that the reinforcing bars have two sets of
properties, depending on the length of the beam.
Stirrup type Select the stirrup type.

Option Description
Reinforcing stirrups Define the stirrup properties.
Note that stirrups have two sets of properties,
depending on the length of the beam.
Additional tab
Use the Additional tab to create additional horizontal and vertical reinforcing
bars. This tab is available in Wall panel reinforcement.
Option Description
Additional Select whether additional reinforcing bars are created
reinforcing bars or not.
Define the additional reinforcing bar properties.
Attributes tab
Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcing bar properties of the created
parts.
Option Description
Name Define a name for the part.
reports.
Multiple Wire Size Mesh

Multiple Wire Size Mesh creates reinforcement meshes with multiple
reinforcing bar sizes. The created reinforcement mesh is optimized for a mesh
welding machine. Multiple Wire Size Mesh can be used for slabs and wall
panels. The slabs and wall panels can be of any polygonal shape with any
number of openings. The reinforcing bars in the mesh can be of different size,
and the spacings between the bars can vary.
Objects created
• Reinforcement meshes

Use for
Three zones of longitudinal
reinforcing bars
Before you start

Create a polygon slab or a wall panel with any number of openings. Enter zone
values to define the width of the area to be reinforced in both the longitudinal
and crossing directions. Each direction can be divided up to five zones.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (slab or wall panel).
The reinforcement mesh is created.
See also
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab (page 537)
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab (page 538)
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab (page 539)
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns
(page 539)
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Mesh Parameters tab

Use the Mesh Parameters tab to control the mesh creation and cover
thickness in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.
Option Description
Define the concrete cover thickness.
Create Rebars Define to which side of the slab or the wall

panel the reinforcing bars are created.

Option Description
Longitudinal Direction Define whether the x or the y direction is
used as the longitudinal direction when the
reinforcing bars are created.
By default, the x direction is the longitudinal
direction.
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Longitudinal/Crossing Wires tab

Use the Longitudinal Wires or the Crossing Wires tab to control the mesh
creation in the longitudinal or the crossing direction, and the reinforcement
zones in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.
Option Description
Wire sizes Define the sizes of the reinforcing bars used in
the pattern.
Separate the sizes with a space.
Min overhang Define the minimum length of the reinforcing
bar extension.
Max overhang Define the maximum length of the reinforcing
bar extension.
Min spacing Define the minimum space between the
reinforcing bars.
The value must be divisible by the grid size.
For example, if the Min spacing is 150, Max
spacing is 300 and the Grid size is 50, the
spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300.
Max spacing Define the maximum space between the
reinforcing bars.
The value must be divisible by the grid size.
spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300
Grid size Define the mesh grid size.
spacings are 150, 200, 250 and 300.
This value depends on the welding machine.
Min wire length Define the minimum reinforcing bar length.
Min number of welding Define the minimum number of crossing
points reinforcing bar intersections.

Option Description
Pattern width to fulfill Define the width of the pattern that is filled
with the mesh.
This value is used when the zone width is
greater than the given value.
Zone width value type Define the width of the area to be reinforced as
a percentage of the whole slab or wall panel
width, or as the actual length.
Width, Real width, Mesh Define the mesh width, real width and area per
area per length length in each zone.
Load pattern from file Select the external text file where you have
defined the patterns for longitudinal and
crossing reinforcing bars.
If you use the external patterns file, Multiple
Wire Size Mesh tries to determine a pattern
with a suitable area per length value for every
zone and apply these values to the zones.
Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Attributes tab

Use the Attributes tab to control the reinforcement properties in the
longitudinal and in the crossing directions in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh
modeling tool.
Option Description
Start Number Define a starting number for the part position
number.
Grade Define the strength of the steel used in the
reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name for the longitudinal and the crossing
reinforcing bars.
reports.
Class Use Class to group the longitudinal and the crossing
reinforcing bars.
For example, you can display the longitudinal and
the crossing reinforcing bars of different classes in
different colors.

Multiple Wire Size Mesh: Configuration file for reinforcing bar patterns
Use an external text file to define the patterns for longitudinal and crossing
reinforcing bars in the Multiple Wire Size Mesh modeling tool.
Every pattern starts from the Pattern line, followed by, for example, the
pattern name. Each Bar Size and Spacing pair is on a separate row. The Bar
Size and Spacing values are separated by a space.
The file has the following format:
< Pattern > < Name >
<Bar Size> <Spacing>
……………………………
Examples
Pattern 1
10 200
10 200
8 100
8 300
10 400
Pattern 2
10 200
10 200
8 100
8 100
Embedded anchors (8)

Embedded anchors (8) creates one or more embeds in a concrete part.
Objects created
• Embeds
• Thickening parts
• Reinforcing bars
• Hangup bars
• Crane cables

Use for
Two custom anchors.
Bolt anchors that are custom parts,

hangup bars and crane cables.

Cast-in lifting anchors that are custom
parts.
Cast-in wire rope lifting hoops that

are custom parts.
Adjusting anchors are in the front
side. The component is applied two
times.
Selection order
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Pick one point to position the embed.
You can also select multiple points, depending on how the embeds are
divided.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the embeds.

Part
1 Concrete part (wall, column, beam, slab)
2 Point
You can select multiple points.
See also
Embedded anchors (8): Input tab (page 544)
Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab (page 548)
Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab (page 554)
Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab (page 555)
Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab (page 560)
Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab (page 564)
Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab (page 566)
Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab (page 567)
Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab (page 568)
Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab (page 570)
Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab (page 573)
Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab (page 576)

Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab (page 578)
Embedded anchors (8): Input tab

Use the Input tab to control the custom parts used for the embeds, the input
points for placing the embeds and the component direction properties in the
Embedded anchors (8).
Input points sequence

Select the distribution method for the embeds. You can also adjust the
placement of embeds on the Placement tab.
Option Description
Select a concrete part and pick one
position point for the anchor.
Select a concrete part and pick multiple

position points for the anchors.
Select a concrete part and pick three

points to define the plane.
Pick a point to place the embed.
Select a concrete part and pick three

points to define the plane.
Pick multiple points to place the
embeds.
Up direction
Define how the embeds are rotated.

This option is not available if the three-point-plane option is selected from
the Input points sequence list.
You can use the global directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z.
Alternatively, you can use the local directions +X,-X,+Y,-Y,+Z,-Z to define a
specific face of a typical cube-shaped (slab, wall, beam of column) part.
-X local:
+X global:
Embed handling

Select whether the embed is handled as a detail or as a modeling tool.
In general, a detail uses the shape of the main part for positioning the
embeds, and a modeling tool uses the picked points for positioning the
embeds.
Embed offset
Define embed offsets in X- and/or Y-direction, from the picked position points.
Custom part
Select a custom part from the Application and Components catalog to be
used as embed.
• Define the name of the custom component to be used for the embeds. If
the embeds are defined on the Picture tab, leave this box empty.
• Define the name of the configuration file for the custom component.
• Select whether the custom parts must be used for the embeds.
If set to Not, define the embeds’ shape on the Picture tab.
If set to Yes, define the connecting method. Use the Yes and subassembly
option to add the embed as a subassembly to the main part.
• Select how the embeds are rotated. The default direction is 2 point +x.

• Select how the embeds are rotated around a position point.
Positioning examples

Embedded anchors (8): Placement tab
Use the Placement tab to control the placing of the embeds, crane cable
angles and safety factor properties and to select the lifting anchors in the
You can define the input point sequence, lift system and embed dimensions
both in reference line and cross section direction.
Input points sequence

Select the distribution method of the embeds.
Use the a and b boxes on the right to enter the values.
Option Description
Embed is placed on a selected
position point.
Embed is placed on a center of gravity

(COG) point in the part length
direction.
Multiple embeds.
Define dimensions a and b.
Reference = COG

Option Description
Reference = COG
If embeds are likely to be placed
outside the part, then value d is used.
Define dimensions a and b as
percentages of the part length.
Reference = COG
Define dimension a as a percentage

of the part length.
Reference = COG
Define dimension a.
The right embed is calculated from
COG.
Define dimension a as a percentage

of the total part length.
Reference = COG
Embed is placed in the middle of the

part.

Reference = middle of the part


The distances are from the embeds to
the part ends.

The distances are from the embeds to
the part ends.

Option Description
Three embeds in a triangular plate.
Define the vertical distance a from
COG.
Three embeds in a triangular plate.

Define the vertical distance a from
COG as a percentage of the width b.
Lifting system
Select the crane cable lifting system.
Dimensions
Boxes for defining embed dimensions a and b, crane cable angle alpha and
crane cable height h.
Additional embeds
Define additional embeds. Use the boxes on the left and right to define
distances. You can enter multiple distances. Use a space to separate the
values.
Use the middle box to define the number of additional embeds.

Mirroring
• Define the COG (center of gravity) for the selected parts, an assembly, or an
assembly without steel parts.
• Select whether embeds are mirrored.
Mirroring is useful for asymmetric custom part embeds. You can mirror
both in reference line direction and cross section direction.

• Select whether both anchors are created, or only left or right anchor.
Lift.dat configuration file

You can use a configuration file to calculate the lifting capacities of lifting
anchors.
Set Browse configuration file to Yes, and define the full path to the
configuration file. The default file is lift.dat, located in the profil folder.
The lift.dat configuration file contains a list of all custom lifting anchors
belonging to the default Tekla Structures installation. The anchors are sorted
based on fabricator and type, component name and lifting capacity. You can
add more custom components to the list in the configuration file. The file can
be opened in any text editor, for example Notepad.
• Type
Groups where lifting anchors can be selected.

• Type client
Description of types.
• Name CuCoPa
Name of custom component part as listed in the Applications &
components catalog.
• Lift force (kg)
Lifting capacity in kilograms.
• Dir
Direction. Component direction during creation of custom component part.
• Attribute file
Link to the configuration file.
The anchor type can be selected from the list. The first list option corresponds
to the first type (1) in the lift.dat configuration file.
The last list option is All types and use preference list. This option searches
from all groups. A preference can be defined in the Preference type list. Start
with the highest preference group and separate the groups with a space.
Several fabricators have lifting anchors with the same lifting capacity, but with
different anchor lengths. Use the order in the configuration file to define which
anchor is selected. First found anchor with correct capacity = 1, second found
anchor = 2, and so on.
NOTE If you have selected to use a custom part, ensure that the
corresponding custom parts are available in the model. Names of the
custom parts should not contain spaces, because they are not read
from the lift.dat configuration file.
Safety factor
Define the safety factor. The weight to be lifted up is multiplied with this factor
in the anchor calculation.

Embedded anchors (8): Top placement tab
Use the Top placement tab to define the embed offsets and how the
information message box and crane cables are shown in the Embedded
anchors (8).
Offset
Define the embed offsets at both ends of the concrete part. An embed which
is positioned exactly in the middle of the concrete part stays in that position
and does not get an offset.

Show information message boxes
Define whether a message box containing the embed calculation results is
shown. The message box shows the weight to be lifted up, the real lift-up
weight including a safety factor, and the selected anchor.
The message box appears only if you have set Browse Configuration File to
Yes on the Placement tab.
Show crane cables

Define whether crane cables are shown. If set to Yes, crane cables are shown
as construction lines or profiles with the alpha angle, defined on the
Placement tab.

Embedded anchors (8): Thickening tab
Use the Thickening tab to define the thickening of the concrete layer in the
Embedded anchors (8). The thickening is especially useful for sandwich walls
where shells are thickened near lifting anchors.
In the example below, a thickening is added with an extra insulation layer.
Thickening options
Select the side where thickening is applied. You can also define the thickness.
Option Description
No thickening.
Right side thickening.

Thickness is defined from center of the embed.

Option Description
Thickness is defined from side of the embed.

Thickness is defined from side of the shell.
Left side thickening.



Thickening on both sides.




Thickening width and height
Select the thickening part reference, and define the thickening width and
thickening height.
Option Description
Width is defined from center of the embed.
Height is defined from the top side of concrete.
Width is defined from center of the embed.

Height is defined from the bottom side of concrete
shell.
Width is defined from the side of concrete shell.

Height is defined from the top side of concrete
shell.
Width is defined from the side of concrete shell.

Height is defined from the bottom side of embed.
Side view
Option to combine multiple thickening parts into one if the distance between
the thickenings is smaller than or equal to the defined value.

Thickening part
Select how the thickening is connected to the shell. Define the thickening
properties.
Additional insulation
Select how to add insulation to thickening part.

Option Description
Insulation classes Define the class of the insulation which is used in
the concrete shell.
If the defined class number matches the class of
the insulation in the model, then the insulation will
be cut at the location of the thickening.
Foil classes Define the class of the insulation which is used in
the sandwich wall.
If the defined class number matches the class of
the insulation, then the insulation will be cut at the
location of the thickening
Create extra insulation Select whether an additional insulation layer is
created.
Define the thickness of the insulation.
Additional options for the insulation part
Option Description
Extra insulation Select whether the insulation part is added, and how it is
part added.
To Select the part to which the insulation part is added.

Embedded anchors (8): Picture tab
Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and
rotation in the Embedded anchors (8).
Embed dimensions
Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of
the recess, distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed and select
the shape of the cutout.
Select the shape of the cutout.
Option Example
Circle
Square
Half moon x
Half moon y

As negative volume
Select whether cutout profiles are handled as empty cutouts or cutouts with a
formwork part.
Top part/Bottom part

Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees
counterclockwise. You can define also a fixed rotation angle.
Positioning
Select how to position the top and the bottom parts of the embed.
Option Example

Option Example
An example of an anchor that is positioned on top of the concrete part.

How to connect top part to concrete element
Select whether the top part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select how
the part is connected to concrete part.
How to connect bottom part

Select whether the bottom part of embed is created, and if set to Yes, select
how the part is connected to the concrete part.
Embedded anchors (8): Top part tab

Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embedded
anchors (8).

Top part dimensions
Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the
embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the
Parts tab.
Examples
Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on
the Bottom part tab.

Embedded anchors (8): Bottom part tab
Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the
Bottom part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of
the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on
the Parts tab.

Embedded anchors (8): Parts tab
Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part properties and the
formwork part properties in the Embedded anchors (8).
Part properties
Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can
define profiles for each section.

Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile
properties are left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part
and Bottom Part tabs are used.
Option Description
t, b, h Part thickness, width and height.
position number.
Name Name for the part.
You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.

Embedded anchors (8): Reinforcing bar tab
Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the
embeds in the Embedded anchors (8).
You can define the reinforcing bar shape and hook properties, and the
reinforcing bar profile properties in two directions.
Example
Grade, Size
The Grade and Size options work together. Open the reinforcing bar catalog
to select a grade and a size for bar A and bar B.
End conditions left / right

Select the shape of the reinforcing bar.

Bend lengths left / right, Bend radius
Define the bend length for the hooks and the bend radius.
Rotation
Select how to rotate the reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.
Dimensions
Define the reinforcing bar dimensions and the number of bars.

Embedded anchors (8): Hangup bars tab
Use the Hangup bars tab to define additional reinforcing bars for the embeds
in the Embedded anchors (8).
reinforcing bar profile properties.
Example
Grade, Size
to select a grade and a size.


Rotation
Select how to rotate the hangup reinforcing bars and define the rotation angle.

Dimensions

1 Select how to place the hangup
reinforcing bars.
Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and
the angles alpha and beta to
define the dimensions of the
hangup reinforcing bars.
2 Define the number of hangup 0
reinforcing bars.
3 Define the cover thickness.
4 Define the distance between 100 mm
hangup reinforcing bars.

Embedded anchors (8): Horizontal bar tab
Use the Horizontal bar tab to define additional horizontal reinforcing bars for
the embeds in the Embedded anchors (8).
reinforcing bar profile properties.
Example
Grade, Size
to select a grade and a size.



Rotation
Select how to rotate the horizontal reinforcing bars and define the rotation
angle.
Side view
You can create sloped horizontal reinforcing bars. Define the number of bars
and the distance between them. Use value d to define cover thickness for the
top side and value f to define the reinforcing bar length.
Top view
Select a reinforcing bar shape.
Use values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the
dimensions of the horizontal reinforcing bars.

Embedded anchors (8): Special bar tab
Use the Special bar tab to define additional U-shaped reinforcing bars for the
embeds in the Embedded anchors (8).
reinforcing bar profile properties in two directions.
Example
Grade, Size
to select a grade and a size for bar A and bar B.


Rotation
Select how to rotate the U-shaped reinforcing bars and define the rotation
angle.
Shape
Select a reinforcing bar shape.
Use the values a, b, c, d, e, f and the angles alpha and beta to define the
dimensions of the U-shaped reinforcing bars.

Embedded anchors (8): Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to define UDAs and reinforcing bar properties for the
reinforcing bars, hangup bars, special bars and horizontal bars in the
Option Description
Comment Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.
Name Define a name that is shown in drawings and
reports.
Class Define the part class number for the reinforcing
bars.
Serie Define a prefix for the part position number.
Start number Define a start number for the part position
number.

Embedded anchors (8): Bolts
Click the Bolts button to open a dialog box where you can define additional
embeds and embed offsets in the Embedded anchors (8).
Embedded anchors (8) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist.
options, the other options are not taken into account.
Define the number of embeds and distances for Horizontal Dist. and Vertical
Dist.. The position points are defined on the Placement tab.
Use the Sec/first option to define offsets.
With the options on the Placement tab it is possible to place a large number
of embeds in one go. For example, you can create anchors for connecting steel
beams to a wall.

Embed (1008)
Embed (1008) creates one or more embeds in concrete parts. You can create
multiple embeds to be used as lifting anchors with one insertion point.
Objects created
• Embeds
• Reinforcing bars

Use for
Embeds
Selection order
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Pick one point on the part face where you want to insert the embed.
The detail is created automatically when you pick the point.
See also
Embed (1008): Picture tab (page 582)
Embed (1008): Top part tab (page 584)
Embed (1008): Bottom part tab (page 585)
Embed (1008): Parts tab (page 585)
Embed (1008): Placement tab (page 586)
Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab (page 588)
Embed (1008): Advanced tab (page 588)
Embed (1008): Bolts (page 589)
Embed (1008): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the embed dimensions, connection method and
rotation in Embed (1008).
Embed dimensions
Define if the embed needs to be recessed. You can define the dimensions of
the recess, distance from the recess plane to the top of the embed, select the
shape of the cutout and whether the cutouts are handled as empty cutouts or
cutouts with a formwork part.

Option Example
Circle
Half moon X
Square

Option Example
Half moon Y
Top part/Bottom part

Set the part class and rotation. Each option rotates the embed 90 degrees
counterclockwise. You can define also a fixed rotation angle.
How to connect top part to concrete element

Select whether the top part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes, select
how the part is connected to the concrete part.
How to connect bottom part

Select whether the bottom part of the embed is created, and if set to Yes,
select how the part is connected to the concrete part.
Select a custom part from the Applications & components catalog

Select a custom part from the Applications & components catalog to be used
as embed. Use the Yes and subassembly option to add the embed as a
subassembly to the main part. The default direction is 2 point +x.
Embed (1008): Top part tab

Use the Top part tab to define the top part of the embed in the Embed (1008)
detail.
Top part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the top part of the
embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on the
Parts tab.
Examples
Embed top part defined on the Top part tab, embed bottom part defined on
the Bottom part tab.

Embed (1008): Bottom part tab
Use the Bottom part tab to define the bottom part of the embed in the
Embed (1008) detail.
Bottom part dimensions

Use the diameter and height boxes to define the shape of the bottom part of
the embed. You can define the main diameters of parts 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 also on
the Parts tab.
For examples, see Embed (1008): Top part tab (page 584).
Embed (1008): Parts tab

Use the Parts tab to define the embed top and bottom part profiles and the
formwork part properties in Embed (1008).
Part properties
Both the top and the bottom part are build from multiple profiles. You can
define profiles for each section.
Define the part properties for the top, bottom and formwork part. If the profile
properties are left empty, the lengths and diameters defined on the Top Part
and Bottom Part tabs are used.

Option Description
t, b, h Define the part thickness, width and height.
Pos_No Define a prefix and a start number for the part
position number.
Name Define a name for the part.
You can define UDAs for the top and bottom parts.
Embed (1008): Placement tab

Use the Placement tab to define the embed placing, positioning and embed
distribution in the Embed (1008) detail.
Positioning
Select how to position the top and the bottom part of the embed.

Placing
Define the placing type of the embed. Depending on the component insertion
points, multiple embeds can be created.
Option Description
Embed is placed on a selected position point.
Embed is placed on a center of gravity (COG)

point in the part length direction.
Multiple embeds.
Reference = COG
Define dimensions a and b as percentages of
the part length.
Reference = COG
Embed is placed in the middle of the part,

along the length of the concrete part.
Multiple embeds.
Define dimension a as a percentage of the
total part length.
Reference = COG
Embed is placed in the middle of the part.


the part length.

Option Description
The distances are from the embeds to the part
ends.

the part length.
The distances are from the embeds to the part
ends.
Dimensions
Define embed dimensions a and b.
Center of gravity
Define concrete part COG (center of gravity) for the embeds.
Number of extra anchors

The spacing distance between multiple embeds.
Embed (1008): Reinforcing bar tab

Use the Reinforcing bar tab to define extra reinforcing bars for the embeds in
the Embed (1008) detail.
You can define the reinforcing bar shape properties, and the reinforcing bar
profile properties in two directions.
You can define the number, shape, dimension and covering thickness of the
reinforcing bars.

Embed (1008): Advanced tab
Use the Advanced tab to define bar properties for reinforcing bars A and B in
the Embed (1008) detail.
Option Description
Comment Add a comment for the reinforcing bars.
Class Define the part class number for the reinforcing bars.
Serie Define a prefix for the part position number.
Embed (1008): Bolts

Click the Bolts button to open the Bolts dialog box where you can define extra
embeds and embed offsets in the Embed (1008) detail.
Embed (1008) uses only the Horizontal Dist. and Vertical Dist. options, the
other options are not taken into account.
Example
In the example below, the bolt placement uses fixed dimensions from part
edges, defined on the Placement tab. Extra embeds are defined in the Bolts
dialog box.

Optionally, you can also use the Sec/first and Positioning options to define a
distance from the edge of the beam.

Continuous Beam Reinforcement
You can reinforce a continuous beam using a macro called
ContinuousBeamReinforcement. The macro creates main top and bottom
bars, stirrups, fittings, and additional top and bottom bars using system
components. Longitudinal reinforcement (70) creates the main and
additional top and bottom bars, Stirrup reinforcement (67) creates stirrups,
and Battering connection (13) creates fittings.
To reinforce a continuous beam:
1. Click the Applications & components button in the side pane to

open the Applications & components catalog.
2. Click the arrow next to Applications to open the applications list.
3. Double-click ContinuousBeamReinforcement.
4. Select the beams and click Next.
5. Select the columns and click Next.

6. If needed, modify the reinforcement properties, and click Finish.
The reinforcements are created.
Limitations
The beams must be aligned for the reinforcing to be successful.
Example
2.3 Lifting
This section introduces components that can be used for lifting.
Reinforcement 592 Lifting

• Lifting anchor (80) (page 593)
Lifting anchor (80)

Creates two lifting anchors (or anchor groups) for a concrete part and places
them symmetrically on either side of the part’s center of gravity.
Description
1 30% of part length (default)
2 Center of gravity
Objects created
• Lifting anchors (2 or more)
• Recesses for anchors (optional)
Use for

Straight anchor with
straight legs
(Type A in the anchor
properties file, see
Anchor properties from
file (page 598))

Straight anchor with L-
shaped legs
(Type D)
Angle anchor with

straight legs
(Type B)
Angle anchor with L-

shaped legs
(Type C)
Custom components as
anchors
Anchors recessed into

the part.

Skew and/or rotated
anchors
Before you start

Create the concrete part.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box to define the

Picture Anchor dimensions and Lifting anchor properties
locations, number and (page 595)
spacing of anchors,
Custom components as
option to use custom
lifting anchors
components as anchors,
(page 597)
option to create
recesses, recess Creating recesses for
dimensions, skew angle lifting anchors
of anchors, option to (page 597)
rotate anchors, basic
anchor properties
Picking order
1. Concrete part
Lifting anchor properties

The properties of lifting anchors are:
Field Description
Anchor dimensions The options are:
• Use dialog values

Field Description
• Select from file, see Anchor
properties from file (page 598).
You need to enter different
dimensions for different anchor
types.
The distance between an anchor (or
anchor group) and the center of
gravity of the part. Default is 30% of
the part length.
The distance between an anchor (or

group) and the center line of the part.
Number of bars/ The number and spacing of anchors

spacings in a group. If the spacing varies, enter
each value individually.
Custom See Custom components as lifting
Component anchors (page 597).
Custom settings
Up direction
The option to define if the anchors
are recessed into the part. See
Creating recesses for lifting anchors
(page 597).
The skew angle of anchors. Anchor

heads are skewed towards the part’s
center of gravity.
Rotate anchor The option to rotate anchors. The

options are:
• No: Anchors parallel to the part.

Field Description
• Yes: Anchors perpendicular to the
part.
Side The side of the part where Tekla
Structures creates the anchors. The
options are Front, Top, Back, Below,
Start end, and Finish end.
Grade, Size, Name,
Prefix, Start
number, Class
Custom components as lifting anchors

To use custom components as lifting anchors:
1. In the Custom list box, select Yes.
2. Click the ... button next to the Component field to open the Select
component dialog box.
3. Browse for the custom component you want to use as lifting anchor.
The component you select must be a custom part and have two or three
input points.
The component should be created so that the first and the second input
points are on the concrete surface and along the longitudinal axis of the
concrete part.
TIP For more information on how to create custom parts that can be
used as lifting anchors, see Creating standard embeds for global
use.
4. Select the component and click OK.

5. To use saved custom component properties, enter the name of the saved
properties file in the Custom settings field.
6. If the anchor position is not correct, select another option in the Up
direction list box.

Creating recesses for lifting anchors
Select one of the following options to define if the lifting anchors are recessed
into the concrete part:
Option Description
Anchors on the surface of the part.
(Default)
Anchors recessed into the part.
If you choose to recess the anchors into the part, use the following fields to
define the shape and dimensions of the recesses:
Anchor properties from file

You can define lifting anchor properties by entering values in the dialog box
(see Lifting anchor properties (page 595)), or you can create a file containing
the anchor properties you want to use. Use any standard text editor to create
the file and save it as LiftingAnchors.dat in the model folder.
To use the anchor properties you define in a file:
1. In the Lifting anchor (80) dialog box, select Select from file from the
Anchor dimensions list box.
2. Click the ... button to browse for the file.
Example
Create a row in the file for each lifting anchor. Enter the following properties,
separated by spaces:
• Anchor capacity [kN], including safety and material factors

• Type [A, B, C, or D], see the Use for table in Lifting anchor (80) (page 593)
• Grade [characters]
• Size [characters]
• Anchoring length 1 [mm]
• Anchoring length 2 [mm]
• Protruding dimension of the anchor outside the part [mm]
• Penetrating dimension of the anchor inside the part [mm]
• Bending radius [mm]
• Hook length [mm] (0 = no hook)
• Angle of leg 1 [degrees]
• Angle of leg 2 [degrees]
Here is an example of a lifting anchor file (Tekla Structures ignores the
comments enclosed in /* */):
Tekla Structures will use the first anchor in the file that:
1. Has the shape and type you define using the graphic list boxes in the
Lifting anchor (80) dialog box.
2. Can carry the part’s weight with other identical anchors. The total number
of anchors is two times the number you specify in the Number of bars
field.

3 Automated Reinforcement
Layout
This section explains how to create reinforcement using the automated tools
available in Tekla Structures.
• Automated reinforcement layout tools (page 600)
• Double-tee beam (51) (page 601)
• Inverted-tee beam (52) (page 620)
• Ledge beam (53) (page 634)
• Rectangular beam (54) (page 648)
• Ledge spandrel (55) (page 660)
• Rectangular spandrel (56) (page 671)
• Columns (57) (page 682)
• Topping (58) (page 700)
• Wash (59) (page 703)
• Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) (page 707)
• Post-tensioning (61) (page 711)
• Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) (page 714)
• U Bar of concrete slab (63) (page 721)
• Wall panel (64) (page 723)
• Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) (page 734)
Automated Reinforcement Layout 600 Automated reinforcement layout tools

3.1 Automated reinforcement layout tools
automatically create reinforcement layouts for double-tees, beams, and
columns:
Component Icon Description

Double-tee beam Creates reinforcement in
(51) (page 601) double-tee beams.
Inverted-tee beam Creates reinforcement in
(52) (page 620) inverted-tee beams.
Ledge beam (53) Creates reinforcement in ledge
(page 634) beams.
Rectangular beam Creates reinforcement in
(54) (page 648) rectangular beams.
Ledge spandrel (55) Creates reinforcement in ledge
(page 660) spandrels.
Rectangular Creates reinforcement in
spandrel (56) rectangular spandrels.
(page 671)
Columns (57) Creates reinforcement in
(page 682) columns.
Hollowcore Creates hollow core
reinforcement reinforcement.
strands (60)
(page 707)
Post-tensioning (61) Creates post-tensioning
(page 711) profiles.
Edge and Corner Creates edge and corner
Reinforcement (62) reinforcement for concrete
(page 714) slabs.
U Bar of concrete Creates U bar reinforcement for
slab (63) concrete slabs.
(page 721)
3.2 Double-tee beam (51)

Double-tee beam (51) creates flexural, shear, and flange reinforcement for a
double-tee beam.
Objects created
Reinforcement meshes.
Automated Reinforcement Layout 601 Double-tee beam (51)

Use for
Double-tee with
reinforcement.
• Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in

double-tee stems
• Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement in double-tee stems
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in double-tee stems
• Stirrups in double-tee stems
• Reinforcement mesh in the double-tee flange
• Transverse and longitudinal mild reinforcing bar in the ends and sides of
the double-tee flange
• Reinforcement around openings and notches in the double-tee flange
Before you start

• Create a concrete double-tee beam.
• Calculate the required area and quantity of strands and other
reinforcement.
• Define other reinforcement properties, such as debonding and pull values.
Selection order
1. Select the double-tee beam. The reinforcement is created automatically.
Double-tee beam (51): Strand template tab

Use the Strand template tab to define the number and arrangement of
vertical strand planes in each stem, and the vertical distances between grid
points in each plane in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Grid spacing along Y

Define the grid spacing values for the y axis.
Separate the values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance
from the the bottom edge of the stem. Each successive value is the distance to
the next grid point.

TIP Use a multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2
indicates eight holes with a two unit spacing.
Strand planes
Option Description
Single
Double

Option Description
Double
staggered
Triple

Option Description
Triple
staggered
Double-tee beam (51): Strand pattern tab

Use the Strand pattern tab to define the placement of strands in the grid
points in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Same as left
Define the strand input.
• Select Yes to use the row and debond information of the left end for the
strands at the right end of the strand.
• Select No to define an alternate row and debond information at each end
of the strand.
Strand pattern definitions

Define the row and column for each end of the strand using the strand
template positions in the strand grid. Strands may have different grid row
positions at each end, but a strand cannot cross grid columns.
Option Description
Left end - Row Define the horizontal row number in the strand
template for the left end of the strand.
Left end - Define the debond length at the left end of the
Debond strand.
Right end - Row If Same as left is No, define the horizontal row
number in the strand template for the right end
of the strand.

Option Description
Right end - If Same as left is No, define the debond length at
Debond the right end of the strand.
Columns Define a list of one or more column numbers
and/or column ranges in the strand template at
which a strand should be created.
Size Define the size of the strands by selecting if from
the reinforcing bar catalog.
Grade Define the strand grade.
Pull Define the pull force of the strands.
Double-tee beam (51): Strand profile tab

Use the Strand profile tab to define profiles for the strands in the Double-tee
beam (51) reinforcement. All strands in each stem use the same general
profile.
Strand depression profiles
Option Description
One point,
depressed
Two points,
depressed
variable
Two points,
depressed
fixed
Straight

Depress position
Define depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a percentage
of the member length.
Same as A
Define whether depress position B uses the same values as depress position A
in the Two points, depressed variable and Two points, depressed fixed
strand profiles.
Depression spacing type

To define the depression spacing type, select One point, depressed as the
strand profile.
Option Description
Exact location Define the height of the strand in
Strand ht @ position.
Top of depression Define the distance Xd from the
depress point in the outmost
reinforcing bar to the edge of the
stem.
Double-tee beam (51): Longitudinal rebar tab

Use the Longitudinal rebar tab to define longitudinal reinforcement in the
Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Minimum end clear distance C & D

Define the minimum end clearance distance.
Longitudinal rebar definitions
Option Description
Qty Define the quantity of reinforcing bars.
Grade Define the grade of the reinforcing bar.
Size Define the size of the reinforcing bar by
selecting it from the reinforcing bar catalog.
Ht Define the distance from the end of the
reinforcing bar to the face of the strand.
Length type
Define the length type for the reinforcing bar group. Enter additional
information in the L, C, or D fields.

Option Description
Full length Reinforcing bar extends the full length of the
stem, excluding the minimum end clear
distance at each end.
The L, C, and D fields are disabled.
Centered Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar.
The reinforcing bar is place at the center
position in the stem.
The C and D fields are disabled.
Known L, C Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar
and a distance C from the start of the strand.
The D field is disabled.
Known L, C Define a fixed length L for the reinforcing bar
and a distance D from the end of the strand.
The C field is disabled.
Known C, D Define a distance C and D from the end of the
strand.
The L field is disabled.
Double-tee beam (51): Stem mesh tab

Use the Stem mesh tab to control the creation of stem meshes and their
position in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Stem mesh creation

Define whether one, two, or no stem meshes are created.
Stem mesh dimensions

Define the mesh type by selecting it from the mesh type catalog. The mesh
type also defines the mesh grade, mesh size, and bar spacing.

Option Description
End distance, de Define the distance from the
edge of the mesh to the edge of
the stem.
Bottom Define the distance from the
clearance, h1 edge of the mesh to the bottom
edge of the stem.
Specify, h3 Select Top clearance.
Define the distance from the
edge of the mesh to the top edge
of the stem.
Specify, h2 Select Mesh height.
Define the height of the mesh.
Mesh full length Define the mesh full length. The
options are:
• Set length E
Define the left end length and
right end length.
• Full length
• Multiple sheets creates
overlapping meshes along the
short and long sides of the
stem.
Define the overlap on the
Multiple sheets tab.
Left end length, Define the length of the left end
E mesh.
Right end Define the length of the right end
length, F mesh.

Mesh stem position
Option Description
Mesh stem Define the position for both ends of the stem,
position x1 and x2.
Double-tee beam (51): Multiple sheets tab

Use the Multiple sheets tab to define the minimum overlap along the
longitudinal and crossing direction of the meshes in the Double-tee beam
(51) reinforcement. Multiple sheets are created if you have selected Mesh full
length to be Multiple sheets on the Stem mesh tab.
Overlapping
Option Description
Min. overlapping Define the minimum overlap along the
(Short Side) crossing direction of the mesh.
Min. overlapping Define the minimum overlap along the
(Long side) longitudinal direction of the mesh.
Mesh leftover Define whether the leftover is cut, Cut
leftover, or not, Overlap leftover.
Double-tee beam (51): Stem stirrups tab

Use the Stem stirrups tab to define how the the stem stirrups are created in
the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.

Option Description
Same as left end Define whether the same spacing and
reinforcing bar properties are used at the
right end of the stem.
Spacing Define the reinforcing bar spacing.
Use a space to separate spacing values.
Enter a value for each space between the
reinforcing bars. For example, if there are
3 reinforcing bars, enter 2 values.
Bars Define the number of reinforcing bars.
Rebar grade Define the reinforcing bar grade.
If you select the size from the reinforcing
bar catalog, the grade value is not used.
Rebar size Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting
it from the reinforcing bar catalog.
Stirrup shape
Option Description
No stirrups.

Option Description
Open U-shape stirrup with
legs.
180-degree closed stirrups.
Stirrup dimensions

Field Description
Define the length of the stirrup
leg.
middle of the stirrup leg to the
face of the stem.
To define the distance, first select
Top cover from the Specify list.
Define the height of the stirrup.
To define the height, first select
Stirrup height from the Specify
list.
bottom edge of the stirrup to the
bottom edge of the stem.
bottom corner edge of the stirrup
to the side face of the stem.
Field Description
Define the distance from the top
edge of the stirrup to the face of
the stem.
To define the top cover, select
Top cover from the Specify list.

Field Description
Define the height of the stirrup.
To define the height of the
stirrup, select Stirrup height
from the Specify list.
bottom edge of the stirrup to the
bottom edge of the stem.
bottom corner edge of the stirrup
to the side face of the stem.
Double-tee beam (51): Flange tab

Use the Flange tab to define the reinforcing bar mesh for flanges in the
Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Reinforcing bar mesh dimensions
Option Description
1 Define the distance from the top edge of the
mesh to the top edge of the flange.
2 Define the distance between two longitudinal
reinforcing bars.
3 Define the distance from the bottom edge of
the mesh to the bottom edge of the flange.
4 Define the distance from the side edge of the
mesh to the side edge of the flange.

Option Description
5 Define the number of reinforcing bars.
6 Define the reinforcing bar spacing.
Use a space to separate spacing values. Enter a
value for each space between the reinforcing
bars. For example, if there are 3 reinforcing
bars, enter 2 values.
7 Define the maximum spacing between
reinforcing bars.

Define the reinforcing bar properties for both the transverse (crossing) and
longitudinal reinforcing bars.
Option Description
Size Define the reinforcing bar size by selecting it
from the reinforcing bar catalog.
Grade Define the reinforcing bar grade.
If you select the size from the reinforcing bar
catalog, the grade value is not used.
Mesh catalog type Define the mesh type by selecting if from the
mesh catalog.
Ht Define the height of the mesh.
Mesh full length Define whether the mesh is full length or not.
If you select No, define the end lengths for
the mesh.
Left end length, E Define the left end length of the mesh.
Right end length, Define the right end length of the mesh.
F
Double-tee beam (51): Notch/Opening tab

Use the Notch/Opening tab to define the reinforcement around the notches
and openings in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Notch/opening reinforcement properties
Option Description
Min notch dimension, D Define the minimum notch
dimension.

Option Description
Edge distance, de Define the distance from
the reinforcing bar to the
corner of the opening.
Extension, L Define the distance from
the notch opening to the
end of the reinforcing bar.
Number of bars Define the number of
reinforcing bars.
Spacing Define the reinforcing bar
spacing.
Use a space to separate
spacing values. Enter a
value for each space
between the reinforcing
bars. For example, if there
are 3 reinforcing bars,
enter 2 values.
Rebar size Define the reinforcing bar
size by selecting it from the
reinforcing bar catalog.
Rebar grade Define the reinforcing bar
grade.
If you select the size from
the reinforcing bar catalog,
the grade value is not used.
Corner notch reinforcement
Option Description
Diagonal reinforcement
around the corner notches.

Option Description
Parallel reinforcement
around the corner notches.
Side/end notch reinforcement
Option Description
around the side or end
notch.
notch.
Define both the horizontal
and vertical reinforcement
properties.

Opening reinforcement
Option Description
around the opening.
around the opening.
Define both the horizontal
and vertical reinforcement
properties.
Double-tee beam (51): Edge reinforcement tab

Use the Edge reinforcement tab to create edge reinforcement for the
openings in the Double-tee beam (51) reinforcement.
Reinforcement bar properties
Option Description
Number of bars Define the number of reinforcing bars.
Spacing Define the reinforcement bar spacing.
Use a space to separate spacing values.
Enter a value for each space between
the reinforcing bars. For example, if
there are 3 reinforcing bars, enter 2
values.
Rebar size Define the reinforcing bar size by
selecting it from the reinforcing bar
catalog.
Rebar grade Define the reinforcing bar grade.
If you select the size from the reinforcing
bar catalog, the grade value is not used.

Section view
Option Description
1 Define the distance from the end
of the reinforcing bar to the edge
of the stem.
2 Define the distance from the top
edge of the reinforcing bar to the
face of the stem.
3 Define the distance of the
reinforcing bar from the side face
of the stem.
Enter a positive value to move
the reinforcing bar closer to the
outer edge of the stem.
Enter a negative value to move
the reinforcing bar to the inner
edge of the stem.
bottom edge of the reinforcing
bar to the bottom edge of the
stem.
Plan view

Option Description
1 Define the distance from the middle of the
outmost reinforcing bar to the notch/opening
reinforcement.
3.3 Inverted-tee beam (52)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for an inverted-tee
beam.
Reinforcement created
• Prestress straight or depressed strands for flexural reinforcement in the
inverted tee stem
• Mild longitudinal bars for flexural reinforcement
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem
• Reinforcement mesh in the inverted-tee ledges
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the inverted-tee ledges
• Mild reinforcement in the top of the beam that will be used later to create a
composite member
• Mild reinforcement in the ends of the beam
Use for
Situation
Straight and depressed prestress strands
Varying strand pattern and strand number
To define longitudinal reinforcement in the stem
When you want reinforcement mesh in the stem
Automated Reinforcement Layout 620 Inverted-tee beam (52)

Situation
When you want stirrups in the beam stem
To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledges
To use stirrups in the beam ledges
To define reinforcement for composite members
To add mild reinforcement to the beam ends
Before you start

• Create the concrete inverted-tee beam.
reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Inverted-tee beam automated reinforcement
layout (52) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this
component creates:

Strand template The allowable grid Strand template
points for strands (page 623)
within the beam cross
section.
Strand pattern The actual strand Strand pattern
definitions. (page 623)
Strand profile The vertical profile for Strand profile
strands in the beam. (page 624)
Longitudinal Definitions for Reinforcing bar
rebar additional mild steel and bar group
reinforcement in the properties
beam. Reinforcement
may be defined with a
variety of parametric
forms.
Stem mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
mesh to be used in the and bar group
beam stem. Mesh can properties
run the full length of
the beam, or be placed
in short sections at
either end of the
beam. Mesh size,
spacing, clearances,

and length are all
entered here.
Stem stirrups Definitions for the Stem stirrups
bent bar (page 628)
reinforcement in the
beam stem, including
stirrup shape, bar size,
end clearance, number
of bars, and bar
spacing in five zones
beam.
Ledge mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
mesh to be used to and bar group
reinforce the beam properties
ledges. Mesh runs the
full length of the
beam. Mesh size,
spacing, and
clearances are all
entered here.
Ledge rebar Definitions for the Ledge rebar
bent bar (page 630)
beam ledges, including
of bars, and bar
beam.
Composite Definitions for the Reinforcing bar
bent bar and bar group
reinforcement added properties
to the top of the beam
stem for subsequent
creation of composite
elements. Bar size,
embedment,
projection, cover, end
clearance, number of
bars, and bar spacing
in three zones along
the length of the beam
are all defined here.

End rebar Definitions for the Reinforcing bar
beam ends, including
position, orientation,
bar size and length,
cover, and end
clearance. Up to 6
horizontal and 6
vertical bars may be
defined.
Attributes Name, class, and Reinforcing bar
numbering properties and bar group
of the strands, properties
stirrups, and mesh
bars.
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the beam, along
with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands are
defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template
allows for a mixture of regular and irregular grid points with respect to both
the horizontal and vertical axes.
Use the X- and Y-Axis Grid Definition fields to define a list of distances between
successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced points, you may use a
multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.
Strand pattern
You place strands in the beam by defining the grid points from the strand
template for each end of the strand element. You also define size, and other
reinforcement properties for the strands here.
A row of data on this tab can be thought of as a group. All the strands defined
in one group share the same properties and start and stop rows. A group may
also refer to a list of columns in the strand template, letting you use one group
definition to create a set of strands.

Strand profile
Strands may be straight (though not necessarily horizontal), or depressed,
using one or two control points. Note that all strands use the same general
profile.
Use the following options to define the strand profile:
Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
2-pt depressed
variable

Option Description
2-pt depressed
fixed
You specify the depress positions A and B as either a fixed distance or as a

percentage of the member length.
Longitudinal rebar
This tab allows you to define any longitudinal reinforcement for the member.
Up to 10 reinforcing bar definitions may be defined.
For each longitudinal reinforcing bar you can:

• Specify the minimum clear end distance for “C” and “D”.
• Select the reinforcing bar size.
• Select the reinforcing bar grade.
• Specify the horizontal location, “Xloc”, of the reinforcing bar.
• Specify the vertical location, “Yloc”, of the reinforcing bar.
• Select a value from the Length Definition drop-down combo-box to define
the end constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length.

Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in
the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:
Full Length - The reinforcing bar extends the full length of the member (minus
the minimum clear end distance on each end). The L, C, and D fields are
disabled.
Centered - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar which the
component will center in the length of the member. The C and D fields are
disabled.
Known L, C - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a
distance C from the start of the member. The D field is disabled.
Known L, D - You can specify a fixed length, “L” for the reinforcing bar and a
distance D from the end of the member. The C field is disabled
Known C, D - You can specify a distance C from the start of the member and a
distance D from the end of the member. The L field is disabled.
Values for L, C, and D all take the natural geometry of the beam ends (skewed
and/or battered) into account. Notches in the end of a beam, though they will
naturally clip any bar they intersect, will not affect the L, C, and D values.
• Specify the relative location for longitudinal bars using the following icons:
Top and bottom left:
Top and bottom right:
Top and bottom left

and right:
Top left:
Top right:
Top left and right:
Bottom left:

Bottom right:
Bottom left and right:
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.
• Select the mesh size.

• Select the mesh grade.
• Specify the right side clear cover, “C1”.
• Specify the left side clear cover, “C2”.

• Specify the bottom clear cover, “C3”.
• Specify the top clear cover, “C4”.
• Specify the left and right end distances, “d1” and “d2”, to the first wire.
• Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member
or is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the
mesh extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end
distances and the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list,
mesh can be defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem
holes are present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole
using the top cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in inverted-tee beams:
Option Description
No stirrup
90-degree closed
stirrup
135-degree closed
stirrup

Option Description
U-Bar pairs
135-degree open
stirrup

Ledge mesh
This tab allows you to define ledge mesh reinforcement in the member.

• Specify the mesh right side cover, “C1”.
• Specify the mesh left side cover, “C2”.
• Specify the mesh bottom cover, “C3”.
• Specify the mesh top cover, “C4”.
• Specify the left end distance to first wire, “d1”.
• Specify the right end distance to first wire, “d2”.
Mesh extends the full length of the spandrel, less the “d1” and “d2” end
dimensions.

Ledge rebar
Use the following options to define the ledge stirrups in inverted-tee beams:
Option Description
No stirrup
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup
135-degree stirrup

Composite
This tab allows you to define reinforcement that will be used later to create a
composite member component.

• Specify the reinforcing bar embedment, “A”.
• Specify the reinforcing bar projection, “B”.
• Specify the side cover, “C1”.
• Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance, “d2”, from the
end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.
• Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “S1”, of the first group of reinforcing
bar at the left end.
• Specify the quantity, “Y”, and spacing, “S2”, of the first group of reinforcing
bar at the right end.
• Specify the maximum reinforcing bar spacing, “S3”, to be used between the
end groups.

End rebar
This tab allows you to define reinforcement at the ends of the member.
• Specify up to 6 horizontal and 6 vertical end U-bars.

• Specify the clearance for the horizontal U-bars.
For each horizontal U-bar:
• Specify the height, “Ht”, of the horizontal U-bar.
• Select the reinforcing bar size and grade.
• Specify the reinforcing bar side cover, “C1”.
• Specify the reinforcing bar “leg length”.
• Specify the end clearance for the vertical U-bars.
For each vertical U-bar:
• Specify the horizontal location, “X loc”, of the vertical U-bar.

• Specify the reinforcing bar top cover, “C2”.
• Specify the reinforcing bar bottom cover,”C3”.
Attributes
This tab lets you define the general attribute information for the
reinforcement created by the component.
For each attribute:

• Specify the Serie value.
• Specify the Starting Number for the category.
• Enter the category name.
• Enter the Class number
3.4 Ledge beam (53)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge beam.
beam stem
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam stem
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam stem
• Reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge
Automated Reinforcement Layout 634 Ledge beam (53)

• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam ledge
composite member
Use for
Situation
When you want stirrups in the beam stem
To use reinforcement mesh in the beam ledge
To use stirrups in the beam ledge
Before you start

• Create the concrete ledge beam.
reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Ledge beam automated reinforcement layout
(53) dialog box to define the properties of the objects that this component
creates:


section.
rebar additional mild steel and bar group
beam. Reinforcement
forms.
Stem mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
beam stem. Mesh can properties
the beam, or be placed
in short sections at
either end of the
beam. Mesh size,
spacing, clearances,
and length are all
entered here.
bent bar (page 643)
beam stem, including
of bars, and bar
beam.
Ledge mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
reinforce the beam properties
ledge. Mesh runs the
full length of the
beam. Mesh size,
spacing, and
clearances are all
entered here.
Ledge rebar Definitions for the Ledge rebar
bent bar (page 645)

beam ledge, including
of bars, and bar
beam.
Composite Definitions for the Reinforcing bar
reinforcement added properties
stem for subsequent
elements. Bar size,
embedment,
End rebar Definitions for the Reinforcing bar
cover, and end
clearance. Up to 6
horizontal and 6
defined.
stirrups, and mesh
bars.
Strand template

Strand pattern
Strand profile
profile.
Option Description
Straight

Option Description
1-pt depressed
2-pt depressed
variable
2-pt depressed
fixed

Longitudinal rebar

For each longitudinal reinforcing bar, you can.
Depending on the your choice, additional information is then entered in
the “L”, “C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:
disabled.
disabled.
Top and bottom left

and right:
Top left:

Top right:
Top left and right:
Bottom left:
Bottom right:

Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the member stem.


Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams:
Option Description
No stirrup
90-degree closed
stirrup
135-degree closed
stirrup
U-Bar pairs

Option Description
135-degree open
stirrup
Ledge mesh


dimensions.
Ledge rebar
Use the following options to define the ledge reinforcing bars in ledge beams:
Option Description
No stirrup
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup

Option Description
135-degree stirrup
Composite


• Specify the side cover, “C1”.
• Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance,”d2”, from the end
of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.
end groups.
End rebar

• Specify the end clearance for the horizontal U-bars.

Attributes
For each attribute:

Automated Reinforcement Layout 648 Rectangular beam (54)

3.5 Rectangular beam (54)
Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular beam.
beam
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in the beam
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the beam
composite member
Use for
Situation
To define longitudinal reinforcement in the beam
When you want reinforcement mesh in the beam
When you want stirrups in the beam
Before you start

• Create the concrete rectangular beam.
reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Rectangular beam automated reinforcement
component creates:

section.
Longitudinal Definitions for Longitudinal
rebar additional mild steel rebar
reinforcement in the (page 676)
beam. Reinforcement
forms.
Stem mesh Definition for the Stem mesh
mesh to be used in the (page 678)
beam. Mesh can run
the full length of the
beam, or be placed in
short sections at either
end of the beam. Mesh
size, spacing,
clearances, and length
are all entered here.
bent bar (page 656)
beam, including
of bars, and bar
beam.
Composite Definitions for the
bent bar
reinforcement added
for subsequent

elements. Bar size,
embedment,
End rebar Definitions for the
bent bar
cover, and end
clearance. Up to 6
horizontal and 6
defined.
Attributes Name, class, and
numbering properties
of the strands,
stirrups, and mesh
bars.
Strand template
Use the fields Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y to define a list
of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced
points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.

Strand pattern
Strand profile
profile.
Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed

Option Description
2-pt depressed
variable
2-pt depressed
fixed

Longitudinal rebar


Depending on your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”,
“C”, or “D” fields. There are five choices:
disabled.
disabled.
Top and bottom left

and right:
Top left:
Top right:
Top left and right:

Bottom left:
Bottom right:
Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the beam.


Specify whether the mesh is continuous over the full length of the member or
is used only at the spandrel end(s). If Yes is selected from the list, the mesh
extends the full length of the member (less the d1 and d2 end distances and
the L1/L2 fields are disabled). If No is selected from the list, mesh can be
defined at each end using the “L1” and “L2” fields. If any stem holes are
present, the component should “trim” the mesh around the hole using the top
cover (C3) dimension as a clearance.
Stem stirrups
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in ledge beams:
Option Description
No stirrup
90-degree closed
stirrup

Option Description
135-degree closed
stirrup
U-Bar pairs
135-degree open
stirrup

Composite

• Specify the side cover, ‘C1”.
• Specify the left end distance, “d1”, and right end distance, “d2”, from the
end of the beam to the centerline of the first reinforcing bar.
end groups.

End rebar


Attributes
For each attribute:

3.6 Ledge spandrel (55)

Creates typical flexural, shear, and ledge reinforcement for a ledge spandrel.
spandrel stem
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel stem
• Reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel ledge
Automated Reinforcement Layout 660 Ledge spandrel (55)

• Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel
Use for
Situation
When you want stirrups in the spandrel stem
To use reinforcement mesh in the spandrel ledge
To use stirrups in the spandrel ledge
To add mild reinforcement to the spandrel ends
Before you start

• Create the concrete ledge spandrel.
reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Ledge spandrel automated reinforcement
component creates:

Strand Template The allowable grid Strand template
within the spandrel
cross section.
Strand Pattern The actual strand Strand pattern

Strand Profile The vertical profile for Strand profile
strands in the (page 664)
spandrel.
Rebar additional mild steel and bar group
spandrel.
Reinforcement may be
defined with a variety
of parametric forms.
Stem Mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
spandrel stem. Mesh properties
can run the full length
of the spandrel, or be
placed in short
sections at either end.
Mesh size, spacing,
Stem Stirrups Definitions for the Stem stirrups
bent bar (page 667)
spandrel stem,
including stirrup
shape, bar size, end
in eight zones along
the length of the
spandrel.
Ledge Mesh Definition for the Reinforcing bar
reinforce the spandrel properties
ledge. Mesh runs the
full length of the
spandrel. Mesh size,
spacing, and
clearances are all
entered here.
Ledge Stirrups Definitions for the Ledge rebar
bent bar (page 669)
spandrel ledge,
including stirrup
shape, bar size, end

in eight zones along
the length of the
spandrel.
End Rebar Definitions for the Reinforcing bar
spandrel ends,
including position,
orientation, bar size
and length, cover, and
end clearance. Up to 6
horizontal bars may be
defined.
stirrups, and mesh
bars.
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel,
along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands
are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template
Use the Grid spacing along X and Grid spacing along Y fields to define a list
of distances between successive planes and grid points. For regularly spaced
points, you may use a multiplier value, for example, 4*6”.
Strand pattern
You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand

Strand profile
profile.
Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
2-pt depressed
variable
2-pt depressed
fixed


Longitudinal rebar

• Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end
constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on
your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D”
fields. There are five choices:
disabled.
disabled.

Top and bottom left

and right:
Top left:
Top right:
Top left and right:
Bottom left:
Bottom right:

Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel.
Stem stirrups
Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the
definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same
properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups.
The following stirrup types may be used in ledge spandrels:
Option Description
90-degree closed
stirrup
135-degree closed
stirrup

Option Description
Lapped pair
Fixed pair
Open U

Ledge mesh

dimensions.

Ledge rebar
Ledge stirrups are defined in groups, using the same concept as stem stirrups.
The following ledge stirrup types may be used:
Option Description
Bent U-bar stirrup
Bent U-Bar pairs
90-degree stirrup
135-degree stirrup
End rebar

Attributes
For each attribute:

Automated Reinforcement Layout 671 Rectangular spandrel (56)

3.7 Rectangular spandrel (56)
Creates typical flexural and shear reinforcement for a rectangular spandrel.
spandrel
• Mesh for shear reinforcement in the spandrel
• Stirrups for shear reinforcement in the spandrel
• Mild reinforcement in the ends of the spandrel
Use for
Situation More
information
Straight and depressed prestress
strands
Varying strand pattern and strand
number
To define longitudinal reinforcement in
the spandrel
When you want reinforcement mesh in
the spandrel
When you want stirrups in the spandrel
To add mild reinforcement to the
spandrel ends
Before you start

• Create the concrete rectangular spandrel.
reinforcement.

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Rectangular spandrel automated
reinforcement layout (56) dialog box to define the properties of the objects
that this component creates:

Strand Template The allowable grid Strand template
within the spandrel
cross section.
Strand Pattern The actual strand Strand pattern
Strand Profile The vertical profile for Strand profile
strands in the (page 675)
spandrel.
Longitudinal Definitions for Longitudinal
Rebar additional mild steel rebar
reinforcement in the (page 676)
spandrel.
Reinforcement may be
defined with a variety
of parametric forms.
Stem Mesh Definition for the Stem mesh
mesh to be used in the (page 678)
spandrel. Mesh can
the spandrel, or be
placed in short
sections at either end.
Mesh size, spacing,
Stem Stirrups Definitions for the Stem stirrups
bent bar (page 679)
spandrel, including
of bars, and bar
spacing in eight zones
spandrel.
End Rebar Definitions for the End rebar
bent bar (page 680)
spandrel ends,

including position,
orientation, bar size
and length, cover, and
end clearance. Up to 6
horizontal bars may be
defined.
Attributes Name, class, and Attributes
numbering properties (page 682)
of the strands,
stirrups, and mesh
bars.
Strand template
You can specify the arrangement of vertical strand planes in the spandrel,
along with the vertical distances between grid points in each plane. Strands
are defined by their row and column number within the grid, but the template
Strand pattern
You place strands in the spandrel by defining the grid points from the strand

Strand profile
profile.
Option Description
Straight
1-pt depressed
2-pt depressed
variable
2-pt depressed
fixed

NOTE If no specific value is given the “Ht” shall be calculated as Minimum. So the
strand will be straight unless it needs to be depressed because of the above
strand going below the straight position.
Longitudinal rebar

• Select a value from the Length Definition list box to define the end
constraints of the reinforcing bar within the member length. Depending on
your choice, additional information is then entered in the “L”, “C”, or “D”
fields. There are five choices:
disabled.

disabled.
Top and bottom left

and right:
Top left:
Top right:
Top left and right:
Bottom left:
Bottom right:

Stem mesh
This tab allows you to define mesh reinforcement in the stem of the spandrel.


Stem stirrups
Stirrups are defined in groups, and a row of data on this tab represents the
definition for a group. All the stirrups defined in one group share the same
properties, including stirrup type. Clear cover definitions apply to all groups.
Use the following options to define the stem stirrups in rectangular spandrels:
Option Description
90-degree closed
stirrup
135-degree closed
stirrup
U-Bar lapped pairs

Option Description
U-Bar fixed pairs
Open U stirrup

End rebar


Attributes
For each attribute:

3.8 Columns (57)

Creates typical longitudinal and tie reinforcement for a column.
• Prestress strands for longitudinal reinforcement in a column
• Mild longitudinal bars for longitudinal reinforcement in a column
Automated Reinforcement Layout 682 Columns (57)

• Reinforcement for composite rectangular columns
Use for
Situation More
information
To define longitudinal prestress
reinforcement size and location
To define longitudinal mild
reinforcement size and extent
To define tie size and spacings
Before you start

• Create the column.
reinforcement.
• Define other reinforcement properties.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Column layout dialog box to define the

Strand A description of the Strand
reinforcement geometric layout of reinforcement
pre-stress strands in (page 684)
the column, as well as
other attributes of the
strands
Longitudinal The definition of the Longitudinal
rebar longitudinal rebar
reinforcement to be (page 685)

used in the primary
section of the column.
Primary ties The definition of the Primary ties
ties used in the (page 690)
primary section of the
column, including size,
shape, geometry, and
spacing.
Secondary The definition of the Secondary
reinforcement longitudinal bar and reinforcement
ties to be used in the (page 697)
secondary section(s) of
the column.
Circular column The definition of the Circular column
reinforcement (page 699)
parametrics for
circular columns.
Attributes The definition ofthe Attributes
general properties for (page 700)
the reinforcement
created by the
component.

Strand reinforcement
This tab lets you define the strand reinforcement in the primary section of the
column. Up to 8 strands may be defined.
• Select the size of the strand at each location.

• Select the grade of strand at each location.
• Specify the pull for each strand.
• Specify strand-centerline-to-surface dimension, “de”. For corner strands
1-4, this distance defines the strand centerline position relative to both
adjacent column faces. For strands 5-8, the strand is located on the face
centerline, offset from the face by distance “de”.
Longitudinal rebar
This tab lets you define the longitudinal reinforcement in the primary section
of the column. Longitudinal bars are presumed to run the entire length of the
column (less the End Clearance distance at each end of the member).

Standard longitudinal reinforcement configurations are provided in a
convenient drop-down, and up to 12 bars may be defined.
• Select the desired reinforcement pattern from the drop-down combo-box.

There are 10 predefined patterns to choose from.

4 Bar
Symmetrical
6 Bar X-X
6 Bar Y-Y

8 Bar
Symmetrical
8 Bar X-X
8 Bar Y-Y

10 Bar X-X
10 Bar Y-Y
12 Bar X-X

12 Bar Y-Y
• Specify the reinforcing bar-centerline-to-surface dimension, “de”. This value

is used to locate most of the bars in each pattern.
• Specify the dimension, “d1”, which is used in only the 10- and 12-bar
patterns to locate off-axis bars. This value should default to the half the
appropriate primary section dimension less “de”, divided by 2.
• Specify the end clear distance for both ends of the longitudinal reinforcing
bars.
• Select the size of the bar at each bar location.
• Select the grade of bar at each bar location.

Primary ties
This tab lets you define the reinforcing ties in the primary section of the
column. Primary ties are distributed along the entire length of the column.
Standard tie configurations are provided in a convenient list.
• First select the desired tie reinforcement pattern from the list box. There
are 16 predefined patterns to choose from. The longitudinal reinforcing bar
selection will affect which of these patterns can be used. The component
will verify that the primary tie configuration correlates with the primary
longitudinal reinforcement configuration. Furthermore, the location or
stirrup in section may depend on the location of longitudinal bars (e.g. 8-
bar X-X).

4 Bar Symmetrical
6/10 Bar X-X (A)
6/10 Bar X-X (B)

6/10 Bar Y-Y (A)
6/10 Bar Y-Y (B)
8 Bar Symmetrical
(A)

8 Bar Symmetrical
(B)
8 Bar Symmetrical
(C)
8 Bar X-X (A)

8 Bar X-X (B)
8 Bar Y-Y (A)
8 Bar Y-Y (B)

12 Bar X-X (A)
12 Bar X-X (B)
12 Bar Y-Y (A)

12 Bar Y-Y (B)
• Select the size of the tie bar.

• Select the grade of the tie bar.
• Select the tie hook type. The options are 90° and 135°.
• Specify the minimum clear cover, “c1”. The component must verify that with
the clear cover specified the tie properly fits around the longitudinal
reinforcing bar with the locations specified in previous tab.
• Specify the distance, “d1”, to the centerline of the first tie from the top and
bottom. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the bottom of columns. The
component should interpret the “d1” distance to be above those pockets.
• Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “s1”, of the first group of ties at top
and bottom.
• Then specify the maximum spacing, “s2”, of primary ties throughout the
length of the column.

Secondary reinforcement
This tab allows you to define longitudinal and tie reinforcement in the
secondary section(s) of the column. The component will automatically
determine these sections from the column geometry.
• Select the bar size for the secondary longitudinal bars.

• Enter the grade for the secondary longitudinal bars.
• Specify the minimum clear cover, “c2”, from the secondary longitudinal bars
to the column face.
• Specify the end clear distance from the top and bottom of each secondary
section to the ends of the secondary longitudinal bars.
• Select the bar size for the secondary ties.
• Enter the grade for the secondary ties.
• Select the secondary tie hook type. The options are 90° and 135°.
• Specify the distance, “d1”, to first and second secondary ties from the top
and bottom of the “secondary” section.

Circular column
This tab allows you to define the reinforcement parametrics for circular
columns. The component will only create reinforcement in constant diameter
members. Tapered columns and circular columns with ledges are not
supported.
• First specify the desired number of main bars in the column, from 4-12.
• Select the size of the main bar.
• Select the grade of the main bar.
• Select the size of the tie bar.
• Select the grade of the tie bar.
• Specify the tie clear cover, “c1”.
• Specify the tie lap dimension.

• Specify the top end distance, “d1”, from the centerline of the first tie to the
top of the column.
• Specify the bottom end distance, “d2”, from the centerline of the last tie to
the bottom of the column. Often there are anchor bolt pockets at the
bottom of columns. The component should interpret the “d2” distance to
be above those pockets.
• Specify the quantity, “X”, and spacing, “s1”, of the first group of ties at top
and bottom.
• Specify the maximum spacing, “s2”, of primary ties throughout the length
of the column.
Attributes
This tab allows you to define the general attribute information for the
For each category:

• Specify the Start number for the category.
• Minimum cut size: Define the minimum length of the boundary of cut/hole,
to be considered as cut in this field. The default value is 200 mm.
Automated Reinforcement Layout 700 Topping (58)

3.9 Topping (58)
Use the Topping (58) component to model typical toppings along with their
typical reinforcement.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Topping (58) dialog box to define the properties
of the objects that this component creates:

Topping Method of topping, Topping
configuration of elevation/ (page 701)
thickness of topping, mesh
to be created in the topping.
Advanced Thickness of topping at each Advanced
point selected while defining (page 703)
polygonal area for topping.
Attributes The required mesh and
concrete attributes.

Topping
Option Description
Elevation is specified Select the method to use to
specifiy the elevation of the
exterior boundary surface of the
topping:
• Absolute elevation, EL: you
can to specify the top surface
elevation relative to elevation
0’-0’’.
• Relative thickness, H: you can
specify the top surface as a
uniform thickness above the
underlying precast floor units.
• Use control points: Tekla
Structures uses the polygon
input points as the actual 3
dimensional nodes of the top

Option Description
surface of the toppings. Use
this option to place a topping
over any sloped surface.
Elevation value Enter an appropriate value based
on the choice picked in the list box
above. This input box is grayed out
if you have selected the Use
control points option.
Topping configuration Specify whether the topping is
integral with the underlying
precast unit (monolithic) or
poured on site.
Concrete material Specify the concrete strength for
the topping, from the material
catalog.
Reinforcing mesh Select the mesh reinforcement
from the mesh catalog.
Advanced
Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node:
• Control point indexes: you can specify one control point or multiple
control point indexes simultaneously.
• Elevation: You can overwrite Elevation (thickness at individual control
points.
Automated Reinforcement Layout 703 Wash (59)

3.10 Wash (59)
Use the Wash (59) component to model typical washes along with their typical
reinforcement.
Use for
Before you start

Create slabs using the Create concrete beam command or with a slab
component.
NOTE You cannot use the Wash (59) component in slabs that are created as
a polygon plates, such as slabs created with Create concrete slab
command.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Wash (59) dialog box to define the properties of
the objects that this component creates:

Wash Method of wash, Wash
configuration of the (page 705)
elevation/thickness and size
of wash, recess depth, mesh
to be created in the wash.
Advanced Thickness of wash at each Advanced
point selected while defining (page 707)
the exterior and interior
boundary.
Attributes The required mesh and
concrete attributes.

Picking order
1. Select the slab objects. If the slabs are created with a component, activate
the Select objects in components switch before selecting slabs.
2. Click middle mouse button.
3. Pick points counterclockwise to indicate external boundary (points 1 to 4
in the picture above).
4. Click middle mouse button outside the external boundary.
5. Pick points clockwise to indicate internal boundary (points 5 to 8 in the
picture above).
6. Click middle mouse button somewhere along the internal boundary.

Wash
Specify the wash step dimensions, D1 and D2, to define the top elevation of
the internal boundary relative to the surface of the precast floor units. Note
that D1 and/or D2 can be zero (0.00).
Option Description
Elevation is specified Select the method to use to
specifiy the elevation of the
exterior boundary surface of the
wash:
• Absolute elevation, EL: you
can to specify the top surface
elevation relative to elevation
0’-0’’.
• Relative thickness, H: you can
specify the top surface as a
uniform thickness above the
underlying precast floor units.

Option Description
• Use control points: Tekla
Structures uses the polygon
input points as the actual 3
dimensional nodes of the top
surface of the wash. Use this
option to place a wash over
any sloped surface.
Elevation value Enter an appropriate value based
on the choice picked in the list box
above. This input box is grayed out
if you have selected the Use
control points option.
Topping configuration Specify whether the wash is
integral with the underlying
precast unit (monolithic) or
poured on site.
Concrete material Specify the concrete strength for
the wash from the material
catalog.
Reinforcing mesh Select the mesh reinforcement
from the mesh catalog.
Advanced
Use the options on this tab to alter the elevation of any individual node:
• Exterior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or
multiple control point indexes simultaneously.
• Elevation: you can specify the actual elevation/ thickness (thickness at
individual control points).
• Interior control point indexes: you can specify one control point or
multiple control point indexes simultaneously.
• D1: you can change the thickness at each interior control point.
• D2: you can change the recess depth at individual control point.
3.11 Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)

The Hollowcore “Automated Reinforcement Generator” (HC-ARG) component
enables Tekla Structures to accurately model all typical hollowcore
Automated Reinforcement Layout 707 Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60)

reinforcement. Use the tabs in the component dialog box to load a previously
saved HC (Hollowcore) reinforcement scheme, or new reinforcement scheme.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Hollowcore reinforcement strands (60) dialog
box to define the properties of the objects that this component creates:

Strand The allowable grid points Strand template
template for strands within the (page 708)
stem cross section. You
can specify the number
and arrangement of
vertical strand planes in
each stem, along with the
vertical distances between
grid points in each plane.
Strands are defined by
their row and column
number within the grid,
but the template allows
for a mixture of regular
and irregular grid points
with respect to the vertical
axis.
Strand The actual strand Strand pattern
pattern definitions. You place (page 709)
strands in the stem by
defining the grid points
from the strand template
for each end of the strand
element. You also define
size, and other
reinforcement properties
for the strands.
Attributes Strands, Store strand Attributes
code, Strand code, Create (page 711)
strand at voids.
Strand template
Creates strands located at specific grid positions.
Grid Spacing along X:

Hollowcore reinforcement created
• Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating
values with commas or spaces.
• Multiplier values may be applied to define a repeating series of values, e.g.,
8*2 indicates 8 holes with a 2 unit spacing.
• First value is the distance from the left edge of the plank; each successive
value is the distance to the next grid point.
Grid Spacing along Y:
• Use grid spacing to define grid spacing values for the X axis, separating
values with commas or spaces.
• First value is the distance from the bottom edge of the beam; each
successive value is the distance to the next grid point.

Strand pattern
Creates the vertical row number for the strand.
Hollowcore strand pattern created

• Use grid spacing to specify grid spacing values for the X-axis, separating
values with commas.
• Enter one or more column numbers and/or column ranges in the strand
template at which strand should be generated.
• Select strand size generated for this strand group.
• Select strand grade generated for this strand group.
• Specify strand pull for the strand group.

Attributes
Specify properties for strands, store strand codes, strand code, and create
strand at voids.
Hollowcore basic reinforcement properties

• Strands – Specify all appropriate information in this tab. This can be in the
reinforcement mark definition.
• Store strand code – With option Store strand code you may choose to
store (or not) a user-defined textual attribute TS_STRAND_CODE to part.
• Strand code – In field Strand code you may enter a string template for the
value of the above mentioned user-defined attribute. The default template
is the total number of created strands. The template may contain any text
and the predefined fields for:
• %NUMBERS – is the numbers of created strands with different sizes
and/or grades e.g. 10 (for one size & grade) or 6+4 (if two sizes and/or
grades has been used).
• %SIZES – sizes of the strands e.g 1/2 or 1/2 + 3/8.
• %GRADES – grades of strands.
• Create strand at voids – The option Yes will show the strands even though
the voids are present. The option No will not show the strand if void is
present at any location along the strand path.
3.12 Post-tensioning (61)

The Post-tensioning (61) component enables Tekla Structures to accurately
model most post-tensioning profiles and attributes. Use the tabs in the
Automated Reinforcement Layout 711 Post-tensioning (61)

component dialog box to load a previously saved PT (post-tensioning) tendon
scheme, or a new tendon scheme.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in the Post-tensioning (61) dialog box to define the

Tendon Tendon size, Grade, Tendon
properties Number of tendons, properties
Spacing between tendons, (page 712)
Rotation angle, Grouted
system.
Tendon Tendon profile, Start point Tendon profile
profile offset A1, End point offset (page 713)
A2, Sway drape D, Bend
radius R, Width W,
Centerline Offset, Loop
count.
Attributes Enter the tendon
properties.
Tendon properties
Use the options on this tab to define the following properties:
Option Description
Tendon size and grade Select the tendon size and grade
from the catalog of available
options.
Number of tendons Enter the number of tendons in
the group.
Spacing between If you have specified more than
tendons, S one tendon, input the spacing (S)
between tendons.
Rotation angle Specify the rotation angle of
tendon/tendon group around the
input points from the default
plane. The default plane is the
plane which is parallel to
the“strong axis”of the part.
Grouted system Specify whether the tendon is to
be a grouted system or a non-
grouted system. This option

Option Description
defines whether Tekla Structures
uses the strand in determining the
ultimate capacity.
Furthermore, you can input
custom or vendor specific post-
tensioning information, including
unique and/or multiple tendon
systems, grease thickness, jacket
material, jacket thickness, and
jacket diameter.
Tendon profile
You have the following options:
Option Description
Straight
Parabolic
Straight one
point
Loop

Option Description
Depending on the profile selected, you can input the required fields below:
• Start point offset A1
• End point offset A2
• Sway drape D
• Bend radius R
• Width W
• Centerline Offset
• Loop count
3.13 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)

Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) creates edge and corner reinforcement
for concrete panels and slabs. You can reinforce solid or sandwich precast
concrete panels, or vertical and horizontal cast-in-situ slabs.
Objects created
• Reinforcement
Use for
Slab with edge and corner
reinforcement and diagonal bars
around openings
Limitations
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) does not create the slab main
reinforcement. The main reinforcement can be created using slab
reinforcement components, for example, Pilecap reinforcement (76), Pad
footing (77), Slab bars (18), or Reinforcement mesh array in area (89). The
Automated Reinforcement Layout 714 Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)

main reinforcement can also be created by using the reinforcement creation
commands on the Concrete tab.
Before you start

Create a panel or a slab.
Selection order
1. Select the main part (panel or slab).
The reinforcement is created.
See also
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab (page 715)
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab (page 717)
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U bars tab
(page 718)
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Picture tab

Use the Picture tab to control the edge and corner reinforcements, the
cutouts, and the corner cutouts in the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62)
modeling tool.
Reinforcement
Option Description
Define how the corners are reinforced.
Diagonal corner bars are created to an opening.
Diagonal corner bars are not created to an opening.
Aligned with slab Select whether or not the edge bars, diagonal bars
slope and U bars are aligned with the slope of a slab that
has different corner thicknesses.
The default value is Yes.

Cutouts
Option Description
Edge bars are not created to the cutout.
Edge bars are created above the cutout for the defined
length.
Edge bars are created above the cutout.
Edge bars are created to the cutout.
Reinforce opening Select whether openings are reinforced.

Max block cut size Define the size limit for the cutouts that affects the
edge and corner reinforcement and the diagonal bar
creation.
Edge and corner reinforcement are not created to
cutouts that are smaller than the defined size.
Diagonal bars are not created to cutouts that are
smaller than the defined size.
Corner cutouts
Option Description
Edge bars on both sides of the corner cutout are
bent.
This option overrides the Corner bar options 1, 2,
and 3.
Both the edge bars and the U bars are moved a
distance equal to the length of the shorter side of the
cutout.
No bars are moved. Edge bars are created as if there
was no cutout.
Max corner cut out Define the size limit for the corner cutouts.
size
Edge or corner reinforcement are not created to
cutouts that are smaller than the defined size.
Min hole size Define a size limit for the holes.
Edge and corner reinforcements are not created
around holes that are smaller than the size limit. If
the hole is not rectangular or round, the size of the

Option Description
hole is determined by the maximum dimension of
the bounding box around the hole.
For example, if you do not want to create edge or
corner reinforcement around holes that are 200 mm
or smaller, enter 200.
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Edge/Diag bars tab

Use the Edge bars and Diag bars tabs to control the edge and diagonal
reinforcing bar properties, reinforcing bar overlapping, and concrete cover
thickness in the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) modeling tool.
Option Description
Start number Starting number for the part position number.
Grade Strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars.
Bending radius Edge bar bending radius.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcing bars.
For example, you can display reinforcing bars of
Reinforcing bar overlap
Option Description
L1, L2, L3 Reinforcing bar overlapping length.
Number of reinforcing Number of reinforcing bars in the reinforcing bar
bars group.
Create as one group Select whether the identical edge bars and
diagonal bars are created as a group.
The default value is Yes.
Concrete cover thickness
Option Description
C1, C2, C3, C4 Bottom, top, and side concrete cover thickness
for the edge and the diagonal bars.

Minimum bar length
Option Description
Minimum bar length Minimum length of the edge bars on the Edge
bars tab.
If the bar is shorten than the entered value, the
bar is not created.
Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62): Horizontal/Vertical U

bars tab
Use the Horizontal U bars and Vertical U bars tabs to control the U bar leg
length, concrete cover thickness and reinforcing bar properties and spacing in
the Edge and Corner Reinforcement (62) modeling tool.
U bar length
Option Description
1 U bar leg length.
2 Top, bottom, and side concrete cover thickness for U
bars.
Reinforcing bars
Option Description
Create U bar Select whether the U bars are created.
In addition, on the Vertical U bars tab, you can select
whether the vertical U bars are created using the
same settings as the horizontal U bars.
Same as horizontal and inside: vertical U bars use
the same reinforcing bar settings and concrete cover
value as the horizontal U bars, and the vertical U bars

Option Description
are placed so that they fit inside the horizontal U
bars.
Same as horizontal and outside: vertical U bars use
the same reinforcing bar settings and concrete cover
value as the horizontal U bars, and the vertical U bars
are placed outside the horizontal U bars.
Start number Starting number for the part position number.
Grade Strength of the steel used in reinforcing bars.
Class Use the Class to group reinforcing bars.
For example, you can display reinforcing bars of
Bending radius U bar bending radius.
U bar creation and spacing
Option Description
Ignore cuts smaller than Cuts that are smaller than the entered value
are ignored and do not affect the U bar
placement.
Creation method Select how the U bars are distributed.
Number of reinforcing Number of U bars in the reinforcement.
bars
This field is available if you set the Creation
method to Equal distribution by number of
reinforcing bars.
Target spacing value Target spacing value.
Tekla Structures tries to distribute the U bars as
closely as possible according to the entered
value.
This field is available if you set he Creation
method to Equal distribution by target
spacing value.
Exact spacing value Exact spacing value.
Tekla Structures creates fixed, equal spaces
between the reinforcing bars.

Option Description
By exact spacing Define several spacing values between the U
bars.
Tekla Structures distributes the bars using the
values you enter in the field.
Enter all spacing values, separated by spaces.
You can use multiplication to repeat spacing
values. For example, enter 5*200 to create five
spaces of 200 mm.
End distance
Horizontal U bars:
Vertical U bars:
Option Description
1 U bar distance from the panel or the slab end.
Stirrups
Stirrups are created instead of U bars when the distance between the edges in
the panel or the slab is so small that the U bars do not get the required cover
thickness.

Position of scanning plane
Option Description
1 U bar offset.
3.14 U Bar of concrete slab (63)

Automatically generates U bars reinforcement for concrete slabs.
Reinforcements
• Precast concrete RC slabs and PC panels (both solid and sandwich)
• For cast-in-situ slabs (both vertical and horizontal).
Use for
To create U bars to an already created concrete slab complete with its main
and secondary reinforcement.
Create the slab’s main reinforcement
• with existing slab reinforcement components (e.g. Pilecap reinforcement
(76), Pad footing (77), Slab bars (18), Reinforcement mesh array in area
(89))
• manually with the tools on the Concrete toolbar (e.g. single bar, bar
groups or mesh).
Before you start

Existing components must be created previously in order to use this
reinforcement tool.
Defining properties
Use the U bars tab to define the properties of the objects that this component
creates:

U bars Generate U bars
automatically U bar (page 722)
reinforcement for
concrete slabs
Automated Reinforcement Layout 721 U Bar of concrete slab (63)

U bars
Use to define U bar properties.
Use the options on this tab to specify

• Prefix value.
• Starting number.
• Name.
• Class number.
• Reinforcing bar size and grade:
Automated Reinforcement Layout 722 U Bar of concrete slab (63)

Option Description
U Bar UB1
U Bar UB2
• Bending radius.
• Top concrete cover.
• Bottom concrete cover.
• Side concrete cover.
• Top leg length.
• Bottom leg length.
• End dist
• Creation method
• Number of bars
• Target spacing value
• Exact spacing values
3.15 Wall panel (64)

Creates reinforcement for different wall panels. Contains options to create
strands and stirrups. Is suitable also for insulated wall panels. You can easily
change the direction (horizontal or vertical) of most reinforcing bars.
Automatically creates parallel or diagonal corner reinforcement around the
openings and notches.
Objects created
This component contains the following reinforcement groups:
• Strands
• Longitudinal reinforcing bars
Automated Reinforcement Layout 723 Wall panel (64)

• Transverse mesh
• Transverse straight reinforcing bars
• Transverse closed stirrups
• Reinforcement for openings
To omit any of these reinforcement groups, set the reinforcing bar size or the
mesh grade to zero.
Use for
Reinforcement
created with
default settings for
a wall panel with a
door opening.
A cross section
from the wall
reinforcement.
Limitations
Does not create reinforcement for the ledges in the wall.

Before you start
Create the wall panel.
Selection order
1. Select the wall panel.
Strand template
Defines the strand positions with grid points within the wall cross section.
Strands may only be located at the positions defined in this template, but the
template allows for a mixture of regular and irregular points.
Strand direction
Changes the direction of strands in the wall.
Grid Spacing along X

Use to define grid spacing values for the x axis. Separate values with commas
or spaces. The first value is the distance from the left edge of the spandrel.
Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.
TIP Use multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2
Grid Spacing along Y

Use to define grid spacing values for the y axis. Separate values with commas
or spaces. The first value is the distance from the bottom edge of the spandrel.
Each successive value is the distance to the next grid point.
Strand pattern
Creates strands at the grid positions defined by a strand template.
Same as left
Use to simplify strand input.

strands at the right end of the spandrel.
• Select No to specify alternate row and debond information at each end of a
strand.

Use the strand template positions in the strand grid to specify the row and
column for each end of the strand. Strands may have different grid row
positions at each end, but a strand may not cross grid columns.
Field Description
Left end - Enter the vertical row number in the strand
Column template for the left end of the strand.
Left end - Enter the debond length at the left end of the
Debond strand.
Right end - If Same as left is No, enter the vertical row
Column number in the strand template for the right end of
the strand.
Right end - If Same as left is No, enter the debond length at
Debond the right end of the strand.
Rows Enter a list of one or more row numbers and/or
row ranges in the strand template at which a
strand should be generated.
Size Select the size of the strands.

Grade Select the strand grade.
Pull Enter the pull force of the strands.

Longitudinal rebar
Specify longitudinal mild reinforcement for the wall panel.
Minimum end clear distance C & D

Specify minimum end clearance distance for C and D fields.
Rebar direction
Use to change the direction of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.
Length type
Select a Length type to define the end constraints of the reinforcing bar group
within the member length. Depending on your choice, enter additional
information is in the L, C, or D fields.
Option Description
Full length Reinforcing bar extends the full length of the
wall panel – excluding the minimum end clear
distance at each end. The L, C, and D fields are
disabled.
Centered Specify a fixed length L for the bar which the
component centers in the length of the wall
panel. The C and D fields are disabled.
Known L, C Specify a fixed length L for the bar and a
distance C from the start of the wall panel. The
D field is disabled.
Known L, D Specify a fixed length, L for the bar and a
distance D from the end of the wall panel. The C
field is disabled.
Known C, D Specify a distance C and D from the end of the
wall panel. The L field is disabled.
XLoc
Specify the horizontal locations of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.
YLoc
Specify the vertical location of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.
Transverse mesh
Specify mesh for transverse reinforcement in the wall panel.
Mesh properties
Select the mesh from the catalog and Tekla Structures fills the other fields
automatically.

Layer properties
You can specify one to three different layers of mesh. Each mesh can be
different or identical.
Option Description
Side cover Concrete cover thickness.
Ht to layer Specify height to the center line of each
layer – h1, h2, h3. If you leave this field
blank, no mesh is created.
Left end distance Specify clearance distance for the left
end. This is the dimension d1 in the
pictureimage above.
Right end distance Specify clearance distance for the right
end. This is the dimension d2 in the
image above.
Continuous Specify whether the mesh is continuous
over the wall panel length, or is used only
at the end(s) of the wall. The options are:
• Select Yes: Mesh extends the full
length of the member
• Select No: Mesh can be defined at
each end using the L1 and L2 fields.
If any openings are present, the
component will trim the mesh around
the opening using the end distance (d1)
dimension as a clearance.
Left end length If the mesh is used only at the ends of
the wall, enter the length for the left end.
(L1)
Right end length If the mesh is used only at the ends of
the wall, enter the length for the right
end. (L2)
Cross bar location Defines whether the crossing bars are
located above or below the longitudinal
bars.

Transverse straight bars
Specifies transverse straight reinforcing bars with varying spacing in the wall
panel.
Properties of wall transverse straight bars

• Specify the side clear cover.
• Specify height to reinforcement level, h1, h2, h3. If h1, h2, or h3 is left
blank, no reinforcing bar is created at that level.
• Specify the end distance to the center line of the first reinforcing bar from
each end.
• Specify the quantity and spacing of reinforcing bars in zones next to each
end.
• If you need another group of reinforcing bars at each end, specify the
quantity and spacing of reinforcing bars in the second group. If the second
group is not required, enter 0 in the quantity field.
• If reinforcing bars are required to extend the length of the wall panel,
specify the maximum spacing allowed between end groups – Spacing in

the third group. If Spacing is left blank, there is no additional reinforcing
bar between the end groups.
NOTE At openings, this component adds reinforcing bars at each side of the
opening using the side cover dimension as distance from the opening
to the center line of the reinforcing bar. These reinforcing bars are in
addition to the typical reinforcing bar.
Bars direction
Select an option to change the direction of the bars.
Transverse stirrups
On this tab you can define the distribution of the stirrups along the wall panel.
You can define up to five zones for the distribution. If the selected wall panel is
an insulated wall, Tekla Structures details the stirrups in the structural (thicker)
wythe only. If both wythes are the same thickness, Tekla Structures details the
stirrups in the same way in both wythes.
Stirrup properties
For each zone you can specify a different spacing of stirrups. Specify the end
distance to the center line of the first stirrup from each end.
• Define the spacing between two stirrups in each zone.

• Define the number of reinforcing bars in each zone.
• Select the bar size.
Stirrup type
Select the stirrup type and enter needed dimensions.

Option Description
No stirrups
90-degree closed stirrup

• Specify the top and bottom
clear cover.
135-degree closed stirrup

clear cover.
U bar pairs
clear cover.
• Specify the lap length
NOTE • The component creates stirrups using the minimum CRSI bend
diameter.
• At openings, this component adds a stirrup/bar each side of the
opening using the top cover dimension as distance from the
opening to the center line of the stirrup/bar. These stirrups are in
addition to the typical stirrups/bar.

Same as left end
Set this to Yes if stirrups are symmetric at both ends of the wall panel.
Rebar grade
Define the grade of the transverse stirrups.
Stirrups direction
Select an option to define the stirrup direction.
Notch opening
On the Notch opening tab you can specify reinforcement around different
openings in a wall panel.
Corner notch reinforcement

Select a reinforcement scheme to apply around wall panel corner notches. The
options are:
Option Description
Diagonal reinforcement around the
corner notches.
Parallel reinforcement around the

corner notches.
Side/end notch reinforcement

Select a reinforcement scheme to apply around the side and end notches of
the wall panel. The options are:

Option Description
notch.
notch.
Opening reinforcement
Select a reinforcement scheme applied around openings. The options are:
Option Description
around the opening.
around the opening.
Notch/opening reinforcement properties
Field Description Default

Min notch Specify first the minimum 6" (150 mm)
dimension, D dimension D beyond which
reinforcement is applied. For
example, if a D value of 2.00 is
specified, component will not
apply reinforcement parallel to
that direction.

Field Description Default
Edge clearance, de Specify the edge clearance from 1,50" (38 mm)
the notch and edge of the wall
panel.
Extension, L Specify the extension of the 18" (450 mm)
reinforcing bar beyond a notch
or re-entrant corner.
This component checks that the
L dimension specified is at least
the minimum development
length of the bar selected. If the
L dimension specified cannot
be achieved due to edge
clearances, hooks are added
automatically.
Rebar size Defines the size of the #4 (M13)
reinforcing bars around
notches or openings.
Click button to select a
reinforcing bar from the
reinforcing bar catalog.
Selecting a size will override the
value in the Rebar grade field.
Rebar grade Field for defining the grade of A615
the reinforcing bars. This field
cooperates with the Rebar size
field.
If any of the straight or diagonal bars approaches closer to the concrete edge
than de from the edge given L, the bar is bent as follows:
Automated Reinforcement Layout 734 Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)

3.16 Reinforcement Strand Layout (66)
Reinforcement Strand Layout (66) creates straight or depressed prestress
strands for flexural reinforcement in a beam.
Objects created
• Straight and depressed prestress strands.
Use for
Straight strands.
Selection order
1. Select the beam.
See also
Strand template (page 735)
Strand pattern (page 736)
Strand profile (page 737)
Attributes (page 738)
Strand template
Use the Strand template tab to define the vertical strand positions with grid
points in a beam in Reinforcement Strand Layout (66). Strands may only be
located at the positions defined in this template.

Grid spacing along X
Use to define grid spacing values for the x axis. Strands are defined by their
row and column number within the grid.
Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from
the left edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to the next
grid point.
Grid spacing along Y

Use to define grid spacing values for the y axis. Strands are defined by their
row and column number within the grid.
Separate values with commas or spaces. The first value is the distance from
the the bottom edge of the spandrel. Each successive value is the distance to
the next grid point.
NOTE Use multiplier to define a repeating series of values. For example, 8*2
Strand pattern
Use the Strand pattern tab to define the placement of the strands at the grid
points in Reinforcement Strand Layout (66).
Same as left
Use to simplify the strand input.
strands at the right end of a strand.
• Select No to define an alternate row and debond information at each end
of a strand.

Use the strand template positions in the strand grid to define the row and
column for each end of the strand. Strands may have different grid row
positions at each end, but a strand cannot cross grid columns.
Field Description
Left end - Row Give the horizontal row number in the strand
template for the left end of the strand.
Left end - Give the debond length at the left end of the strand.
Debond
Right end - If Same as left is No, give the horizontal row number
Row in the strand template for the right end of the strand.
Right end - If Same as left is No, give the debond length at the
Debond right end of the strand.

Field Description
Columns Give a list of one or more column numbers and/or
column ranges in the strand template at which a
strand should be generated.
Size Select the size of the strands.
Grade Select the strand grade.
Pull Give the pull force of the strands.
Strand profile
Use the Strand profile tab to define the profile for strands in Reinforcement
Strand Layout (66).
Strand depression
Strands can be straight or depressed. Use one or two control points to depress
the strands. All strands use the same general profile.
Option Description
Straight
Depressed in 1
point
Depressed in 2
points
Depressed in 2 fixed
points

Depress position
Define the depress positions A and B either as a fixed distance or as a
Strand ht @ position
Define the height of the strand.
Attributes
Use the Attributes tab to define general strand attribute information for
Reinforcement Strand Layout (66).
Strands
Field Description
Serie Series value.
Start A prefix and a starting number for creating a part
number position number.
Name Strand name.
Class Number of the class.

4 CS Components
Topics
This chapter contains the following topics:
• 3D cut (10) (page 739)
• Opening in wall (40) (page 741)
• Rebar in beam (90) (page 748)
• Border rebar for single edge (93) (page 767)
4.1 3D cut (10)

The 3D cut (10) component creates a 3D cut to a concrete part. The cutplane is
determined by picking three points on the (concrete) part edges. The cut
direction can be set. Also an cut offset can be set.
Use for

This component creates a cut
through three points.
The side to be removed can be
defined.
Before you start

Before applying the macro, create the following part:
• Concrete part (panel, column, strip footing)
CS Components 739 3D cut (10)

Defining properties
The component contains only one tab, named Picture.
Tab Content See also

Picture Defining the cut direction. 3D cut (10): Picture
Possibly set an cutplane tab (page 740)
offset.
Picking order
1. Concrete part
2. Three points to determine the cut plane.
3D cut (10): Picture tab

You can define the following settings on the Picture tab.
Cut type
Option Description
Cut right The parts’ right side from the cut plane will be
removed.
Cut left The parts’ left side from the cut plane will be
removed.
Fit plane The removed part is the shortest part (from fit plane
to part’s end).
No cut No cut is applied.
Offset
You can define the offset for the cut plane. The offset distance is always
perpendicular to the cut plane.
CS Components 740 3D cut (10)

Explode component
You can select to explode the component if you do not need to modify the
component after applying it. If you plan to modify the component later, select
not to explode it.
4.2 Opening in wall (40)

Creates an opening in a concrete wall of adjustable size, shape and position.
Can also add an insulation panel to the wall.
Objects created
• Opening
• Insulation (optional).
Use for
Square or circular opening in a wall and adding insulation to the wall.
define rabbet several openings
adding insulation braced girders
Before you start

Create the wall for example as a concrete panel or column.
CS Components 741 Opening in wall (40)

Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Opening in
wall (40) to define the components’ properties:

Opening Defining shape and size of Opening in wall
the opening. Also (40): Opening tab
horizontal and vertical (page 742)
position can be defined.
Insulation Defining insulation Opening in wall
thickness. (40): Insulation tab
(page 748)
Also insulation offset and
creation of partcut for
insulation can be set.
Parameters Defining to add insulation Opening in wall
to the assembly (40): Parameters
tab (page 748)
Opening in wall (40): Opening tab

Use the Opening tab to define the shape and size of the opening:
• Type (page 742)
• Horizontal position (page 743)
• Vertical (page 744)
• Horizontal offset, vertical offset (page 746)
• Rabbet - side (page 746)
• Cut - rotation (page 746)
• Shape of the opening (page 747)
Type
First you can define the type of the opening. The options are:
• Opening
• Opening no rabbet
• Opening with rabbet
• Opening only outside
• Opening only inside

Opening Opening with rabbet Opening only
outside
Horizontal position
The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a
picklist. In the table below are the available options.

Point is left side The opening is
opening created on the left
side from the
component insertion
point.
Point is middle The middle of the

side opening opening is created
from the component
insertion point.
Point is right side The opening is

opening created on the right
side from the
component insertion
point.
Start panel The opening is

created from the
startpoint of the wall.

End panel The opening is
created from the
endpoint of the wall.
Middle panel = The center of the wall

left opening is referencepoint. The
opening is created to
the left side.

middle opening is referencepoint. The
opening is also
created from the
middle.

right opening is referencepoint. The
the right side.
Vertical
The horizontal reference point for creating the opening can be selected from a
picklist. In the table below are the available options.

Pos point bottom The opening is
opening created on the left
side from the
component insertion
point.

Point is middle The middle of the
opening opening is created
from the component
insertion point.
Pos point top The opening is

opening created on the right
side from the
component insertion
point.
Bottom panel The opening is

created from the
startpoint of the wall.
Top panel The opening is

created from the
endpoint of the wall.

bottom opening is referencepoint. The
the left side.

middle opening is referencepoint. The
opening is also
created from the
middle.

top opening is referencepoint. The
the right side.
Horizontal offset, vertical offset

The opening can be moved vertically and horizontally by using these two offset
value fields.
Rabbet - side
With this picture picklist you can define the side where the rabbet is created.

Cut - rotation
With this picture-picklist you can define the rotation of the cut.
Shape of the opening

With the picklist you can choose the general shape of the opening in the wall.
The default shape is a rectangular opening. The other shape is the circular
shape.

Opening in wall (40): Insulation tab
On this tab you can add insulation to the wall. The thickness of the insulation
can be defined. The maximum dimensions can be adjusted with the Offset
value fields.
You can choose to create a partcut in the wall for the insulation.
The option ’Cut opening size’ can be used to define if the insulation should be
cut at the opening in the wall.
Opening in wall (40): Parameters tab

This tab contains only one option: create assembly panel insulation.
Possiblilty to weld the insulation to the panel to get an assembly.
Three options available: ’Default’, ’Yes’ and ’No’. ’Default’-option is same
as ’Yes’-option.
4.3 Rebar in beam (90)

The Rebar in beam (90) component adds reinforcement bars to concrete
beams.
Parts created
Complete reinforcement structure: stirrups and perpendicular rebars are
created in the concrete part.
CS Components 748 Rebar in beam (90)

Use for

Rebars in concrete
beam.
Rebars in a concrete
column.
Do not use for

Use this component to add reinforcement bars to a concrete part.
Before you start

Before the component can be created, you need to create a concrete part first.
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Rebar in
beam (90) to define the properties of the components:

Primary The properties of the Primary bottom
bottom lower reinforcing bars are bars (page 751)
bars defined on this tab.
Grade, diameter and
extended ways of defining
the shape of the bars can
be defined.
Primary top The properties of the Primary top bars
bars upper reinforcing bars are (page 757)
defined on this tab.
Side left Horizontal rebars, left Side left
side. (page 757)
Side right Horizontal rebars, right Side right
side. (page 758)
Stirrups Stirrups in first section of Stirrups
the concrete part. (page 759)
Stirrup Defining the stirrup Stirrup spacing
spacing spacing in the first section (page 763)
of the concrete part.
Stirrups 2 Stirrups in second section Stirrups 2
of the concrete part. (page 764)
Useful when part contains
part cut(s).
Stirrup Defining the stirrup Stirrup spacing 2
spacing 2 spacing in the second (page 765)
section of the concrete
part.
Stirrups 3 Stirrups in thrid section of Stirrups 3
the concrete part. Useful (page 765)
when part contains part
cut(s).
Stirrup Defining the stirrup Stirrup spacing 3
spacing 3 spacing in the third (page 765)
section of the concrete
part.
Advanced Tab for defining comment, Advanced
name, class,prefix and (page 765)
startnumbers for the
various rebar profiles.
Configurati Defining the bending Configuration
on radius. There are three (page 766)
options: (1) Fixed
diameter, (2) From

configuration file and (3)
Relative from diameter.
Primary bottom bars

On this tab the bottom main reinforcing bars are defined.
Grade
Input field for defining the grade of the main bottom reinforcing bars. This
field cooperates with the Size-field.
Size
This field defines the size (diameter) of the main bottom reinforcing bars.
Pressing the Browse-button right of the field will open the Select Reinforcing
Bar dialog box.
In the dialog box you can select the grade and the accompanying diameter.
NOTE Selecting a size will override the value in the Grade-field above.
End conditions left

Picklist to define the rebars’ end condition on the left side. The options are:
Picklist item Example

Default
90 Degree
135 Degree

180
-180
-135
-90
-45
45
End conditions right

Same as End conditions left (page 751), but now for the right side of the
bottom main rebars.
Bend lengths left

Defines the length of the left end-extension.
Bend lengths right

Defines the length of the right end-extension.

Bar not to create
Picklist to define which rebar should not be created. The options are:
Picklist Example
Item
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
_
.
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
.
_
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
.
_
_
.
_
O
_
O
_
O
_
.
_
Creation method
This field defines the way the rebars are created. There are three options:
Option Description
No rebars No bottom rebars are created.

Option Description
Number of bars A fixed numer of bars is created. The
spacing between the bars is
automatically calculated.
By spacing A accompanying field becomes
active. The entered value is the fixed
spacing for the rebars. The number
of rebars is calculated automatically.
Positioning and distances

In the right upper side of this tab a picture and some picklists are displayed.
These fields and lists are to define the position and de rebar distances.
The distance fields are used for defining the size of the rebars. The picklists are
for positioning. Below some examples for the positioning rebars on the left
side:
Picklist Decription Example

item
The part edge is
normative for
positioning the rebar.
The concrete parts’

reference point is
normative for
The picked poition is
normative.
The edge of the top

part cut is normative
for positioning the
rebar.
The edge of the
bottom part cut is
normative for
The centerline of the
concrete part is
normative for

Picklist Decription Example
item
Shape and pattern

The picklists and input fields are used to define the rebar shape, rebar pattern
and rebar distribution.
In the left bottom side of the tab, some picklists are available for defining the
shape and distribution of the bottom rebars.
A - Shape of rebar
These picklists define the common shape of the rebars on both ends of the
concrete part. For some shapes distances can be entered (B).
B - Distance fields
These distance fields only apply for two rebar shapes (A).
C - Rebar pattern
Picklist for defining the rebar pattern. The picklist contains six options:

D - Consider part cuts in longitudinal direction
This picklist defines if part cuts in the concrete part should be taken into
account when positioning the rebars.
Picklist Example
item
E - Consider part cuts in vertical direction

These picklists contain options for defining if rebar shape should consider the
partcuts in vertical direction. For both top side and bottom side the placing can
be defined. Examples:

Primary top bars

This tab defines the top rebars in the concrete part. The picklists and input
fields are similar to the Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars
(page 751).
Example of Primary top bars:
Side left
The rebars which can be created with the Side left tab are placed in
longitudinal direction (just as the Primary bars), but now the bends are created
horizontally. The options on this tab (defining rebar shape, dimensions,
number of bars and rebar distribution) are similar to the options on the
Primary bottom bars tab. See Primary bottom bars (page 751).
Examples of rebars which can be created with this tab:

Side right
Similar to the Side left tab, but now the reference is the parts’ right side. For
more information about the options on this tab, see Primary bottom bars
(page 751).
Stirrups
The Stirrups tab is used to define the dimensions of the stirrups. In the
picture below, the options are grouped.

Section A - Stirrup dimensions
The options in this group are the same as on the Primary bottom bars tab.
For more information, see the following links:
• Grade (page 751)
• Size (page 751)
• End conditions left (page 751)
• End conditions right (page 752)
• Bend lengths left (page 752)
• Bend lengths right (page 752)
Section B - Stirrup dimensions
One input field is available for defining a fixed distance from concrete parts’
bottom side to bottom side of stirrup. Note: this offset is normative.
The input fields in the bottom side of this section are for defining the offset,
width and height of the stirrups.
Section C - Stirrup shape
In this section the general shape of the stirrups is defined.
First there is the Create stirrups option. This picklist has two options:
• No stirrups - No stirrups are created
• Create stirrups - Stirrups are created
The general shape of the stirrup can be defined. You can choose a shape from
the picklist:
Picklist Description Example

item
No stirrups are
created

item
U-shape stirrups
C-shape inside
Closed box
Closed box
overlap
Divided stirrup
Divided stirrups
overlap

item
Double U-shape
Single U-shape
left
Single U-shape
right
Stirrup rotation
The rotation of the stirrups can be set with below picklist. The picklist contains
four options: each option will rotate the stirrup 90 degrees couterclockwise.

Stirrup spacing
This tab is used to define the distribution of the stirrups along the concrete
part. You can define six zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a
number of stirrups. The distance between the stirrups can be defined in two
ways:
• Fixed spacing between each stirrup.
• Distance between outer stirrups. (Spacing is then calculated from this
distance divided by the number of stirrups.)
Examples:
Stirrup reference
The reference for the stirrups can be defined with the picklists. For both ends
the reference can be set. See Positioning and distances (page 754) for more
information.
Omit stirrups
This picklist allows you to omit stirrups.
The picklist has four options:

Stirrups 2
This tab can be used if the shape of the concrete part is not uniform. For
example, if a part cut is applied, you may need different stirrups on that area.
This tab can be used to define a second group of stirrups. See Stirrups
(page 759) for more information.
Stirrups 2
Stirrups

Stirrup spacing 2
This tab defines the spacing of the second group of stirrups.
For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (page 759).
Stirrups 3
This tab defines a thrid group of stirrups. You may need this tab in case the
concrete part contains multiple part cuts. For each area, the properties of the
stirrups can be configured. See Stirrups (page 759) for more information.
Example:
Stirrups 2
Stirrups
Stirrups 3
Stirrup spacing 3
This tab defines the spacing of the third group of stirrups.
For the options on this tab, see Stirrups (page 759).

Advanced
On this tab you can add extra information to the rebar profiles. The following
information can be added:
• Comment
• Name
Rebar profile Default Name

Main bottom rebars RB
Main top rebars RB
Side left RB
Side right RB
Stirrups STIRRUP
Stirrups2 STIRRUP
Stirrups3 STIRRUP
• Class
If the Class fields are left blank, then the following default classes will be
used:
Rebar profile Default Class

Main bottom rebars 201
Main top rebars 202
Side left 203
Side right 204
Stirrups 301
Stirrups2 302
Stirrups3 303
• Series
If this field is left blank, the prefix will be empty for all rebar profiles.
• Start number
If this field is left blank, Tekla Structtures will use ’1’ as default start number
for all rebar profiles.
Configuration
On this tab you can define the bending radius for the rebar profiles. Also the
general rotation of the complete reinforcement can be defined.

Bending radius
The bending radius can be set separately for the main reinforcing bars and the
stirrups. Furthermore the radius can be set separately for the main bends and
the hook-bends.
The bending radius can be determined in three ways:
Picklist item Description

rebar_database.inp The bending radius is determined
from a configuration file
rebar_database.inp. This file is
located in the profil folder.
Relative to diameter For this option the radius is
calculated by multiplying the
reinforcing bar diameter with the
entered coefficient.
Bending radius Use this option to use a fixed value
for the bending radius.
Rotation
The picklist determines the orientation of the complete rebar structure in the
concrete part. The picklist contain four options, each item representents a 90
degree rotation.
4.4 Border rebar for single edge (93)

The Border rebar for single edge (93) component creates hairpin rebars in a
concrete panel or wall.
Parts created
Hairpin rebars.
Use for
Use this component for creating hairpin rebars in a concrete panel.
CS Components 767 Border rebar for single edge (93)

default beam default panel
border reinforcing bars
default floor
Before you start

Before applying the component, the following parts must be created:
• Concrete panel or wall
Defining properties
Use the following tabs in component dialog box Tekla Structures Border
rebar for single edge (93) to define the properties of the component:

Pins The properties of the lower Pins
reinforcing bars are defined on (page 769)
this tab. Grade, diameter and
extended ways of defining the
shape of the bars can be
defined
Pin spacing Defining the profiles Pin spacing
(page 769)
Advanced Stiffener properties Advanced
(page 770)
Configurati Defining the Bolt pattern Configuration
on (page 770)

Pins
On the Pins tab you can define the hairpin profile properties and the hairpin
dimansions. Also the end conditions can be set.
For more information, see Primary bottom bars (page 751).
Pin spacing
This tab is used to define the distribution of the hairpins along the concrete
part. You can define six zones for the distribution. For each zone you can set a

number of hairpins. The distance between the hairpins can be defined in two
ways:
• Fixed spacing between each stirrup.
• Distance between outer hairpins. (Spacing is then calculated from this
distance divided by the number of hairpins).
For more information about Pin Spacing, see Stirrup spacing (page 763).
Advanced
On this tab you can define additional information to the hairpins.
The following information can be added:

• Comment
• Name
• Class
• Part Prefix
• Start number
Configuration
On this tab you can define

Extra rotation
This picklist allows you to rotate the hairpin rebars. There are three options:
No Around X Around Y
Bending radius sec

Picklist to define how the bending radius should be calculated. For more
information, see Bending radius (page 766).
Detect outside geometry

This parameter can be used to detect part cuts in the concrete part. The
search area is defined with two parameters:
Distance in material and a Position in plane picklist.
Use these parameters to define the reference for the rebars. See the examples
below for more clarification:
(The concrete panel has thickness 200 mm. The partcut depth is 100 mm.)

Draw geometry with profiles
Picklist to define if geometry profiles should be created or not. These
geometry profiles define the rebar insertion point, which is based on the
values for Distance in material and can help setting up the rebar pattern.

Detect negative volume
If a negative volumne is applied to the concrete panel, you can define is this
negative volume should be recognised or not.
In below example a Part Cut is added with depth of 110 mm. If the value field
is set to 0, the rebars can not be placed correctly.
If the value field is set equal or greater to the part cut depth (e.g. 110), the
panel thickness will be recognised and the rebars are placed correctly.
Difference in thickness Difference in thickness

=0 = 110

Draw axis
The Draw axis-picklist has two options: Yes and No. If ’Yes’ is chosen, the
component creates extra colored profiles. This can help to set up the
component and gives more clearness in component orientation.
If ’No’ is chosen, the extra colored profile are omitted.

5 Disclaimer
© 2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced
Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed
by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets
certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other
warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the
Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software.
All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth
in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important
obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Trimble
does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Trimble reserves the right to make changes and
additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by
international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or
distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and
criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla BIMsight, BIMsight, Tekla Civil, Tedds, Solve,
Fastrak and Orion are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Trimble
Solutions Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other
countries. More about Trimble Solutions trademarks: http://www.tekla.com/
tekla-trademarks. Trimble is a registered trademark or trademark of Trimble
Inc. in the European Union, in the United States and/or other countries. More
about Trimble trademarks: http://www.trimble.com/trademarks.aspx. Other
product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be
trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or
brand, Trimble does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement
by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except
where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2010 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights
reserved.
Disclaimer 776 Border rebar for single edge (93)

EPM toolkit © 1995-2006 Jotne EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights
reserved.
Open Cascade Express Mesh © 2015 OPEN CASCADE S.A.S. All rights reserved.
PolyBoolean C++ Library © 2001-2012 Complex A5 Co. Ltd. All rights reserved.
FLY SDK - CAD SDK © 2012 VisualIntegrity™. All rights reserved.
Teigha © 2002-2016 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
CADhatch.com © 2017. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Publisher © 2014 Flexera Software LLC. All rights reserved.
This product contains proprietary and confidential technology, information
and creative works owned by Flexera Software LLC and its licensors, if any. Any
use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of
such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the
prior express written permission of Flexera Software LLC is strictly prohibited.
Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software LLC in writing,
possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or
rights under any Flexera Software LLC intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
To see the third party open source software licenses, go to Tekla Structures,
click File menu --> Help --> About Tekla Structures and then click the 3rd
party licenses option.
The elements of the software described in this Manual are protected by
several patents and possibly pending patent applications in the United States
and/or other countries. For more information go to page http://
www.tekla.com/tekla-patents.


Tekla - Concrete Components Reference - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla - Concrete Components Reference - 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla - Concrete Components Reference - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the main concrete detailing components discussed in the document?

What are some of the main concrete detailing components discussed in the document?

What are some of the steps involved in defining a seating connection?

What are some of the steps involved in defining a seating connection?

Tekla Structures 2017i

Concrete components reference

©2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation

1 Concrete Detailing ...................................................................... 13

3 Automated Reinforcement Layout .........................................600

4 CS Components ......................................................................... 739

This section introduces the concrete detailing tools available in Tekla

1.1 Seating connections

Concrete Detailing 13 Seating connections

Seating with dowel (75)

Concrete Detailing 14 Seating connections

Before you start

Tab Contents See also

Concrete Detailing 15 Seating connections

Fitting the beam or column (75)

Fits the beam.

Concrete Detailing 16 Seating connections

Bolt hole grouted. No nut or washer plate.

Bolt hole grouted. Bolt, washer plate, and

Concrete Detailing 17 Seating connections

Nut and bolt plate recessed into the

Defining recess dimensions

Bearing plate position (75, 76)

Square with column.

Concrete Detailing 18 Seating connections

Connects two beams to a column using anchor bolts.

Before you start

Concrete Detailing 19 Seating connections

Tab Contents More information

Concrete Detailing 20 Seating connections

Shaping beam ends (76, 78)

Seating with dowel to flange (77)

Concrete Detailing 21 Seating connections

Situation More information

Before you start

Tab Contents More information

Concrete Detailing 22 Seating connections

Creating a recess (77, 78)

Two-sided seating with dowel to flange (78)

Concrete Detailing 23 Seating connections

Connects the flanges of two beams to a column using

Before you start

Tab Contents More information

Concrete Detailing 24 Seating connections

1.2 Beam and column connections

Concrete Detailing 25 Beam and column connections

Secondary is fit to the main

Before you start

Concrete Detailing 26 Beam and column connections

Corbel connection (14)

Concrete Detailing 27 Beam and column connections

Part identification key

Concrete Detailing 28 Beam and column connections

Corbel connection (14): Picture tab

When beam sloped, adjust